Home

HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers service manual

1. ENWW t diagram HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Ircul 2 zsa RTE esd RTE reueg i ed sosuag uonoeiag dosueg edd 19814 44 FJ 9 358 axunos dn xoid Aea esodind inw uonoejeq dn yolg euesseo varer LISA Ej anos ovs H zisa ES TE aws uge D EI nanma toaa Sr x snas D Do isa FRE vsd FE E S anos D nas D echt Josh FY wos bie 105ueg uonoejeg LHO Ka uou uonosieg olo josuog uonoaiag Hiis oes uonsareg jede enesseo wi azig Jaded y sseg Ferien feit en eg Doch Siso Ff 89d dn old ovo S san D NGOON EMS ONS opt 8 ido FF VIYQOGA us t 5 sino H auos Wun 4euueog iose1 xg ver D s IMS noen FEE Bal proustos Are wa Wie HE ueg S pppeg anz F3 Kea asodand ninyy ey wi D 5 E DS 8 SN Josueg uonoejeq Ed 78152 H 8 BulBeBuasig Buidojeneg rar vaas P wun jesn4 a H 2127 naa D oorr Geueeg Notnvs Sd Hae su H dad euesseo Lr Um BE z co cl H Nasva nad D crt ONDA 7 Se 3 SES BS dran we 2 INYA H wvsvua 3 TH EN 190 dreid Eco A H vsa 8 ZH 030 ri E id ONDd M am v re E emp asoorr APER 8 eunsodxa Area 9 E o AL sro I wun 813 a aves D sosueg uonoejeQ as oe ID aach H ett unig WORSEd WOH uni xa I r1 Fy canna M mois P Se E I BER awe QN9S yun euueogjiese1 W vo H eB H ivards ner Bed H noda HA 2040 S H anda D os om j ea D oe ane feet SFY ads wma D uonsod euop una W T3 Gd 7 Ideen 0 H ot E ssa Hr owes Losueg uopsereg E H ns S om HH peeds
2. TE i DEVI 1 Attaching ATTS Dod high voltage 41 ATT generation i ME circuit Attaching roller i I Li TRS TE Transfer TRI high voltage 1 TR2 generation TR3 i E circuit TRA High voltage power supply circuit Low voltage power supply The low voltage power supply circuit converts the ac voltage that is input from the electrical outlet to dc power and delivers it to each load in the printer Figure 5 9 Low voltage power supply circuit shows the low voltage power supply circuit including the amount of voltage supplied to each component 116 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 9 ENWW The ac power is supplied to the low voltage power supply by turning on the power supply switch SW5 The ac power is converted to the dc power that the printer requires 24 V goes to the motors solenoids clutches and the high voltage power supply circuit 5 V goes to the laser driver PCA the beam detect PCA and the formatter 3 3 V goes to the formatter the sensors and the ICs in the DC controller PCA 24 V is divided into 24 VA which is constantly sent from the low voltage power supply circuit and 24 VB which stops power supply when the top cover or the front cover is opened 24 VB goes to the fuser power supply circuit high voltage power supply circuit and the motors and so
3. Enabling memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models If you installed a memory DIMM set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory To enable memory for Windows 98 ME and NT HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers 2 Right click the printer and select Properties 3 On the Configure tab click More 4 Inthe Total Memory field type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed 5 Click OK To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer and select Properties 3 On the Device Settings tab click Printer Memory in the Installable Options section 4 Select the total amount of memory that is now installed and then click OK 104 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer which comes with an open EIO slot 1 Turn the printer off and disconnect all power and interface cables 2 Locate an empty EIO slot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot onto the printer and then remove the cover You will not need these screws and cover again Figure 4 3 HP LaserJet 4600 models Figure 4
4. 236 Jam locations HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer 321 2 x 500 sheet feeder HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only 322 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 354 Repetitive defects ruler 2 of 2 cseteris teet Re ene nd 355 HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map 360 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models menu map 361 Printer configuration page HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 374 HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configuration page s 375 Supplies status page HP Color LaserJet 4650 model is shown 376 Usage page HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sseseeseeeeesseserreserrreseeen 377 Usage page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ssesessesreeeserrsserrrssreen 377 File directory page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown 379 PCL font list page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown 380 PS font list page etude LS 381 RGB samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 381 CMYK samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models snnsesnsseneeneseen 382 Formatter LED HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sees 384 Formatter LED HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ssssssss 385 Door switch and ETB connector ssesssesssseeetiesrinrrenstessttetttrtrrnnnennseresrent 386 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement
5. sss nnne 352 Communications check 356 Information menu 2i iocus tere eene e pete te S bte eade ek ededece ete ad 361 Paper handling menu sss eene nennen nnns 362 Printing SUbImeru eir ccce ette trece Pm eon deeper 363 Print quality SUBMENU n oie tete d dee dee e a t e nene dg 364 System setup submenu in eee eerte tereti eet eed exea 365 VO SUBMENU seabed i a en een een eed 367 Resets menu 2 een EE ae ee 367 Diagnostics Hop s 368 Service menu satte au 369 Tray 2 paper size codes ssssssssssssssseeenenee emeret 389 Sensor test letter codes s sse 390 SONSOPS esi ete be quoe tr et dodo eee A 393 el Ve Le EE 396 Motors anditans Lua teat uec ed E und e 398 SWITCHES 4 55 tn rennene 411 SENSORS unne tct e pu eger anaerobe trade 414 ele Le EE 416 Motors and fans i ei ul seksten 418 Technical support Web sites and related documentation 435 Supplies and accessories rrrnrrnrrrnnnnnrrrrrnnnvnnronnrnnnnn nar nennentennnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnen 436 Common fasten EFS a e a aaa aaea a Ee Di Eaa aaea aa Aani 440 Printer PCAS etre acte a dta aaa a aeo rta 445 External covers and panels sssssssssssssseeee ees 447 Internal components 1 of D 449 Internal components 2 of D 451 Internal components 3 of D 453 Internal components 4 of D 455 Internal components 5 of D 457 Paper pickup drive assembly e DE Drum drive assembly ih 5 ertet beet iot
6. sssssssssseeeeeneenn eene nennen nennen nnne nennen 26 Ee ee lee TEEN 26 Power consumption ssssssssssssesseseeneneenem enne nnne er err nin enne EEEE EEEE ESEE nnns 26 Paper USC ione neci a dtr FEE Eee saa ikke 26 EL LEE 26 AP LaserJet printing supplies iu ttt tenerent din deren tod beaten evade 26 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information 27 Recycled papel ET 27 Material restrictions 22 bn ians aa aaa a Ea e 27 For more Information TE 27 Hewlett Packard limited warranty staiement enne 28 Country region laser safety statements menn 30 Canadian DOC regulations sse eene eee enne nennen enne nnns 30 EMi statement Korea ete eene terae ore ei p ec ete gua eset tun eodd 30 VCCI statement Japan teet rot eese traba ut resa RR aegis aaa 30 Laser Statement for Finland enne enne 31 1 Model configurations This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models which are referred to collectively as the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer The following figures and table show the configuration for the various models of HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer The HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer each come in five models Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models 1 HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n
7. 83 Location of supplies iinei ori te ebat Ib eee iion eu idoneo Tb aede t 84 HP LaserJet 4600 models n r im aenn koisen anaa an a aa aE aAA aTa 105 HP LaserJet 4650 models sssssssssssssseseeeeeneeneenel 105 HP LaserJet 4600 models rnnnnnrnnrrnnrnnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennrenerrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnenneene 106 HP LaserJet 4650 models ssssssssssseeeeeeenenneenenel 106 Basic system operation nu SEET nd Frakes dE 108 Engine control system rrarrrrnnnnnnvvrnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnrsrrrnnnnersrrrnneeersrrnnnnerssrrnnnenner 110 DG controller CIRCUIT 25 roto t sen tt de orte P dp TA ee fes 111 Motors and fans HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers 112 Fan and environment sensor HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 112 Fuser power supply circuit sssssssssssssssseeeeen eer 114 Heater temperature control circuit eesssssssseeeenes 115 High voltage power supply circuit se m 116 Low voltage power supply circuit sssssssem 117 Formater System 2215 eee a oe e EL oe pra d Eae d e a n 118 Laser scanner system nire tert ete ae ERE RES RE banning kneet 122 Scanner motor control circuit sssssssssssssseeeenneneeees 123 Image formation system e n EAE EA EE emere 124 Image formatiori DrOC6sS onte a n EE EEEE EEE 125 Print Cartridges ute AATE A 126 Memory t
8. eu El NOENVA uey Aiddng semod ERY ewen i zas t Rm i z sosueg Arena zeng E Y T E a a3 um E S i Josuag ny ade RES BEER UU fe enen T Ve uej eBpuyeg T Nod mes i sisa Fi SaN oa 5 sino inv AE S No 03 B i ued AUD n TH wa eve CE onde eum S pA H SIA JoJON een g wien emie set E 1 BuBeBuasig Budoronoa x3 E es un Bo vas ST SS Saba Jojo BueBuasig I TB uud an Buidojanag MILE EE wee amp ua 5 ainsodxg Arewug ag Gei e B sor teat E n E JOSUBS UONSOd ver R DREI E TA wan ung MR Ce Ki z T T rE vet T S zn i z Josuag uosod sio 2 I uos E au WIG W rz ork Ac Lr zB ee as cu SH onos an SE oce 5 E ES Slareega tena w ous SG ud dox sosuag uowsog BE GB ne TH ewo ung O SE t TED vam wng UB ee Y EI z n T E sH Yen sus B EI Y z 5 Josuag uosod 1 Tir 3 z wo wig 9 g i3 23 an 5 J eunsodxg Arena frisk B son z LH s t TED en ung a map nion A or Dis rams axos 122m Q TE Hono 1 i sem rur TA sso EI E eegen d at HH fina szor Janaooy Br anos une Hr THH Gen P an r d En uses 3 einsodxa kewd o D bs By nor rf Ces ONS SH eee TH w 5 SC SBS ar B3 E SEH E TEJ vam wng i SE ten r 3 D 3B anos S SHO z tH ooa 3 Y L 8 jz x n S Zb 3 8i z sem ur Es 5 8 atsar 5 Dis Josueg uonoereq uoneasibersiu 10 09 3 38 3s 88 3 2 H 3 30 88 88 880 a E Poll 3 38 B aisafnferzl0 35 220 288 33 EEEEE
9. sssssssssseeene enne nnns 322 AMM FOCOVETY RTI EET 324 AVOlding Bu T 325 IEEE 326 Paper transport troubleshooting ssssssssssssseseeeneeerenen enne nnns 333 Multiple pages are fed sssssssssssssssssssssssesseeee nennen nnne rmerer nnne nnne neret 333 Media is wrinkled or folded rerit ritate rica Eod dei barn m it 333 ele EE E 334 Image formation troubleshooting sssseeeeenene nennen nnne 335 Print quality troubleshooting tools HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 335 Print quality problems associated with media 335 Overhead transparency defects ssssssssssssssseeeeee em ene 336 Print quality problems that are associated with the environment sssssesenesnsseseeeeneenn 336 Print quality problems that are associated with jams ssssseeeee 337 Print quality troubleshooting pages 0 00 2 eect cette reer tenn meme 337 Understanding color variations eessen eene 337 Color selection process JAN 338 Matching ee e rM 338 Using ClO EEE EEE NERE ER EEE 338 Color ee e EE 339 Adjusting color balance ssessseeee nennen nennen nnne nnns 341 Image defects eei ate tit ire ede me epu ae ec eterne 343 IB pine d ER 344 Light colo E 344 ENWW 237 Dark irmage ie eee knit 345 Darkcolor us endete RM 345
10. ssseseeseseeerssseerrstsetrrsssrtnnrssennnnneea 389 Location Of Sensors Le ee ee ede aad dre lige e oed e a Dna dod 392 Sensors on the the paper pickup unit the sensors are on the back side of tlie PGA aen e eoe uve ee ae e Det eee te ebd ve Lee ete v ed 392 Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor ssssssseees 393 Sensors 2 x 500 sheet feeder sse 394 Location of Solenoids a ie ier ge Ee rt e ne Hen 396 Solenoids on the paper pickup unt 397 Solenoids 2 x 500 sheet feeder ssssssssseeeeeennns 397 Location of motors and fans sss 398 Motor 2 x 500 sheet feeder A 399 Test page Switch x iiec e ce oe to ee ee e e oe ba e o laete 402 Eocatiori of MAIN parts oreet te nadie tedio dae e EE 409 Main parts 2 x 500 sheet feeder AA A0 Location of switches ssssssssssssssseseeeemeeenen ennemis 411 Switches 2 x 500 sheet feeder ssssssssssseee em 412 Location of sersors ec Det rte PAPER DERE DC ER RA ER ER 413 Sensors on the paper pickup unit sensors are on the back of the PCA 413 Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor sse 414 Sensors 2 x 500 sheet feeder sss 415 Location of solenoids ssssssssssssssssssseeeeeen nennen 416 Solenoids on the paper pickup unt AT Solenoids 2 x 500 sheet feeder A AT Location of motors and fans sss 418 Moto
11. 231 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 2 of 2 231 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor 1 of 2 232 xv xvi Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 Figure 6 94 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 Figure 7 36 Figure 7 37 Figure 7 38 Figure 7 39 Figure 7 40 Figure 7 41 Figure 7 42 Figure 7 43 Figure 7 44 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor 2 of 2 232 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper sensor 1 ONS ET 233 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper sensor 2 MC 233 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper sensor 3 ORS esee tussi el tun E er EE te Nen edd 234 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper detection reme ME 234 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA rnrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnn 235 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
12. Figure 3 5 Direct to network connection Network print server Connect one end of a network cable into the server Connect the other end to the network Connect one end of a second network cable to the printer and the other end to the network Figure 3 6 Network print server connection 56 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 ENWW Peer to peer direct to network Connect one end of a network cable to the computer Connect the other end to the network Connect one end of a second parallel cable to the printer and the other end to the network Peer to peer connection direct to network Peer to peer parallel Connect two or more computers to the network hub by using network cables Connect one end of a parallel cable to the printer Connect the other end to a computer Peer to peer connection parallel Enhanced I O EIO configuration This printer comes equipped with three enhanced input output EIO slots The three EIO slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards or other devices Plugging EIO network cards into the slots increases the number of network interfaces that are available to the printer Connecting to a computer 57 Note Note 58 EIO network cards can maximize
13. ssssssssseee eene 188 Remove the drum home position sensors sssssssssseee 189 Remove the interlock Cover esses 190 ENWW ENWW Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Remove the interlock arm ssssssseeeenn eme 190 Remove the drum drive motors cyan motor is shown s es 191 Remove the memory tag antenna PCA cyan is shown 191 Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly 192 Remove the DC controller PCA emen 193 Remove the memory controller PCA sss 194 Remove the cassette paper size detection switch sssssssus 195 Remove the formatter HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown 196 Remove the low voltage power supply
14. HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Service Manual Copyright O 2004 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information in this document is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be held liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q3668 90901 Edition 2 05 2004 Trademarks Adobe Adobe Photoshop PostScript and the Acrobat logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries regions Corel is a trademark of the Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited Linux is a U S registered trademark of Linus Trovalds Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PANTONE Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color UNIX is a registered trademark of the Open Group ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Safety Information WARNING Potential Shock Hazard Always follow basic safety precautions
15. ssssesseme 197 Remove the low voltage power on the rear ssssssee 198 Remove the low voltage power supply on the left side sssus 198 Remove the power supply fan 1 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 199 Remove the power supply fan 2 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 200 Remove the formatter case of 201 Remove the formatter case of 202 Disconnect the laser scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable 203 Remove the laser scanner cover plate of 203 Remove the laser scanner cover plate 2 of 204 Remove the left side laser scanner retaining bar 1 of 2 left side of printer oii ALI eene tl dede dtu eo eb et dede e e eee dee 205 Remove the left side laser scanner retaining bar 2 of 2 rear of printer 205 Remove the right side laser scanner retaining bar 1 of 2 right side of eic gc degen Kier auld ote E 206 Remove the right side laser scanner retaining bar 2 of 2 rear of printer 206 Remove the laser scanner assemblies essssseeee 207 Remove the high voltage power supply PCA ssesesssseesrresseerrrsserrrrsesrere 208 Align the high voltage power supply PCA see 209 Remove the toner level detection PCA sess 210 Remove the high voltage contact blocks cyan is shown 211 Remove the door awitch enne 212 Remove the fuser power supply PCA 1 of 2 sss 213 Remove the fuser power supply PCA of 214
16. 302 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 13 05 00 JAM IN A page has jammed in the Press for detailed PAPER PATH media path information about clearing the jam For help press Press and V to step through the instructions If paper is folding into an accordion shape check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place If the attaching roller gears are defective replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Replace the paper pickup PCA Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly Calibrate the printer Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 303 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 13 09 00 JAM IN A page has jammed as it TOP COVER AREA entered the fuser For help press alternates with 13 09 00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA Then open and close top cover 13 12 00 JAM IN A jam exists in the duplex path DUPLEX PATH
17. Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM EMI statement Korea ASA erum BS lh o Ae His Udada VE 2 2 4 FAA GAME SE DE AH ASS Zeit VCCI statement Japan COX PRANE eee ost liek VOCI OEE LR DI AB ARRIRA CI CORBI KACO E Bfj uU CU x42 CORB 74 0rLtU 74 73888 rU C PAS NL HETER IE RITT ENHV ET Dal BORA fit TEL ORY HAVEL TFN 30 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW ENWW Laser Statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet 4600 4650 4600 4650n 4600 4650dn 4650dtn 4650hdn laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP Color LaserJet 4650 4650n 4650dn 4650dtn 4650hdn kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil
18. Fuser kit count Use this item to reset the fuser count if the value is lost such as when you replace the formatter This value is initially set to zero at the factory Type a value up to 150 000 This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW FUSER KIT to YES in the Resets menu 406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note ENWW Serial number If you replace the formatter use this item to reset the serial number of the printer Service ID Use this item to show the date that the printer was first used on the control panel This eliminating the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty Because the printer does not have an internal clock the service ID date availability is dependent on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date such as the installer the driver or the embedded Web server If the printer is not connected to a date source then the service ID will not be available and 000000 will appear on the control panel display Restoring the Service ID If you replace the formatter the date is lost Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used The date format is YYDDD Use the following formula to calculate the dates 1 Tocalculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year For instance if the printer was first used in 2002 calculate YY as follows 2002 1990 12 YY 12 2 To calcu
19. oo p a O 2 x E O K cartridge Photosensitive fa dm M Monde SE ib oH Y EG be EG C cartridge Registrati Il egis ration roller ne PS1 Wt o sw foo han SW lo ol SW3 e 9 Cassette pickup roller Feed roller Multi purpose tray pick up roller Registration shutter Figure 5 33 Pickup feed system ENWW Pickup feed system 145 The pickup feed system has the following physical components PS1 Cassette paper sensor PS2 Multipurpose tray paper sensor PS3 Paper leading edge sensor top of page PS4 OHT sensor PS11 Fuser inlet paper sensor PS12 Fuser delivery sensor PS13 output bin full sensor SW 1 Cassette paper size detection switch SW2 Cassette paper size detection switch SW3 Cassette paper size detection switch M1 Cyan drum motor M2 Yellow drum motor M3 Magenta drum motor M4 Black drum motor M5 Pickup motor M6 ETB motor M8 Fuser motor SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid SL2 Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid 146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 34 ENWW Figure 5 34 Pickup feed system illustrates the pickup feed system which can be divided into three units e Pickup feed unit From the point the media is picked from the tray until it reaches
20. ENWW 460 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 12 Drum drive assembly Drum drive assembly cyan magenta RG5 7467 000CN Drum drive assembly black RG5 7468 000CN Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 7469 000CN LED PCA assembly RG5 6394 000CN ENWW Internal components 461 Figure 8 11 Disengaging drive assembly 462 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 13 Disengaging drive assembly Disengaging drive assembly RG5 6507 020CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Motor M7 developing disengaging stepping RH7 1494 000CN ENWW Internal components 463 Figure 8 12 Fuser drive assembly 464 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 14 Fuser drive assembly Fame user 3 Motor M8 fuser DS brushless 24 V 4600 RH5 1495 000CN 1 Only Motor M8 fuser DS brushless 24 V 4650 RH7 1605 000CN Only ENWW Internal components 465 Exploded view 2 Exploded view 1 Figure 8 13 Cassette tray 2 466 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 15 Cassette tray 2 Cassette tray 2 4600 Only Plate separation assembly RF5 3749 000CN Multi purpose tray pickup roller assembly RG9 1529 000CN ENWW Internal components 467 y WX M ADN N E A N I d K Y in YAN EN ee d AAN Paper pickup assembly Figure 8 14 ENWW 468 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 16 Paper pickup assembly ENWW Internal compon
21. If the problem persists reseat the EIO card Replace the EIO card ENWW Replacement parts configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models When the following parts are replaced perform the procedures in this section e Formatter and DC controller e Formatter new or previously installed in another printer e DC Controller new or previously installed in another printer Note The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory Always print a configuration page before and after wait five minutes after the printer power is turned on installing the parts in the above list to verify that the printer configuration information is restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM Formatter and DC controller WARNING Do not replace the formatter and the DC controller at the same time If the formatter and DC controller must both be replaced install a replacement formatter first and make sure that you install the compact flash memory from the removed formatter on the replacement formatter before you turn the printer power on If the formatter and DC controller need to be replaced install a replacement formatter first The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter so that printer configuration information for example the duplexing option
22. treie e 160 Repair ele 160 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD eee 160 nee EE 160 Types Of SCIOWS 161 SUP PUSS LEE 163 Print cartridges and ETB RR tee tbt us 164 Covers and external components sssesssssssssssssssseseeesenee enne nnne nennen nne 165 ET I 165 Eioegoo mE 166 Rear top cover E 167 Lett COVer ssiacectsasualinsisa sda tlecesaadadilesnuanddadlantathteiesaded Gaadanaiasedeasbabadesggunad cnddestasancdecshaatateaeag 169 EI ue e 170 Multipurpose tray tray 1 EE 171 mnes E 172 reium 173 Installing a new overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sesseessss 174 Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 175 Internal components esien nme n nnn nnnnmer sns t nn nere ai aa i ener sn nn nnns 177 Re eu ET UE BE 177 Internal components front sssssssseeeneenene nennen nennen nnns 177 Internal components left side rrnonnrrnnnonnnrrnnnennrrrnnnnnnrrnnnennrnnnnennrrnnnennrnneneennnrenenennnne 184 Internal components rear E 195 Internal components right aide 207 Internal Components LOP EE 212 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder eene nenne 222 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate ssssssssssssssseeee 222 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit
23. Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 ENWW The message PRINTING USAGE appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the usage page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page hp color LaserJet 4600 printer Di Usage Totals ien De een VC wemmer geg AR Black Coverage 3 468 Cyan Coverage 1350 Magenta Coverage 0 613 Yellow Coverage 0 868 Usage page HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 1 Printer identification information 2 Usage totals 3 Historical printer coverage by color Usage Totais equremient Print Modes amp Paper Path Usage actual ga j5 smote L Cyan L tells 28 Usage page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Printer identification information Usage totals Print modes and paper path usage Historical printer coverage by color KON Tools for troubleshooting 377 Print the demo page The printer can produce a print quality demonstration page 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT DEMO 5 Press to select PRINT DEMO The message PRINTING DEMO appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the demo page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page Print the file directory page The file direc
24. For help press 304 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 4 Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press A and Y to step through the instructions Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place If it is defective replace it Replace the fuser WARNING The fuser might be hot 5 Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press and Y to step through the instructions Determine whether the ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective Replace the ETB if they are Check the duplex feed guide which is part of the control panel crossmember assembly If the guide is worn or damaged replace the crossmember assembly ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message 13 XX YY JAM IN TRAY 1 For help press 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY For help press alternates with 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To continue press 22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory The printer ElO card in slot X has overflowed its I O buffer during a busy state emm Acton Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press an
25. Material restrictions This product does not contain batteries This product does not contain added mercury This product contains lead in solder that might require special handling at end of life For recycling information contact www hp com go recycle contact your local authorities or go to the Electronics Industries Alliance Web site www eiae org For more information Go to www hp com go environment or www hp com hpinfo community environment for more information about HP s environmental programs including e Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products e HP s commitment to the environment e HP s environmental management system HP s end of life product return and recycling program Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS Environmental product stewardship program 27 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet 4600 4650 4600n 4650n One year limited warranty 4600dn 4650dn 4600dtn 4650dtn and 4600hdn 4650hdn printer HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warr
26. Online Web registration HP Toolbox HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only PostScript Printer Description files PPDs for use with the Apple PostScript drivers that comes with the Mac OS HP LaserJet Utility available from the Internet printer management utility for Mac OS users HP Toolbox for Mac OS X V10 2 and later HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only HP Web Jetadmin browser based system management tool See www hp com go webjetadmin for the latest HP Web Jetadmin software HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX available for download from www hp com support net printing Embedded Web server 75 Setting network security on the printer This printer features control panel locking which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control panel settings When a menu is locked unauthorized users trying to change settings at the printer control panel will see the following message ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED Administrators can use HP Web Jetadmin software the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure For instructions to lock the printer control panel by using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh see the online Help Locking the control panel Network administrators can prevent users from changing printer control panel settings by establishing a password and locki
27. RH7 1490 000CN RH7 1491 000CN RH7 1494 000CN RH7 1605 000CN RH7 1605 000CN RH7 1607 000CN RH7 5319 000CN RS6 2510 000CN RS6 2511 000CN RS6 2511 000CN RS6 2537 000CN RS7 0135 000CN RS7 0136 020CN RS7 0137 000CN RS7 0138 000CN RS7 0139 000CN VD7 0644 001CN VD7 1732 002CN VD7 1838 001CN VD7 2356 301CN WC2 5452 000CN WC2 5452 000CN WC4 5169 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WP2 5138 000CN WS3 5746 000CN Fan lower power supply fan 4650 Only Table 8 8 on page 453 Numerical parts list 503 504 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Index Symbols Numerics 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder assemblies 410 cassette paper sensors removing 233 circuit diagram 431 connectors locating 427 drive assembly removing 231 driver PCA removing 235 feed sensor removing 232 front cover removing 226 jam locations 322 jams causes of 329 left cover removing 228 locating 10 media specifications 18 motors 399 419 paper size detection operations 158 partnumbers 436 478 PCA locating 421 pickup rollers removing 236 pickup feed operations 144 155 rear cover removing 227 right cover removing 229 sensors 394 sensors locating 415 solenoids 397 417 switches 412 upper cassette pickup assembly removing 230 2 x 500 sheet paper feeders cassette paper detection switch removing 234 500 sheet paper feeder circuit diagram 430 connectors locating 426 drive unit removing 223 jam
28. alternates with 64 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 298 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A scan buffer error occurred emm 0 em 0 Print cartridge motor error 1 Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCA J1013 for cyan J1031 for magenta J1032 for yellow and J1033 for black Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Developing disengaging motor error 1 Reconnect the connectors J4024 and J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the DC controller PCA Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the firmware DIMM making sure that it is in the 168 pin slot J1 Turn the printer off and then on Perform a cold reset If the message persists replace the formatter or firmware DIMM ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm Acton Message 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE ERROR For help press alternates with 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE ERROR To continue press 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL For help press alternates with 68 X P
29. 12 If you installed a memory DIMM go to Enabling memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 101 To install a flash memory card HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Turn the printer off CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card If you install a camera type flash memory card a message appears on the control panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card If you choose to reformat the card all data on the card will be lost 102 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 4 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver remove the eight screws holding the board in place and set them aside 6 Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push it in the slot until it is fully seated CAUTION Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle Note The first flash memory slot marked Firmware Slot is reserved for firmware only Slots 2 and slot 3 should be used for all other solutions ENWW Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 103 7 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and then slide the board into the printer Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step 8
30. 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Envelopes Com10 Maximum weight 105 Monarch C5 DL B5 g m 28 Ib bond Labels tray 1 only A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Chapter 1 Product information maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in Limit of 20 Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in ENWW Table 1 4 Supported media specifications continued Imy Supported media Media specifications Capacity Tray 2 optional tray 3 Paper 60 to 105 g m 16 to 500 sheets of 75 g m and optional tray 3 4 28 Ib 20 Ib paper the 2 x 500 sheet Alene Legal Maximum stack height Executive JIS B5 A5 paper feeder is only Custom of 50 mm 2 inches available for the CLJ 4650 models 2 Minimum size 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 2 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in TransparenciesA4 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 100 sheets Letter Glossy film 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 100 sheets A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 2 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Glossy paper 75 g m to 120 g m Limit of 200 sheets A4 Letter Legal 20 Ib to 32 Ib Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 2 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Duplex printing Paper glossy paper 75
31. 4650 models controls the bias according to the environment conditions e Image density control D max the color misregistration sensor PS12 calibrates the bias value when the image density is at max e Image halftone control D half The color misregistration sensor PS12 calibrates the halftone data in the formatter Environmental change control HP Color LaserJet 4650 models This control calibrates each bias to obtain the best image possible according to environmental changes The environment conditions sensor detects the temperature and the humidity The sensor sends this information to the DC controller in the form of the Temperature Detection signal TEMSNS and the Humidity Detection signal HUMSNS The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the printer based on these two signals The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an environmental change e Developing bias e Primary transfer bias e Secondary transfer bias If the environment sensor detects a temperature of below 30 C 22 F or over 80 C 176 F the DC controller determines this is an environment sensor abnormality and sends an error message to the formatter Image density calibration control DMAX This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of the following events occurs e When the printer is turned on e When a print cartridge
32. 51 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 52 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 52 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 53 X0 ZZ PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 292 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A printer error has occurred X Description 1 beam detect error 2 laser error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow A printer error has occurred X Description 1 scanner error 2 scanner startup error 3 scanner rotation error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow An error has occurred in the on board RAM emm Acton 0 Press C2 to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCA 41009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Press to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCA 41009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Replace the DC con
33. A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available Load the paper tray with the specified media Confirm that the guides are in the correct position Verify that the tray switch is in the STANDARD position so that the printer will automatically detect the size Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions No action is necessary Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message Moving solenoid To exit press Stop key No job to cancel NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED NON HP SUPPLY IN USE alternates with Ready ORDER COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with Ready The printer is executing a Component Test and Solenoid is the component selected The Stop button was pressed but no active job or buffered data is available to cancel This message appears for approximately two seconds before the printer returns to the Ready state A new cartridge
34. Avallable EEN 62 le lte Eet 62 Select the right printer driver for your needs ssssssse ee 63 Printer driver Help Augen gue rae ZA Ed EA SE 63 Software for Macintosh computers ann nnnnnennonnnrnnnn rann eene nnne 64 a BETEN 64 FIP LaserJet Utility 2 sakdua rr eo tote rea iR e e be Rt P Rb de arret pe petas 64 Installing the printing system software eene d 65 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections 65 Installing Windows printing system software for networks sssssesssssrrsssesrrsserrrssreernsses 66 To set up Windows sharing to use the printer on a network ssssssssssssssss 66 Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks sssssseessssesersseerrreseerrrssres 67 Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections USB HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only ssssssssseeeneneeeene nnns 68 Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected 69 Network configuration EE 71 Configuring the printer for the network sssssesseeeeeem mmn 71 Configuring Novell Net Ware frame type parameters sse 71 Software for networks ee tea reete btt ded deb aaa dn ade dira a aepo dde aa pu dnb Ra dee cb ada dd 72 FIP Web Jet dmin EE 73 UND ee 73 Du E 73 Embedded Web setvet Eege se Geek aai 74 u s M OEEEEET 7
35. HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Press C2 to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCA 41009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 53 XY ZZ An error occurred in some Press Stop If the problem RAM ROM MEMORY printer memory persists replace the DDR card in the slot indicated X DIMM Type 1 RAM Y Device Location 1 DDR Slot 1 2 DDR Slot 2 ZZ Error Number 0 unsupported memory 1 unrecognized memory 2 unsupported memory size 3 failed RAM test 4 exceeded maximum RAM size 5 invalid DDR speed ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 311 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued pem O em 0 Message 54 X PRINTER ERROR 312 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting X Description 1 Low fuser temperature 3 Dmax density sensor 5 CPR sensor 6 OHT sensor 7 yellow
36. Message ORDER FUSER KIT LESS THAN XXXX PAGES alternates with Ready ORDER SUPPLIES For menus press C alternates with Ready For help press ORDER TRANSFER KIT LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT For help press alternates with Ready OUTPUT BIN FULL Remove all paper from bin Paused To return to ready press STOP key Performing PAPER PATH TEST 272 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The fuser is near its end of life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages appears More than one supply item is low Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels The transfer unit is near its end of life The output bin is full and must be emptied in order for printing to continue The printer is paused and no error messages are pending at the control panel display The O continues receiving data until the memory is full The printer is performing a Paper Path test Order the image fuser kit Press for detailed information Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Printing can continue until supplies reach its end of life Press for detailed information Press and V to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order an image transfer
37. Outrigger assembly 4650 Only RG5 7523 000CN CANI ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 483 GL J521B Bm oe wt J5007 Figure 8 22 2 x 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 484 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 24 2 x 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 1 2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly RG5 7531 000CN 1 4650 Only ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 485 SR3 0522 AD J522 J5005 er ES Figure 8 23 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly 486 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 25 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly 1 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup RG5 7529 000CN 1 assembly 4650 Only ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 487 Figure 8 24 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly 488 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 26 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly 1 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup RG5 7530 000CN 1 assembly 4650 Only ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 489 Alphabetical parts list Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list Description Table and page 2 x 500 lower cassette 4650 Only RG5 7534 000CN Table 8 21 on page 479 2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly 4650 Only RG5 7518 000CN Table 8 21 on page 479 2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly 4650 R
38. Printcartridge e Print cartridge Media attaching roller E on front of paper G Photosensitive drum 75 mm Any print cartridges or transfer rollers that have a damaged photosensitive drum or center to center the ETB distance 352 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 38 Repetitive defect spacing continued H Photosensitive drum Defect on front of paper Print cartridge Blank spots Registration sub roller Defect on front of paper Paper pickup assembly Fuser delivery roller Fuser delivery roller roller 38mm 38mm Defect on back of paper on back of Defect on back of paper Fuser neg Face down delivery 49 mm Defect on back of paper Fuser roller Cassette pickup roller See the note above Defect on front of paper Paper pickup rollers this table Multipurpose tray See the note above Defect on back of paper Multipurpose tray pickup roller this table pickup roller assembly ENWW Image defects 353 Scale A B c D E F G H J 0 p p 50 60 ap 70 E o 80 E iP ET 90 E 100 E PES 110 E de 120 T 130 H ze dL 140 160 a 170 E 1 180 E 190 T et de s Em 200 E JL ie T 210 H 220 Figure 7 3 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note Figure 7 3 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 might not print to scale and should only be used as a reference tool First occurrence of p
39. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed Note Not all messages are described in the tables those messages that are not listed are self explanatory Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Note Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of these items you must access the Print Quality menu and select CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 282 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 10 XX YY SUPPLIES The printer cannot read or write Turn the printer off and ERROR to at least one print cartridge then on memory tag t at least ang Exchange the cartridge for For help press memory tag is missing the indicated color with a 10 00 00 black print cartridge cartridge in another slot to Note 10 00 01 cyan print cartridge determine whether the dide error follows the cartridge 10 00 02 magenta print cartridge or stays with the slot If the error follows the cartridge replace that cartridge Otherwise continue with step 3 The printer cannot always determine whether the error is in
40. callout 2 to release the board Disconnect the connector callout 3 o Ze c m Remove the high voltage power supply PCA ng AOA Figure 6 59 Remove the high voltage power supply PCA 208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the high voltage power supply PCA be sure to align the white markings on the left side of the PCA with the hooks on the printer and then snap in the PCA Verify that the PCA is aligned correctly by looking through the 12 holes on the PCA callout 5 When the PCA is aligned correctly you can see part of the contact springs callout 6 when you look through the holes pe Figure 6 60 Align the high voltage power supply PCA ENWW Internal components 209 Toner level detection PCA WARNING The toner level detection PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Right cover See Right cover High voltage power supply PCA See High voltage power supply PCA 2 Remove three screws callout 1 3 Disconnect one connector callout 2 4 Remove the toner level detection PCA callout 3 Figure 6 61 Remove the toner level detection PCA 210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 62 ENWW High voltage contact blocks 1 Remove the following assemblies SY 3 0 ge Rear cover S
41. configuration problem Only one copy will be printed A job cannot be stored because of a memory disk or configuration problem The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job Printer error troubleshooting To change media type press C Use and Y to highlight the type and then press to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal set the tray switch to the STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions To change the media size to other sizes leave the tray switch in the CUSTOM position adjust the media guides against the media and close the tray Select the paper handling menu from the control panel Configure the size for the tray To change media type press C Use and Y to highlight the type and then press C to select No action is necessary Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive into the printer If a disk drive is installed delete any previously stored print jobs Highlight the media with amp and VW Press O to select a choice 281 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Wait for printer to reinitialize RAM Disk settings have been No action is necessary changed before the printer automatically restarts or external device modes have changed The printer is coming out of No action is necessary powersave mode
42. e Personal identification number PIN printing for printers that contain hard disks Environmental features e PowerSave setting e High content of recyclable components and materials e ENERGY STAR compliant ENWW Printer features 5 Table 1 2 Printer features continued CINE 80 internal fonts are available for both PCL and PostScript emulation 80 printer matching screen fonts in TrueType format are available with the software solution Supports forms and fonts on the disk by using HP Web Jetadmin Paper handling Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm 3 inches x 5 inches up to legal size 216 mm x 355 mm 8 5 inches x 14 inches HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Prints on media of weights from 60 g m to 163 g m 16 Ib to 43 Ib HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Prints on media of weights from 60 g m to 199 g m 16 Ib to 53 Ib Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy labels overhead transparencies and envelopes Accepts multiple gloss levels Includes a 500 sheet input tray tray 2 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 size and custom media An Optional 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 size and custom media the tray is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn 4600hdn and 4650dtn printers An optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 and tray 4 that supports letter legal exe
43. eeessssssssssssssssssseeneee enne 223 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers sessssssseeeeens 224 500 sheet paper feeder PC 225 Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssesseeeeeeeeeereerenen enne 226 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front Cover s sssssssessrrrrrenssrssttttrtnnnetrttttttrnrnnnstennt enntre renne 226 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover ssssssssssssssseeeeeee eene 227 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover 228 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder right cover sss 229 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly rrnnnnnnnnn nn nn nrnnnnnnnn 230 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly sssssssssssssssseee 231 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor ssssssssssssssssseeeeene 232 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper sensor 233 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper detection switch 234 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA ssssssssssssessssessrnnstestrrrntnssttrttnnntnestenrtnnnnneneenn nnn 235 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers sss 236 159 Introduction WARNING WARNING This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level This chapter includes exploded view illustrati
44. fusing operations 135 151 fusing troubleshooting 350 508 Index G glossy paper media specifications 18 printing on 21 gray settings Neutral Grays 341 Print in Grayscale 340 H halftone control 142 Halftone settings 340 hard disk features 119 file directory printing 361 378 initialization 404 heater temperature control 115 heavy paper 22 Help drivers 63 high voltage contact blocks removing 211 high voltage power supply operations 116 part numbers 445 453 PCA locating 420 removing 208 HP customer care 37 435 HP Driver Preconfiguration 61 HP ImageREt 338 HP Instant Support Professional Edition ISPE 37 HP Jetdirect print servers configuring 71 connecting 56 EIO slots 57 installing 105 models including 2 operating systems supported 58 part numbers 436 troubleshooting 356 wireless printing 59 HP LaserJet Tough paper 23 HP LaserJet Utility Macintosh 64 67 HP Open VMS drivers 62 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program 26 HP Technical Training 435 HP Toolbox features 74 ordering supplies 35 HP Web Jetadmin 73 humidity environment sensor operations 4650 111 141 environmental specifications 12 15 l I O menu 366 I O operations 119 IBM OS 2 drivers 62 ENWW image formation troubleshooting 335 image fuser kit See fuser kit image quality troubleshooting after jams 337 blank images 346 blank spots 350 blurring 350 color 337 341 344 345 346 349 dark print 345 defects 343 diagnos
45. information about the CLJ 4600 and CLJ 4650 models HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Service Q3668 60105 and Support CD ROM HP Color LaserJet 4650 User Guide Q3668 90909 For downloadable versions go to www hp com support lj4650 When connected select manuals 38 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW ENWW Installation and configuration This chapter contains information about the follow topics Unpacking the printer 0 cccccceeecceceeeceeeccneeee cece eeeeeeeeeecaaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseccecccaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeesinees 41 Installing the media tray 2 ct rtr tt ENEE NEEN EENS 46 Connecting POWER 47 Installing Blase gToier li yto o RET 48 Installing a new overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models esssseseesssssrrrssesrrrssererrssreernssses 50 Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 51 Testing the printer operation sssssssssssseseeeeeeeee nennen nennen ener nerrnn nnns 52 Using POWETrSave p 53 TO set PowerSawve TIME cci esse dba Rt ba e eae Sad 53 To turn PowerSave On or Off ronis ritiene Rete cae De er pice etu added Ea ege oae die 53 Connecting to a computer EE 54 Parallel Connectlons varar tcd t Reese ee cte e PE dtque pe deuda td ap Dau onde 54 USB configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models eseeeeeee 55 Auxilia
46. initialize NVRAM Reinitialize the hard disk Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists reseat the firmware DIMM Reseat the formatter Replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Printer error troubleshooting 299 Note Table 7 4 Numerical printer pe HP Color LaserJet 4600 Se continued 8X YYYY The EIO accessory card in slot Turn the printer off and X has encountered a critical then on error EIO ERROR If the problem persists reseat the EIO card Replace the EIO card Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of these items you must access the Print Quality menu and select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero See Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 10 XX YY SUPPLYY The printer cannot read or write Turn the printer off and MEMORY ERROR to at least one print ca
47. printer You can also set these parameters from the HP Web Jetadmin software which is available at www hp com go webjetadmin For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions to configure network parameters from software such as HP Web Jetadmin see the HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide The guide comes on the CD ROM with printers in which an HP Jetdirect 610N print server is installed Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters The HP Jetdirect 610N HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or the HP Jetdirect 620N HP Color LaserJet 4650 models print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type Select a frame type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type To identify the frame type that the HP Jetdirect 610N 620N print server selected print a configuration page Network configuration 71 Software for networks For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide You can find this guide on the CD ROM included with the printer 72 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW HP Web Jetadmin UNIX Utilities ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser HP Web Jetadmin is a browser based management tool and should be installed only on a single network administration server It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux Suse Linu
48. such as cables and sensors rts and diagrams ENWW Ordering parts and supplies Parts that wear The parts on the product that need replacement at regular intervals are listed in Approximate replacement intervals for supply items Parts are available directly from HP at the following Web site www hp com buy parts Parts Order replacement parts from the following Web site www hp com go HPparts Customer support Product documentation and software support can be found at the Web sites listed in Table 8 1 Technical support Web sites and related documentation Table 8 1 Technical support Web sites and related documentation HP Connect Online Go to www connect online hp com for HP partners HP Customer Care Call Centers Go to www hp com support callcenters Information about contacting HP call centers in specific countries regions HP Online Technical Support Go to www hp com support for HP partners Software drivers support documentation and answers to frequently asked questions HP Technical Training North America Go to www compaq com training Classes and schedules Note Select your country region in the select a country or region field at the top right corner of the page HP Parts Go to www partsurfer hp com parts ordering Parts information Go to www hp com go HPparts parts reference guide Supplies and accessories Use the following table to order supplies and accessories for the pr
49. when using this product to reduce the risk of injury from fire or electric shock Table of contents 1 Product information Model configurations ssssssseeeeeem eee nnne errem nenne ener nennen nnns 2 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer sssssssssssseeeemen 2 Printer features snnssnenseosnsnrrtsttostttnnttettttn ttnn tt ett EEAAESEEEEEEEAAEDANEEEAEEENEEOEEEENAEEEREOEEE EEEE ESNEA EERE e nt 5 Printer assemblies EE 9 HP Color LaserJet 4600 model 9 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models A 10 Identification site requirements and specifications rrrrrrrrrnrnovenrnrrrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenannnnnne 11 Model and serial numbers ssessssssssssssssseesese sene enne ten nennen nns 11 Power and regulatory Jabel 11 Site requirements cr eret Fe err dir ere Pe P ene He UTE FEE RAE ERR E Tan ee EY TH ea YPF ages 12 Electrical specifications sssssssssssssssseeenennenenen nenne neret 14 Environmental specifications essere nnne nis 15 Acoustic EMISSIONS fee X 16 Supply storage requirements sssssssssssssseseeseneene nen eren nennen nnns 16 xus 17 Print media Specifications iiti teste e deed ege endi dea Rae 17 Printing on special media ccececsesedectacesswneecesianciiefevesstcansedettecneuddad ga dt la ed m add 20 Environmental product stewardship program sss 26 Protecting the environment 3 2 e
50. 000CN Paper feeder drive assembly 4600 Only RG1 4138 020CN Paper feeder drive assembly 4650 Only RG5 7541 000CN ENWW 500 sheet paper feeder 477 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 8 19 ENWW 478 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 2 x 500 sheet feeder tray assembly 4650 Only Q3674 67901 2 x 500 upper cassette 4650 Only RG5 7535 000CN 2 x 500 lower cassette 4650 Only RG5 7534 000CN 4 2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly RG5 7518 000CN 1 4650 Only ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 479 D J523D See 2 X 500 upper paper pickup assembly See 2 X 500 lower paper pickup assembly Figure 8 20 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 1 of 2 480 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 22 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 1 of 2 FEI level left plate Secures the printer to the RB3 0978 000CN 1 feeder 4650 Only Fixed level right plate secures the printer to RB3 0979 000CN 1 the feeder 4650 Only ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 481 Figure 8 21 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 2 of 2 482 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 23 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 2 of 2 Paper pickup rollers 4650 Only RF5 3739 000CN Adjuster cover 4650 Only RB2 3691 000CN e
51. 169 Remove the left cover 2 of 21 169 Remove the right GOVOer eter hee ette re tht E a RR RT ad duae 170 Remove the multipurpose tray ssssssseemeennenes 171 Remove the front Cover sssssssssssessresrrenrtnsstesttttttrnnnnnsttesttentnnnnnnnnnennr ennnen 172 Remove the control panel 1 of 31 173 Remove the control panel 2 of 31 173 Remove the control panel 3 of 31 174 Removing and replacing the DC controller shield ssssssssssss 177 Remove the paper pickup unit 1 Of 3 178 Remove the paper pickup unit 2 of 2 178 Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA of 179 Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA 2 of 179 Remove the cassette tray 2 pickup rollers sees 180 Replace the cassette tray 2 pickup rollers seeeeese 180 Remove the paper pickup drive unt 181 Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 1 of 2 182 Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 2 of 2 182 Remove the Solenoids sss 183 Remove the color registration detection unit 1 of 21 184 Remove the color registration detection unit 2 Of 21 184 Remove the environment sensor ssssssssssssseeeeem 185 Remove the developing disengaging Tod 186 Reinstall the developing disengaging rod 1 of 2 186 Reinstall the developing disengaging rod 2 of 21 187 Remove the drum drive gears
52. 17 on page 471 ETB latch assembly Table 8 8 on page 453 Fan Cartridge Table 8 8 on page 453 Fan formatter Table 8 8 on page 453 Fan lower power supply fan 4650 Only Table 8 8 on page 453 Filter left side Table 8 5 on page 447 Filter rear Table 8 5 on page 447 Firmware DIMM 4600 Only Table 8 4 on page 445 492 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued Fixed level left plate secures the printer to the RB3 0978 000CN Table 8 22 on page feeder 4650 Only 481 Fixed level right plate secures the printer to the RB3 0979 000CN Table 8 22 on page feeder 4650 Only 481 Fuse 125 V 6 3 Amp 110 V VD7 2356 301CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Fuse 250 V 20 Amp 110 V VD7 1732 002CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Fuse 250 V 4 Amp 220 V VD7 0644 001CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Fuse 250 V 8 Amp 220 V VD7 1838 001CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Fuser assembly 110 V RG5 6439 110CN Table 8 18 on page 4600 Only 473 Fuser assembly 110 V RG5 7450 000CN Table 8 18 on page 4650 Only 473 Fuser assembly 220 V RG5 6517 110CN Table 8 18 on page 4600 Only 473 Fuser assembly 220 V RG5 7451 000CN Table 8 18 on page 4650 Only 473 Fuser cover left RF5 3774 030CN Table 8 18 on page 473 Fuser cover right RF5 3775 030CN Table 8 18 on page 473 Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only RG5 6512 000CN Table 8 14 on page 465 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 493 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued Fuser drive ass
53. 3 and then slide the developing disengaging rod up and out Figure 6 30 Remove the developing disengaging rod Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the developing disengaging rod be sure to rotate the white gear located between the black and magenta drum drive units clockwise until it comes to a complete stop callout 4 You cannot rotate the white gear unless all of the print cartridges are removed Also make sure that the developing disengaging rod passes through the slots in the drive clutches in the up position callout 5 in each of the four drum drive units engaging each clutch The clutch on the yellow drum drive unit is particularly difficult to see and to engage Figure 6 31 Reinstall the developing disengaging rod 1 of 2 186 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 32 Reinstall the developing disengaging rod 2 of 2 Drum drive gears 1 Remove the developing disengaging rod See Drum drive developing disengaging rod 2 Remove the eight screws shown in callout 1 and then remove the four drum gear grounding plates Note The grounding plates and drive gears for the cyan and magenta drum drive units have longer shafts than those in the yellow and black drum drive units ENWW Internal components 187 3 Remove the four drum drive gears callout 2 Figure 6 33 Remove the drum drive gears Note Calibrate the printer after removing and repla
54. 335 Print quality problems associated with media ssssessssesseeesrnrrinnstesttrnrrnnstrssrerrtrnnrn 335 Overhead transparency defects ssssssssssssssseeeeme eem mmeennn nne 336 Print quality problems that are associated with the environment sssssssereensessesesenees 336 Print quality problems that are associated with jams sssss 337 Print quality troubleshooting pages eee 337 Understanding color variations nsei eeke ara AE A AAR AA EET 337 G lor selection Processies eenaa ERR att reb dictata aa a eieaa aaaeeeaa aa 338 Matching Coo CEET 338 Ree Bee TEE 338 Color optl ns ize eMe 339 Adjusting color balance oce TEE 341 Image defects testi otio tema stades ape ter d eb e RO Re Leto e aant 343 Eight irage rene ete e NG 344 Light Color oec tp REIR ERREUR te 344 Dark in E 345 Park e EE 345 Completely blank image 2 ierit dte erit ee din ee ti ee deett eben 346 Alliblack or solid color RCRUM muita 346 Dots in vertical linis iii titer tee eet eda ein e e ER e PEE eet eta ida 346 Dirt on the back of the paper 347 Dirt on the front of the paperi eie a a ee aa aae a aa aa Eie 347 Merticalilines 5 reaa N HARD nm D ni 348 White verticallines vg 22 2 dansa ein bete e nee i I Heec etre ap dead 348 H rizontallines un sura sier bakenden 349 White horizontallines deett tete p A ELL 349 MISSING Colo Lane 349 Blank Spots oti E eege 350 Poor fUSIrIgi ie i ot rites
55. 445 RG5 6400 030CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6410 020CN Table 8 4 on page 445 RG5 6410 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6411 020CN Table 8 4 on page 445 RG5 6411 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6413 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 RG5 6414 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6415 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6418 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6419 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 RG5 6420 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6422 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6423 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6425 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6427 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6430 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 6430 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 6431 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 6432 017CN Control panel assembly 110 V 4600 Only Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6433 017CN Control panel assembly 220 V 4600 Only Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6434 000CN Cable AC 220 V Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6439 110CN Fuser assembly 110 V Table 8 18 on page 473 4600 Only RG5 6446 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6449 020CN Table 8 8 on page 453 RG5 6450 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 RG5 6454 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6456 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 500 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RG5 6459 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 6460 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 6464 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 RG5 6465 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 RG5 6466 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 RG5
56. 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 model 2 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4600 models rrrnrrrnrrnrannrnnrnrrnnnnrennransnnernernnen 9 Back view HP Color LaserJet 4600 models rrrnrrnnnnnrnnrnnrannnnrnnernrrnnnennnnrnnnenr 9 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4650 models rrrranrnnrrnrrnrnnnrrevnrnnnnnvrnrransnrerenn 10 Back view HP Color LaserJet 4650 models rrrnnrannnnnnnnrnnrnnrarevnrrnnnnrsvnrnnrnnee 10 Model and serial number Jabel 11 Power and regulatory Label 12 HP Color LaserJet 4600 4650 model space requirements except for the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer seee 13 HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer space requirements 14 Parallel port connection HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 54 Parallel port connection HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 54 USB connection EE 55 Auxiliary connection EE 55 Direct to network connection sssssssssseee eene 56 Network print server connection sssssssseemm 56 Peer to peer connection direct to network seeeee 57 Peer to peer connection parallel eseeet 57 ETB total page count according to average job length
57. 6467 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 RG5 6468 040CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6468 040CN Table 8 16 on page 469 RG5 6469 000CN Table 8 11 on page 459 RG5 6469 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 RG5 6474 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6476 090CN Cassette tray 2 4600 Only Table 8 15 on page 467 RG5 6484 040CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6484 040CN Table 8 17 on page 471 RG5 6492 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6493 110CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6507 020CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6507 020CN Table 8 13 on page 463 RG5 6510 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6512 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 6517 110CN Fuser assembly 220 V Table 8 18 on page 473 4600 Only RG5 7362 000CN Drum grounding assembly cyan and magenta long Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 7450 000CN Fuser 110 V 4650 Only Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 7450 000CN Fuser assembly 110 V Table 8 18 on page 473 4650 Only RG5 7451 000CN Fuser 220 V 4650 Only Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 7451 000CN Fuser assembly 220 V Table 8 18 on page 473 4650 Only RG5 7452 000CN Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only Table 8 9 on page 455 8 9 on Table 8 9 on page 455 455 RG5 7452 000CN Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only Table 8 14 on page 465 RG5 7453 000CN Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only Table 8 9 on page 455 ENWW Numerical parts list 501 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RG5 7453 040CN Table 8 16 on page 469 RG5 7455 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 7455 000CN Ta
58. 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued Cover cartridge 4650 Only RB2 8196 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Cover sensor RB2 8541 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Damper assembly top cover hinge Table 8 9 on page 455 DC controller PCA assembly 4600 Only Table 8 8 on page 453 DC controller PCA assembly 4650 Only Table 8 8 on page 453 DC controller PCA 4600 Only Table 8 4 on page 445 DC controller PCA 4650 Only Table 8 4 on page 445 Developing disengaging drive assembly Table 8 9 on page 455 Disengaging drive assembly RG5 6507 020CN Table 8 13 on page 463 Drum drive assembly black RG5 7468 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Drum drive assembly black RG5 7468 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 Drum drive assembly cyan and magenta RG5 7467 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Drum drive assembly cyan magenta RG5 7467 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 7469 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 7469 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 Drum ground assembly black and yellow short RG5 6474 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Drum grounding assembly cyan and magenta long RG5 7362 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Environment humidity sensor 4650 Only WP2 5138 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 ETB assembly 4600 Only RG5 6484 040CN Table 8 17 on page 471 ETB assembly 4600 Only RG5 6484 040CN Table 8 9 on page 455 ETB assembly 4650 Only RG5 7455 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 ETB assembly 4650 Only RG5 7455 000CN Table 8
59. 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Supplies Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard See chapter 8 for ordering information World Wide Web Printer drivers updated HP printer software and product and support information can be obtained from the following URL In the U S www hp com Support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites In China ftp www hp com cn support lj4600 or ftp www hp com cn support lj4650 In Japan ftp www jpn hp com support lj4600 or ftp www jpn hp com support lj4650 In Korea www hp co kr support lj4600 or www hp co kr support lj4600 In Taiwan www hp com tw support lj4600 or www hp com tw support lj4650 or the local driver Web site www dds com tw HP Service Parts Information Parts identification and pricing information can also be found on the World Wide Web at www hp com go partsinfo 36 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW HP customer care ENWW Online services For 24 hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection World Wide Web URL for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 4650 models updated HP printer software product and support information and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from www hp com support clj4600 or www hp com support clj4650 Sites are in English Visit www hp
60. CANCEL JOB 258 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low The transfer unit has reached its end of life The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully The printer is testing the developing disengaging motor This motor is called the alienation motor in firmware messages The printer is executing a Component Test and the Belt Only component is selected The printer is executing a Component Test and the lt color gt Cartridge motor component is selected The printer is executing a Component test and the Fuser Motor component is selected Press 2 to identify which supplies should be replaced Replace the identified supplies to continue printing Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Replace the transfer unit to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Attempt the upgrade again Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messa
61. CAUTION Do not touch the lens for the color registration detection unit Figure 6 27 Remove the color registration detection unit 1 of 2 Figure 6 28 Remove the color registration detection unit 2 of 2 Internal components left side The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the left side of the printer 184 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 29 ENWW Environment sensor HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover e DC controller shield See DC controller shield 2 Disconnect one connector callout 1 3 Release two locking tabs callout 2 and then remove the environment sensor 4 t AE We ee Remove the environment sensor Drum drive units Removing the drum drive units requires several distinct procedures Drum drive developing disengaging rod 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover e DC controller shield See DC controller shield 2 Remove the five screws callout 1 and then remove the drum drive grounding plate callout 2 that covers the developing disengaging rod Internal components 185 3 Unhook the spring callout
62. Callout 3 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer ENWW Printer features This printer combines the quality and reliability of HP printing with the following features For more information about printer features go to the Web site at www hp com support lj4600 or at www hp com support lj4650 Table 1 2 Printer features Fue emm Performance e HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 17 pages per minute ppm on letter sized paper 16 ppm on A4 sized paper e HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 22 pages per minute ppm on letter sized and A4 sized paper e Prints on transparencies and glossy paper Memory For information about printer memory see Table 1 1 Model configurations User interface e Graphical display on the control panel e Enhanced Help with animated graphics e Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies on network connected printers e HP CLJ 4650 models HP LaserJet Toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts configure printer settings view documentation and troubleshooting information and print internal printer information pages Supported printer personalities e HPPCL6 e HP PCL 5c e PostScript 3 emulation PS e HP CLJ 4650 models Automatic language switching e HP CLJ 4650 models Portable document format PDF Storage features e Job storage for printers that contain hard disks e Fonts and forms
63. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ssssssssss 405 Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models sse 405 SEMICe E LTE 406 Using the Service men ee 406 BICI EE 409 Main parts Larsens UN hat dee don D aces estaba Ud oe dot e ey ela ce ik hete oec 409 e el 411 ee EE 413 Solenolds 0 6 enin dee mated EE 416 Motors and CEET 418 de ccv PT 420 DC controller PGA deett tede peste Ue dL Eee ee da 422 C Onlhectors i rte redii eter d D Cn deer t date Fr t a eae 424 General circuit diagram geheier ae oan e dr cub ade ee e e age e oa esu a idu va ae 428 239 Introduction The information in this troubleshooting chapter is presented with the assumption that the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser printing process Explanations of each mechanical assembly printer systems and the basic theory of operation are provided in chapter 5 Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism This chapter contains the following sections Troubleshooting process includes a pre troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print quality problems These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error Printer error troubleshooting explains each control pa
64. DC controller determines whether the media is an OHT or a sheet of paper based on whether the OHT sensor remains shaded from light as the media passes through If the lever is not triggered the DC controller determines that the media is small size paper Figure 5 37 Small size paper detection illustrates this process DC Controller PCB A A Pick up PCB OHTS TOPI OHT sensor Small media paper OHT detection lever S Paper leading edge sensor OHT detection lever Registration roller Small size paper detection Feed speed control The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed The DC controller can change the feed speed according to type of media Table 5 7 Feed speed according to media shows the relationship between media type and feed speed Table 5 7 Feed speed according to media Normal mode Plain paper Full color normal Monochrome OHT mode Overhead transparency LI color 1 4 speed Monochrome 1 2 speed Thick 1 mode Thick paper Full color 1 2 speed Monochrome 150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 5 7 Feed speed according to media continued Thick 2 mode Thick paper 1 2 speed CLJ 4600 Gloss 1 mode Glossy paper Full color 1 3 speed uel Gloss 2 mode Glossy paper 1 3 speed ndi on o glossy mode CLJ Gloss film mode Glossy film 1 3 speed CLJ 4600 Envelope mode Envelope normal TT RN Thick paper
65. GNR Use the following steps to reset the transfer unit count 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press C to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight RESETS Press to select RESETS Press V to highlight RESET SUPPLIES oa Fo NM Replacing supply items 89 7 Press to select RESET SUPPLIES 8 Press V to highlight NEW TRANSFER KIT 9 Press to select NEW TRANSFER KIT 10 Press V to highlight YES 11 Press to reset the transfer unit count Replacing the fuser Replace the fuser when a REPLACE FUSER KIT message appears on the control panel display Note If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of life for example if it is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the fuser count through the control panel See Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life 1 Turn the printer off 2 Use the side handles to open the top cover WARNING The fuser might be hot Wait 10 minutes before proceeding 3 Completely loosen the blue thumb screws on each side of the fuser 5 Remove the new fuser from the bag Place the used fuser in the bag for recycling See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 90 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 6 Grasp the sides of the fuser and push down firmly into the printer 8 Close the top cover and turn the printer
66. Make sure that the rear fan is running which indicates that the system is operational Verify that the firmware DIMM HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or compact flash HP Color LaserJet 4650 models and the formatter are seated and operating correctly Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards and then try to turn the printer on again Make sure that the control panel display is connected Check the fuses in the power supply If necessary replace the power supply If necessary replace the DC controller 244 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Printer error troubleshooting The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical printer messages table in this chapter and numerical printer messages are listed in numerical printer messages table in this chapter Note Not all of the messages are described in the tables Self explanatory messages are not listed Some messages might never appear depending on the printer model that you have For example messages that apply only to the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models will not appear on the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Status messages Status messages reflect the current state of the printer They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the printer changes Whenever the printer is ready not busy and has no pending warni
67. NT networks e Apple Mac OS LocalTalk e UNIX HP Ux and Solaris e Linux Red Hat and SuSE e Internet printing For a summary of available network software solutions see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide or visit HP Customer Care online at www hp com support net_printing NetWare networks When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server Queue Server mode provides improved printing performance over Remote Printer mode The HP Jetdirect print server supports Novell Directory Services NDS as well as bindery modes For more information see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide For Windows 95 98 Millenium Edition Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use the printer installation utility for printer setup on a NetWare network Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Note ENWW Windows and Windows NT networks For Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use your printer installation utility for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network The utility supports printer setup for either peer to peer or client server network operation AppleTalk networks Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network For more information see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide that is included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server LocalTalk configuration Use LocalTalk interface to print direc
68. On the left side of the window select the printer for which you want to see information The information that is provided includes status messages supplies status and printer capabilities You can also click the Job History clock icon at the top of the window to view a list of previous jobs that were sent to the printer from your computer Printing a menu map Before printing printer information pages print a menu map The menu map shows the layout of the printer menus and current printer settings This can help you restore any user configured settings after the printer is serviced 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT MENU MAP Press to select PRINT MENU MAP QV 00 qe Print the printer configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages 1 PressC HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION on ES E Tools for troubleshooting 373 The message PRINTING CONFIGURATION appears on the control panel displ
69. PCA components HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Diagrams 423 Connectors H ERES 2 J1031 SD P NES J4026 41007 91013 J4042 J1032 J4029 J4049 Figure 7 48 Location of connectors HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW J402A J403A Figure 7 49 Location of connectors 1 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Diagrams 425 J4030 S J4012 A R 5 J4051 4027 J4045 noss L A V 044 J1034 FCS m noo Ve Al 4028 SS VP J4043 oi J4026 Jioc 91013 J4042 JI 4029 Figure 7 50 Location of connectors 2 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Figure 7 51 Connectors 500 sheet feeder 426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 52 ENWW 5 J523DA MD GE E an J523DB m Connectors 2 x 500 sheet feeder Diagrams 427 iagram it di Ircul General c
70. RS6 2511 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 496 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list meee Description Table and page Spring tension RS6 2510 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Static eliminator 4600 Only eliminator 4600 Static eliminator 4600 Only RF5 3773 020CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Switch cassette paper size WC2 5452 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 497 Numerical parts list Table 8 28 Numerical parts list Part number Table and page C9660 67901 Table 8 4 on page 445 C9660 69011 Table 8 4 on page 445 C9661 67902 Table 8 4 on page 445 C9661 69002 Table 8 4 on page 445 C9712 67911 Table 8 4 on page 445 Q2635 67904 Table 8 4 on page 445 Q3673 67901 Table 8 19 on page 475 Q3674 67901 Table 8 21 on page 479 Q3999 67901 Table 8 4 on page 445 Q3999 69001 Table 8 4 on page 445 RB1 2155 000CN Table 8 17 on page 471 RB2 3691 000CN Table 8 23 on page 483 RB2 8121 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RB2 8122 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RB2 8124 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RB2 8151 020CN Table 8 8 on page 453 RB2 8195 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RB2 8196 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RB2 8213 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RB2 8213 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RB2 8225 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RB2 8239 030CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RB2 8246 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RB2 8250 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RB2 8255 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RB2 8349 000CN Table 8 15 on page 4
71. Remove the fuser drive unit 1 of 2 215 Remove the fuser drive unit 2 of 2 216 Remove the fuser paper Sensor ssssssssierressetertrtsttstttttrrnstnnsttrnr nn nneeer renn 217 Remove the fuser delivery sensor sssssss 218 Remove the output bin full sensor sesssssssssmR 219 Remove the cartridge fan eee iere rbd kaka dra 220 Remove the formatter fan ssssssssssssssesseeeem e 221 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder top plate sessssssssss 222 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 1 of 2 top view 223 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 2 of 2 side view 223 Align the 500 sheet paper feeder cam and gear 224 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder PCA 225 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front Cover ssssssessrersrrerrenrsene 226 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 1 of 2 227 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 2 of 2 227 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left Cover 228 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder right Cover 229 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly Tor 2 icai ne iet pe ehe is 230 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly 2 08 2 eio neon iiie nion n iin ie dete elena 230 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 1 of 2
72. Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the damaged tray 2 tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 tray or replace the cassette sheet feeder The multipurpose tray separation pad is worn Replace the separation pad assembly The multipurpose tray separation pad has a Make sure that the spring is set in place If the defective spring spring is damaged replace the separation pad assembly Media is wrinkled or folded To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded media use the Print Stop test in the Diagnostics menu Adjust the stop time to stop the media before it enters the fuser Open the ETB If the media is wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 16 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part two paper path exit to diagnose the problem If the media is not wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 15 Causes for wrinkled or folded media part one paper path entrance to diagnose the problem Table 7 15 Causes for wrinkled or folded media part one paper path entrance The registration shutter is defective Make sure that the registration shutter is clean and moves smoothly If the registration shutter is worn or damaged replace the paper pickup assembly The feed roller or registration roller is dirty or Replace the paper pickup assembly defective The paper path has foreign substances or dirt Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path If the feed guide is damaged replace the paper pickup assembly The cart
73. Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 Table 7 20 Table 7 21 Table 7 22 Table 7 23 Table 7 24 Table 7 25 Table 7 26 Table 7 27 Table 7 28 Table 7 29 Model configurations t oH tet Here eee 2 Printer features E aan 5 Supply storage requirements sssssssssseeemeeee enne 16 Supported media specifications ssssssssssssssseeee 18 Printing on transparencles saisti sertas otn e a een neo 21 Weight equivalence table nee 24 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items sssssssssss 81 Basic operation seuence eere 109 Function of motors fans and environment Sensor sesrssesrrerssrrresrern 113 Fuser temperatures ioman erea eaae erar aiaa araea 114 Calibration timing and duration seeee mn 137 Cleaning timing and duration menn 137 Cassette paper size detection sssssssssssssssssseeeenee 148 Feed speed according to media seen 150 Cassette paper size detection 2 x 500 sheet feeder A 158 Types Of EE 161 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items ssssssss 163 Pre troubleshooting checklist A 241 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 246 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJe
74. The PQ troubleshooting pages are a series of print quality assessment pages that you can use to troubleshoot print quality problems Follow the instructions on page one of the PQ troubleshooting pages to solve print quality problems 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING The message PRINTING PQ TROUBLESHOOTING appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the PQ troubleshooting pages The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages ENWW Diagnostics 387 Note Disable cartridge check special mode test Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged Because the cartridges are not keyed the diagnostic test can be run when one to four cartridges have been removed or moved to another location exchanged Consumable supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode When the printer is in this mode you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print quality problems that are related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems such as
75. This is a heartbeat LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating correctly Use Figure 7 17 Formatter LED HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and Figure 7 18 Formatter LED HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to locate the formatter LED 1 Does the LED blink with four fast burst at power on If no then perform the following checks Check the firmware Check the memory Check the formatter 2 Does the LED blink at a fast steady rate during memory testing one blink per 8 MB If no then perform the following checks Check the control panel display for an error code Check the memory Check the formatter 3 Isthe LED off for about eight seconds while the boot code is decompressing before the display turns on If no then perform the following checks Check the firmware Check the control panel display for correct connections and operation Check the control panel display for an error code ENWW Diagnostics 383 4 Does the LED blink at a steady rate of one blink per second If no then perform the following checks Check the firmware Check the formatter Check the control panel display for an error code 5 Ifthe control panel display does not illuminate perform an engine test to check the engine You must have paper loaded in tray 2 for the engine test Figure 7 17 Formatter LED HP Colo
76. XX TYPE SIZE To change size or type press 280 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the STANDARD position Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu To change t
77. aids 442 External covers and panels ssssssssssssssssssssessenenene nennen nennen enne 446 ue ele ET 448 500 sheet paper feeder ccccccccceceeeeeeeenneeeceeeeeeedeeeaeeeeesedecaeeaeeeeeeesaenaeceeeeeeedenieeaeeeeeeees 474 2X 500 sheet paper E 478 433 Introduction CAUTION Note 434 Chapter 8 Pa The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts A parts list table follows each exploded assembly diagram Each table lists the item number the associated part number and the description of each part Be sure to order the correct part Read the part description carefully if a part is designated as a field replaceable unit FRU for the 4600 Only it is a replacement part for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models only if a part is designated as a FRU for the 4650 Only itis a replacement part for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only If the FRU does not have a printer specific designator it can be installed on either the HP Color LaserJet 4600 or HP Color LaserJet 4650 models When looking for part numbers for electrical components pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model In this manual the abbreviation PCA stands for printed circuit board assembly Components described as a PCA may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts
78. and size that is not currently available A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by HP This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or Cancel Job is pressed The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Press for detailed information Press and V to step through the instructions If you believe that the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty To continue printing press Cancel Job The first pending job will be cancelled If you believe that the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm Acton Message ORDER COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with To continue press ORDER COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT ORDER FUSER KIT LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT To continue press The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting
79. and then touch bare metal on the printer Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 97 To install DDR memory DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Turn the printer off 98 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 4 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver remove the eight screws holding the board in place and set them aside 6 Toreplace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle and pull it out 7 Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM ENWW Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 99 8 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated When installed correctly the metal contacts are not visible Note If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM make sure that the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM 100 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 10 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and then slide the board back into the printer Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 4
80. appears when the printer is turned on as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize Tray xx must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed Press and then press for help Follow the instructions on the control panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply Press A and Y to step through the instructions No action is necessary Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Printer error troubleshooting 249 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued INSTALL lt COLOR gt The cartridge is either not Insert the cartridge or installed or not correctly make sure that the CARTRIDGE installed in the printer cartridge is fully seated alternates with Press for detailed information For help press Press A and Y to step through the instructions If the error persists replace the cartridge Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna memory controller board and the DC controller are seated correctly Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color Replace the memory controller PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models INSTALL FUSER The fuser is either not installed Insert the fuser or make 5 or not correctly installed in the sure that the installed fu
81. approximate average A4 Letter size page count is based on 5 coverage of individual colors Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary 3Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary CAUTION Hewlett Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements ETB life under different circumstances Depending on the printer workload the customer will need to replace the ETB once or twice in the life of the printer In order to help plan supplies purchases the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed with the ETB This number appears on the Supplies Status page under Transfer Kit HP Part Number HP C9724A for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or HP Q3675 for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models for exchange part numbers see chapter 8 You can view the Supplies Status page by printing it from the printer control panel If the printer is connected to the network you can also view the page in your Web browser or through the HP Web Jetadmin software The number of pages an ETB can print is a function of two factors e The number of times the belt goes from a stationary to a rotating state spins up e The number of pages that have been printed o
82. are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer Turn the printer on after reseating the 500 sheet input tray Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions No action is necessary ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued CLOSE FRONT COVERS The covers have to be closed 1 Press for more information For help press 2 Close the front covers Note This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed CPR SENSOR The CPR Sensor is not Force a calibration by behaving correctly selecting Calibrate Now OUT OF RANGE on the Print Quality menu See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models If the message persists verify that the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller Replace the color registration detection unit If the message persists replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models DATA RECEIVED The printer received data and Press 2 to continue o is waiting for a form feed To print last page press When the printer receives another file the message should disappear DETECTABLE SIZE A tray has been loaded with Press for detailed media that is a stan
83. assembly 449 control panel overlay and label 437 covers 446 DC controller PCA assembly 453 disengaging drive assembly 463 documentation 38 drum drive assemblies 461 drum drive assembly 449 drum ground assembly 449 ETB assembly 455 471 fans 453 filters 447 fuser 473 fuser assembly 455 fuser drive assembly 455 465 internal components 448 laser scanner assembly 455 media 436 memory 437 paper pickup assembly 455 469 paper pickup drive assembly 459 PCAs 445 power supplies 453 457 screws 440 static eliminator 455 supplies 439 Tray 2 467 parts replacing 159 service approach 34 PCAs part numbers 445 PCL font lists printing 361 379 personalities PJL 121 357 supported 5 phone support 37 435 photographic drum See drum physical specifications 12 pickup rollers removing 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 236 500 sheet paper feeder 224 Tray 1 181 Tray2 180 512 Index pickup feed operations 144 PIN Service menu 368 PJL 121 357 PML 121 ports commands 356 connecting to 54 locating 9 10 power specifications 14 power assemblies part numbers 453 power cord connecting 47 power supplies fan removing 199 fuser 114 fuser removing 213 high voltage operations 116 high voltage removing 208 low voltage operations 116 low voltage removing 197 partnumbers 445 PCA locating 420 power switch locating 9 10 power on operations 108 troubleshooting 244 power rating label 11 PowerSave electrical specifications 14 oper
84. be dece I EHE EEE 461 Disengaging drive assembly sssssssseee emm 463 Fuser drive assembly anairen a ettet FOO Cassette ay 2 arren ee Ee t e dass 467 Paper pickup assembly A D I ETB assembly itte Bote n e ie Pe ca te ecd e ct tuo Hd 471 Fuserassembly are 0 cipe dee 473 500 sheet paper feeder assembly 00 0 0 cee eee cee eeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeestnennaaeees 475 500 sheet paper feeder internal components ssssssssssssss 477 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder e ALY 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 1 of 2 481 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 2 of 2 483 2 x 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly sussssse 485 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly sssssss 487 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly s sssesesensseesssesreesrrene 489 Alphabetical parts list eeh iet ertet ia peret eene baee cea ges 490 Numerical parts listie oot toner o coe teet a terio hne fra 498 ENWW ENWW List of figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure
85. copier printed on or copied An input tray is loaded incorrectly Remove any excess media from the input tray Press the media down in the input tray so that it fits below the tabs and within the media width guides The printed pages are skewed The input tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it If media heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib is loaded into tray 2 or tray 3 or tray 3 4 the media might skew The print media is binding or sticking together Remove the media flex it rotate it 180 or flip it over Reload the media into the input tray Do not fan media The print media is removed before it settles into Reset the printer Wait until the page completely the output bin settles in the output bin before removing it When duplexing the print media is removed Reset the printer and print the document again before the second side of the document is printed Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it The print media is in poor condition Replace the print media Print media is not picked up by the internal Remove the top sheet of media If the media is rollers from tray 2 tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib it might not be sheet feeder picked from the tray The print media has rough or jagged edges Replace the media Paper path troubleshooting 325 Table 7 7 Common causes of jams
86. cover See Right cover Remove five screws callout 1 check all three photographs for screw locations Disconnect the connecting rod callout 2 Disconnect the three connectors callout 3 Remove the low voltage power supply When removing the low voltage power supply be sure that elements do not touch sheet metal Remove the low voltage power supply Internal components 197 Figure 6 45 Remove the low voltage power on the rear Figure 6 46 Remove the low voltage power supply on the left side 198 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Power supply fan HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover e DC controller shield See DC controller shield e Right cover See Right cover e Low voltage power supply See Low voltage power supply 2 Disconnect on connector from the DC controller PCA callout 1 3 Remove the wire from the wire guide and pass the wire through the hole in the chassis callout 2 4 Release the locking tabs on the fan and remove the power supply fan callout 3 Figure 6 47 Remove the power supply fan 1 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Internal components 199 Figure 6 48 Remove the power supply fan 2 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW CAUTION Figure
87. does not meet the following guidelines replace the fuser e J4034 5 to J4034 6 300 500 KOhms J4034 1 to J4034 2 less than 1 KOhm Check for continuity between connector pins J4034 4 and J4034 2 If no continuity exists replace the fuser Replace the fuser power supply PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Printer error troubleshooting 309 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton 0 Message 51 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with To continue turn off then on 52 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 52 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 310 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A printer error has occurred X Description 1 beam detect error 2 laser error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow A printer error has occurred X Description 1 scanner error 2 scanner startup error 3 scanner rotation error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow Press C2 to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCA 41009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Full Calibrate Now
88. drum phase home position sensor 8 magenta drum phase home position sensor 9 cyan drum phase home position sensor 10 black drum phase home position sensor 11 Yellow density sensor 12 Magenta density sensor 13 Cyan density sensor 14 Black density sensor 15 Yellow CPR sensor 16 Magenta CPR sensor 17 Cyan CPR sensor 18 Black CPR sensor 19 ETB speed control sensor 20 color plane registration sensor 21 24 toner level sensors Turn the printer off and then on and then check the following items in the order listed 54 1 error Check the fuser See 50 X fuser error 54 3 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 5 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 6 error Check the connections Replace the paper pickup unit 54 7 54 8 54 9 or 54 10 error Check the connections Replace the drum phase sensor for the indicated color 54 11 54 12 54 13 or 54 14 error Check the connections Check the cartridge and replace it if necessary Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 15 54 16 54 17 54 18 Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 19 error Check the ETB connection Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 54 20 error Check the connection Replace the color
89. euusuv A euuejuy W euusjuv yg Ges t1VOD0N vQ00A NOS nse DN E yun JUUBIG NESE yg 24010 varer E Can Nod nc Atte 1608 anos ms T EIYGDON FIVGOGA anos AS exnoae T z E n s n t E m m zi E Lo p Wun Jeuueogjiese W auc p ZIVGOOA Nos os zinada ooir 32028 Wun J8UUBOG OSET A E En m T AN000A Leon Ons er unodd ott varer anos 10540 weie xosao ru vm gem e voso aasvorr H t D vod Jena speed sadel tee edd E Wun euueogjiese J OTA No Na ere odi E Eed one ast 162007 I BM r jeueg jonuog T E n D t diagram HP Color LaserJet 4650 models General circu Figure 7 54 429 Diagrams ENWW yams UORNDSJEG 9715 Joch passe Josuas Jedeg apassen LOOvSd 007MS 9L cO0YMS 9 LOOVMS 9L 0000 NNN NG E o IOS MdId Avet BOOT MOSdO NISdO LOSdO ONG sodo f KM levovr v v 6vOvf Aa6rorr v 6vOv 19 IGpOpT P Loov1s plougjos dnydld JOJOW dro C va IT VI Jejulg Od 18 041U09 OG 8 Japaa4 1odeq t diagram 500 sheet feeder ircui General c Figure 7 5
90. full sensor 1 Fuser inlet paper sensor PS11 2 Fuser delivery sensor PS12 3 Output bin full sensor PS13 Table 7 55 Sensors 414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW s e 7 2 IE Figure 7 38 Sensors 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Feed sensor SR3 2 Upper cassette paper sensor SR1 3 Lower cassette paper sensor SR2 ENWW Diagrams 415 Solenoids SL2 ha Figure 7 39 Location of solenoids Table 7 56 Solenoids SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly Bd Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly 416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 40 Solenoids on the paper pickup unit E Figure 7 41 Solenoids 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Upper cassette pickup solenoid SL1 2 Lower cassette pickup solenoid SL2 ENWW Diagrams 417 Motors and fans FAN 3 CLJ 4650 Figure 7 42 Location of motors and fans Table 7 57 Motors and fans Cyan drum motor mm E FAN1 Formatter fan FAN2 Cartridge fan FAN3 Power supply fan HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only 418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ak Figure 7 43 Motor 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder motor M1 ENWW Diagrams 419 PCAs Figure 7 44 PCA locations Fuser power supply PCA High voltage power supply PCA Toner level detection PCA Paper pickup sensor PCA Low voltage power supply PCA Antenna PCAs M
91. g m to 105 g m A4 Letter Legal 20 Ib to 28 Ib Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Custom paper sizes are not supported for 2 sided printing 1Tray 2 tray 3 and tray 3 4 do not support the range of custom sizes that tray 1 does Tray 2 tray 3 and tray 3 4 use custom size specifically for B5 ISO Note Use only HP supported transparencies HP part number C2934A Letter size C2936A A4 size Media to avoid This printer can handle many types of media Using media outside the printer s specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the incidence of jams e Do not use paper that is too rough e Donot use paper that contains cutouts or perforations other than standard three hole punched paper e Do not use multipart forms ENWW Print media 19 Note Note 20 e Do not use paper that has already been printed on or fed through a photocopier or printer e Do not use paper that contains a watermark if you are printing solid patterns Media that can cause damage to the printer In rare circumstances media can damage the printer To prevent possible damage do not use the following media e Donotuse paper that is embossed or coated unless it is specifically recommended for use in this printer e Do not use paper that contains irregularities such as tabs or staples e Donotuse letterhead paper that was produced by using low temperature dyes or thermography Preprinted forms or letterhead must
92. general printer configuration default settings such as PowerSave Time printer personality language and jam recovery Table 7 44 System setup submenu ee ues Jeer JOB STORAGE LIMIT JOB HELD TIMEOUT SHOW ADDRESS HP Color LaserJet 4650 models COLOR MONO Mix 1 to 100 OFF 1 HOUR 4 HOURS 1 DAY 1 WEEK AUTO MOSTLY COLOR PAGES MOSTLY BLACK PAGES Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer Sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue This item determines whether the printer s IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message If more than one EIO card is installed the IP address of the card in the first slot is shown The default is off Use AUTO to reset the printer to the factory default setting which is MOSTLY COLOR Use MOSTLY COLOR PAGES to turn on the NEVER SWITCH behavior that maximizes performance Use MOSTLY BLACK PAGES to turn on the LOOK AHEAD FIRST behavior that improves cost per page as much as possible while minimizing any impact to performance Control panel troubleshooting 365 Table 7 44 System setup submenu continued gt TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY Use this item to specify settings MANUALLY FEED PROMPT for the tray selection behavior Use this setting to configure the trays to behave like trays in some legacy HP printers POWE
93. in each print cartridge Figure 5 28 ETB cleaning illustrates this step The ETB is automatically cleaned when the printer is turned on when the covers are closed and after printing a specified number of pages The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drums and either a positive or negative bias to the transfer charging rollers This creates a difference in potential between the photosensitive drums and the ETB Both positive and negative residual toner returns to the photosensitive drums Primary charging roller Waste toner Zr amp e Negative potential waste toner Positive potential waste toner container Bk cartridge Developing cylinder DC positive bias C cartridge pc negative bias DC negative bias FEE DC negative bias ETB cleaning 138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 ENWW Photosensitive drum cleaning A cleaning blade inside the print cartridge clears the remaining toner on the photosensitive drum as the drum rotates past the blade This waste toner is moved into the waste toner container in the top of the print cartridge Figure 5 29 Drum cleaning illustrates this step Waste toner container Waste toner transfer plate Cleaning blade Drum cleaning During the printing process toner adheres to the primary charging roller a
94. it with the configuration page that you printed before the DIMM installation 4 Ifthe amount of recognized memory has not increased one of the following conditions might exist e The DIMM might not be installed correctly Repeat the installation procedure e The DIMM might be defective Try a new DIMM 96 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Note Note Note CAUTION Note CAUTION ENWW The printer has two 200 pin DDR SDRAM slots One slot is available for adding memory to the printer DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules HP Color LaserJet 4650 models use 200 pin small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM The printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware fonts and other solutions e The first flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only The slot is marked Firmware Slot e The two additional flash memory card slots allow the user to add fonts and third party solutions such as signatures and personalities The slots are marked Slot 2 and Slot 3 For more information about the types of solutions available go to www hp com go gsc Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer The printer does not support photo
95. its end of life Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control panel display This will also delete any files saved in RAM To enable writing to the RAM disk turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin software To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then on Press Stop to exit the special diagnostics mode OR No action is necessary Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state Remove all of the print cartridges Remove one print cartridge Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Printer error troubleshooting 275 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued eem Acton Message REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press REPLACE SUPPLIES For status press REPLACE SUPPLIES Printing black only alternates with Ready For help press 276 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The fuser kit is at its end of life At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low Note The supplies gauge
96. kit Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Remove media from the output bin Press Stop No action is necessary however the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams ENWW ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message Performing PRINT STOP TEST The printer is performing a Print Stop test No action is necessary Performing upgrade A firmware upgrade is in No action is necessary process Powersave on Printing CMYK SAMPLES Printing CONFIGURATION Printing DEMO PAGE Printing EVENT LOG Printing FILE DIRECTORY Printing FONT LIST Printing MENU MAP Printing PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Printing REGISTRATION PAGE The printer is in Powersave mode Any button pressed or error condition or the receipt of printable data clears the message This message appears while the printer CMYK samples are generated The printer is generating a configuration page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a demo page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a event log page The printe
97. length is greater than three pages the number of pages remaining decreases less quickly than the rate at which the actual number of pages printed increases Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 83 Locating supplies Use Figure 4 2 Location of supplies to locate each supply item Figure 4 2 Location of supplies 1 Fuser 2 Print cartridges 3 Transfer unit ETB 84 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Replacing supply items Use the following instructions to replace the supplies Changing print cartridges Replace a print cartridge when a REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE message appears on the control panel display The control panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced unless a genuine HP cartridge is not currently installed 1 Open the top cover Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open If the transfer unit is punctured print quality problems can result 2 Remove the used print cartridge from the printer ENWW Replacing supply items 85 3 Remove the replacement print cartridge from the bag Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling 4 Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side 5 Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock Remove and discard th
98. mode Thick paper normal EN NN Label paper mode Adhesive labels 1 2 speed o Auto mode e Plain paper Automatically adjusts The DC controller determines a media mismatch ejects the media and stops the printer in the following situations e When OHT is detected and the printer is set to either thick paper or gloss mode e When plain paper is detected and the printer is set to OHT mode However if the printer is set to plain paper mode and OHT is detected the DC controller will automatically switch the printer to OHT mode and printing continues normally Fuser delivery unit The fuser delivery unit consists of the fuser which melts the toner and presses it onto the media and the delivery unit which feeds the sheets into the output bin The sequence of events is as follows 1 The ETB carries a sheet of media with transferred toner into the fuser 2 The fuser motor adjusts its speed to maintain even tension on the media as it enters the fuser 3 The fuser melts the individual toner particles The fuser sleeve and pressure roller mix the liquefied toner and press it onto the media to create the appropriate color 4 The media passes from the fuser into the output bin Pickup feed system 151 Note Figure 5 38 A sensor in the output bin detects when the bin is full The DC controller will stop the printer after the current print job is complete Duplex feed unit During two sided duplex printing the duplex feed unit
99. must be depressed before cycling the door switch or the printer will generate a 59 90 Printer Error When the covers are installed the door switch and ETB connector are automatically operated When the covers are removed you must perform these steps manually Individual diagnostic tests The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics correctly 386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Print the event log page The event log lists the printer events including jams service errors and other printer conditions 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG 9 Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG The message PRINTING EVENT LOG appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the event log The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log View the event log on the control panel display The show event log lists the last 50 printer events on the control panel display The most recent event is listed first 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press Y to highlight DIAGNOSTICS Press to select DIAGNOSTICS Press V to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG Press to select SHOW EVENT LOG a oo ba Print the PQ troubleshooting pages
100. nnne rennes 108 Engine control System iicet e pcc tee nter te d ac nage A Edu gau ER VR Lu RR RR e ea E 110 DE controller Cireult D E 110 Motors fans and environment sensor ssseeessssssee eene nennen nei 111 Fuser power supply circuit IA Heater temperature control ctn teet t ndun Rn a RR RR CAO mms 115 High voltage power Supply epit ette ant SERERE RR ERRARE RENE Rue EE 116 Low voltage power supply sssssssssesessseseeeeneen nemen nennen nnne nennen tenens nennen 116 Formater System us opti eie ee s i o d eue redit eda notas 117 We M 118 Printer ul TE 119 DIMM slots HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer rrrnrarrsrrrnnnnnvvrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnvrnnnenn 120 PIL EE 121 el OT 121 Control Panel TEE 121 Laser scannerassemibly e etel akties 122 Scanner motor Control 2 2 x tod rere ar EH deed dee nude aides 122 Image formationi System acierto rine rb RR e ED ERR REL EORR EN FADE Ce Fase eR LEONE CY ha 124 Image formation Reiter Print Carndges TD 126 Toner level detection sssssssssssesseee eene nnne enne nennen nenne 127 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit se 130 Electrostatic latent image formation block e 131 Development block ere tore e eere rece ieee HERR arenas 133 Transter qe 134 FUSING IBIOCK dic 135 Cleaning heier 136 Calibration and cleaning EE 136 Color plane registration c
101. of copies DEFAULT PAPER SIZE A list of available sizes appears Use this item to set the default media size DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER UNIT OF MEASURE Use this item to set the default SIZE x DIMENSION size for any job without dimensions Y DIMENSION DUPLEX Use this item to enable or disable the duplex function on models that have duplexing capability OVERRIDE A4 LETTER Use this item to set the printer to print an A4 job on letter size paper when no A4 paper is loaded COURIER FONT REGULAR Use this item to select a DARK version of the Courier font WIDE A4 Use this item to change the printable area of A4 paper so that eighty 10 pitch characters may be printed on a single line PRINT PS ERRORS Use this item to select to print PS error pages OFF ON NO YES MANUAL FEED ON Use this item to manually feed OFF media NO YES OFF ON OFF ON PRINT PDF ERRORS Use this item to select to print HP Color LaserJet 4650 PDF error pages models Control panel troubleshooting 363 Table 7 42 Printing submenu continued te gt Print quality menu FORM LENGTH ORIENTATION FONT SOURCE FONT NUMBER FONT PITCH SYMBOL SET APPEND CR TO LF Use this item to configure settings for the printer control language Use the Print quality menu to adjust all aspects of print quality including calibration registration and color halftone settings Table 7 43 Print quality submenu powe fee Tee ADJUST
102. of eleven steps divided among five functional blocks e Electrostatic latent image formation block e Developing block e Transfer block 124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 14 ENWW e Fusing block e Cleaning block Figure 5 14 Image formation process illustrates the overall image formation process The image formation process steps are numbered from start to finish The following sections in this chapter describe the five functional blocks in the image formation process Delivery JG Fusing ETB belt Photosensitive drum iC 7 Transfer A Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Development block AS 3 Print paper path Direction of rotation Registration Cassette pick up Image formation process Multi purpose tray pick up Image formation system 125 Print cartridges The printer has four different print cartridges one for each color However they share the same structure shown in Figure 5 15 Print cartridge DC controller PCB os 3 x5 28 amp ll SS Q a a Q a uw Z w 9 O Toner level Memory zz ig 5 detection PCB TO T ad 20 Q PCB xO el E Cr OR a 2 2 e zo OD D 5 E E Ez Do Q wj wi 74 o m z S H 3 Piece er GK F O O0 t 1 a Lu 2 m e Wast
103. of the two thermistors is reduced and the voltage of the main thermistor detection signal MAINTH1 and the sub thermistor detection signal SUBTH1 drops The CPU IC1012 on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the MAINTH1 and SUBTH1 signals The CPU sends the fuser temperature control signal TMPCON according to the voltage level The CPU sends the amperage control signal PRANGE to control the amperage of the fuser sleeve HP Color LaserJet 4650 models During standby the fuser temperature is maintained at about 170 F 76 7 C to accommodate a first print time of less than 15 seconds Engine control system 115 Figure 5 8 High voltage power supply The high voltage power supply circuit applies bias to the primary charging rollers the toner charging rollers the developing cylinders the attaching roller and the transfer charging rollers Figure 5 8 High voltage power supply circuit shows the high voltage power supply circuit Developing cylinder High voltage power DC controller PCB supply PCB Primary charging roller photosensitive Transfer charging rc 1 Primary charging high voltage generation Dod circuit TC4 IC1012 NG CPU d Toner TC3 charging TC2 1 I high voltage l i generation TCi DEV3 l circuit 1C1015 Developing DEV2 ASIC high voltage i 1 1 generation j i i circuit
104. on After a short while a NEW FUSER KIT message appears on the control panel display 9 Press V to highlight YES 10 Press to reset the fuser count Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of its life for example if it is defective you will need to reset the fuser count through the control panel Use the following steps to reset the fuser count 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 46500 printer to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight RESETS Press to select RESETS Press V to highlight RESET SUPPLIES Press to select RESET SUPPLIES Press V to highlight NEW FUSER KIT Press to select NEW FUSER KIT 10 Press V to highlight YES o o uoo F YN Replacing supply items 91 11 Press 2 to reset the fuser count 92 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Note Note CAUTION ENWW The printer has five dual inline memory module DIMM slots For maximum flexibility in DIMM support the formatter is designed with four 168 pin DIMM slots and a fifth 100 pin DIMM slot Only four DIMMs can be loaded at a time so the fifth DIMM slot 100 pin is logically the same as the fourth DIMM slot 168 pin The system can only have a DIMM installed on the fourth DIMM slot 168 pin if no DIMM is installed in t
105. operations 4650 111 141 environmental specifications 12 15 fuser operations 114 heater control 115 tests calibration bypass 404 cartridge 388 component 394 Diagnostics menu 367 engine 385 402 formatter 402 LED 383 paper path 388 print quality 337 Print Stop 399 thermistors 114 409 toner cleaning spilled 80 loose troubleshooting 350 toner cartridges See print cartridges toner charging operations 133 toner level detection operations 127 PCA removing 210 PCA locating 420 Toolbox See HP Toolbox tools required 160 top cover jams causes of 331 locating 9 10 removing 166 tough paper 23 training 435 transfer block operations 134 transfer kit ETB count resetting 406 locating 84 partnumbers 439 removing during service 164 replacement intervals 81 82 replacing 87 transfer operations 134 ENWW transparencies detection operations 148 part numbers 436 printing 21 specifications 18 troubleshooting 336 trapping 341 Tray 1 jams causes of 328 locating 9 media specifications 18 Paper handling menu 362 pickup roller and separation pad removing 181 pickup feed operations 144 removing 171 sensors 413 solenoid removing 183 solenoids locating 396 416 Tray 2 installing 46 jams causes of 328 locating 9 media specifications 18 Paper handling menu 362 paper pickup roller removing 180 paper size detection operations 148 paper size detection switch removing 195 partnumbers 467 pickup feed operations 144 sen
106. or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Image defects 345 Completely blank image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for completely blank pages Table 7 23 Causes for a completely blank image The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models All black or solid color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for all black or solid color Table 7 24 Causes for an all black or solid colored image A poor contact exists in the drum ground Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the primary charging bias and developing bias affected color If they are still dirty after cleaning contacts of the high voltage PCA and the print or if they are damaged replace the cartridge cartridge The primary charging roller is defective Replace the print cartridge for the affected color The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Dots in vertical
107. paper feeder optional EIO connections 3 total Memory access Fast InfraRed FIR connection Parallel connection Power connection Printer assemblies 9 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Figure 1 4 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Output bin Printer control panel Top cover Tray 1 Tray 2 Access to print cartridges transfer unit and fuser On off switch Tray 3 and tray 4 optional CO JO om P oh Note The optional 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 and the optional 2 x 500 sheet input tray tray 3 and tray 4 cannot be installed in the printer at the same time Figure 1 5 Back view HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Output bin Auxiliary connector Parallel connection On off switch EIO connection 3 total Memory access 1 1 USB connection Tray 3 and tray 4 optional ce JO Oo P ob 10 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Identification site requirements and specifications Note Figure 1 6 ENWW The following sections describes printer identification site requirements and specifications Model and serial numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as C9660A for an HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer The serial number contains information about the country region of origin the printer version production code and the production number of the printer This manual de
108. pickup assembly ssesssss 488 xvii xviii ENWW ENWW Product information This chapter contains information about the follow topics Model configurations sssssssssee een eene en nenne enne en nennen nnns 2 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series porter 2 Printer features ennssssnseosesnrtastttrtttntttettttn ttnn tt ertt AnAAESEEEEEEEAAADSAEEEAEEASEEOEEEEEAEEAAEOSEE EE EEES NEEE EREE 5 Printer ssemblies EE 9 HP Color LaserJet 4600 model 9 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models A 10 Identification site requirements and specifications rrrrrarrrnrnrvenenrrrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenernene 11 Model nd serialnumbers ree ertet et ane advan snenanduacvsaseucuanenaetuedeendaneteancntactes 11 Power and regulatory Jabel 11 Site requirements sanasen render vi desc nee cera voe Due sae e asked 12 Electrical specifications sesssssssssssssseeenenneen enne eren nnn nennen 14 Environmental specifications essent nnne nis 15 Acoustic emissions sssssssssssssssssssssseeeeee nennen nnne nennt nnn rt nnn nenne nene n nennen neis 16 Supply storage requirements ssssssssssssessseeseseeeee nennen nnne nenne nenne 16 Priintemedia estes E 17 Sint due Ee ee TEE 17 Printing on special media 20 Environmental product stewardship program ccceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeesececcaeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeenaees 26 Protecting the environment
109. pickup rollers Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dampen the paper with alcohol Color registration detection unit Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dampen the paper with alcohol Cleaning spilled toner Defective print cartridges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner Use a vacume that is designed for picking up fine particles See Vacuum specifications When cleaning the printer do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers Vacuum specifications Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles 5 microns in diameter 80 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Approximate replacement intervals for supply items You can identify supply items by their labeling and their blue plastic handles For instructions about installing supplies see the installation guides that come with each supply item The following table lists the approximate replacement intervals for printer supply items and shows the control panel messages that prompt you to replace each item Table 4 1 App
110. print quality You can also force the printer to calibrate by selecting Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Quick Calibrate Now or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models from the Print Quality menu For information about calibrating the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models for more information 136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW While the printer is calibrating or cleaning it pauses printing For most calibrations and cleaning the printer does not interrupt a print job but waits for the job to be complete before calibrating or cleaning Table 5 4 Calibration timing and duration shows when the printer calibrates the duration of the calibration and the type of calibration that occurs Table 5 5 Cleaning timing and duration shows when the printer cleans and the duration of the cleaning The sections that follow discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail Table 5 4 Calibration timing and duration Calibration occurrence Duration o Type of calibration When you turn the printer on 75 seconds for calibration but DMAX DHALF because of other initialization activities the printer takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready for printing When you install one or more 150 seconds 2 minutes 30 DMAX DHALF color plane print cartridges that have not seconds registrat
111. problems Use this item to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of the problem Use this item to perform a test on each of the printer sensors to determine if they are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor Use this item to test the paper handling features of the printer such as the configuration of the trays Use this item to test the paper path sensors and switches for correct operation MANUAL SENSOR TEST Use this item to manually test the sensors and switches for correct operation COMPONENT TEST Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking and other hardware issues PRINT STOP TEST COLOR BAND TEST HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Service menu Isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle Stopping the printer in mid cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade Use this item to print a color band test page that is used to identify arching in the high voltage power supply The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the service menu When you select SERVICE from the list of menus you are prompted to type an 8 digit PIN number The PIN for HP Color LaserJet 4600 models is 04460002 The PIN for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is 05465004 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open
112. rear of the printer Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 93 2 Remove the eight screws holding the board in place and set them aside Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean flat grounded surface 4 Release the locks on each side of the DIMM slot 5 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of the DIMM 6 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notches on the DIMM with the bars in the DIMM slot 94 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Note ENWW If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM or closing the latches make sure that the notches on the bottom of the DIMM are aligned with the bars in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM 1 Firmly press the DIMM straight into the slot Close the locks on each side of the DIMM until they snap into place 2 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and slide the board into the printer Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step 2 3 Reconnect the power cable and interface cables and turn the printer on Enabling memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models If you installed a memory DIMM set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxe
113. retrieves the paper from the output bin and sends it back through the pickup feed unit to print on the second side The sequence of events is as follows 1 The paper with the front side printed passes through the fuser 2 The fuser motor M8 rotates counterclockwise for a specified length of time after the paper reaches the fuser delivery sensor The fuser delivery roller reverses direction and feeds the paper into the duplex feed unit Figure 5 38 Duplex switch back illustrates this switch back operation 3 The oblique roller and feed roller feed the left edge of the paper so that it contacts the left side plate in order to align the paper on the left margin 4 The paper then re enters the pickup feed unit and the second side is printed 5 The paper passes through the fuser a second time and comes to rest in the output bin During duplex printing the printer prints the second side of the page first For instance if a four page print job is to be printed on two sheets of paper pages 2 and 4 print first and then pages 1 and 3 print For this reason when preprinted letterhead is used for duplex printing be sure to load the letterhead face down in tray 2 tray 3 or tray 3 4 and load letterhead face up in tray 1 DC controller PCB gt 6 3 9 2 Step 1 ux 6 PS12 H 5 _ amp D 5 OR az N a e m PS12 eer 7 p M8 Step 2 Output bin PS12 Fixing sleeve Duplex feed CR Pre
114. sheet feeder are similar to the tray 2 switch To eliminate the flickering on the control panel display during this test you can leave the door switch in the open state 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight SENSOR TEST 9 Press to select SENSOR TEST To exit this diagnostic press the Cancel Job button HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models and then select Exit diagnostics Menus cannot be opened during component tests so serves the same function as the Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button SW1 o7 6 SW2 lo SW3 e Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement Table 7 49 Tray 2 paper size codes Paper size Diagnostics 389 Note WARNING Table 7 49 Tray 2 paper size codes continued fe fe Je fem for fem C fe fe Je I Depressing all three switches of the tray 2 paper size levers causes the Custom paper menu to appear on the control panel display Press the Y button to return to the sensor diagnostic screen To toggle a sensor find and move the sensor flags in the following locations Table 7 50 Sensor test letter codes describes how to find the following sensors e A Remove tray 2 The flag is located in the center paper inlet path of the
115. sheet paper feeder right cover 2 Disconnect one connector callout 1 and release the wire harness from the harness guides callout 2 3 Remove ten screws callout 3 and remove the upper cassette pickup assembly callout 4 Figure 6 83 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly 1 of 2 Figure 6 84 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly 2 of 2 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 1 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover Disconnect two springs callout 1 Remove two gears callout 2 by releasing the locking tabs and sliding the gears off of the shaft Disconnect five connectors callout 3 and then remove three screws callout 4 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly callout 5 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 2 of 2 ENWW Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 231 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor 1 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly Remove two screws callout 1 Release the two feed roller retaining tabs callout 2 and then remove the feed roller assembly callout 3 Disconnect one connector callout 4 and then remove the feed sensor callout 5 Figur
116. steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server 1 In the Web browser on the computer type the IP address for the printer The printer status window appears Or go to the URL provided in the alert email 2 Click Other Links Click Order Supplies The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information about the printer to HP You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer information to HP 4 Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only The HP Toolbox software gives you the ability to order supplies directly from the computer Two things are necessary to use this feature e The HP Toolbox software must be installed on your computer It is automatically installed as part of the typical software installation e You must have access to the World Wide Web 1 Atthe bottom right of the screen in the system tray click the hp Toolbox icon The software opens in a Web browser Or on the Start menu select Programs and then select HP Toolbox 2 Onthe left side of the window click Other Links 3 Click Order Supplies The browser opens to the supplies purchasing page 4 Select the supplies you want to order Parts and supplies 35 Exchange program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in chapter
117. supplies status page The transition from counting pixels to optical toner level sensing causes no fluctuations on the toner gauge Some toner might remain in the fresh toner hopper although other cartridge components have reached their end of life Photosensitive drum rotations Photosensitive drum rotations are also tracked on the cartridge memory tag Similar to the process for the developer roller tracking these rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the photosensitive drum is actually worn out when print quality defects would occur Wear on the photosensitive drum might cause a low message when low coverage documents are printed frequently Tracking of drum life is essential because of drum wear and the potential for overflow from the waste toner hopper if use of the photosensitive drum is overextended Figure 5 17 Toner level detection illustrates the toner level detection system Toner level detection light guide LED DRIVE signal TONELED TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal TONLED TONERLEVEL DETECTION 4 DC controller PCB Figure 5 17 Toner level detection 128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Developing cylinder disengaging control Whenever the developing cylinder is in contact with the photosensitive drum toner passes onto the drum At certain times such as during ETB cleaning or during monochrome printing toner should not pass onto th
118. supply circuit j LEER VE 2m d re ue rn I i Ermar carana raner run i B rra TH Deva onder Paper feeder IC1015 ASIC l optional i ul Photosensitive drum U Dee i Memory controller PCB DC controller circuit Motors fans and environment sensor The printer has ten motors and two or three fans HP Color LaserJet 4600 models have two fans HP Color LaserJet 4650 models have three fans HP Color LaserJet 4650 models also have one environment sensor Eight of the motors are dc motors the other two are stepping motors Figure 5 4 Motors and fans HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers and Figure 5 5 Fan and environment sensor HP Color LaserJet 4650 models shows the locations of the fan and sensor Table 5 2 Function of motors fans and environment sensor explains the function of each component Engine control system 111 One of the stepping motors and six of the eight dc motors are used for paper feeding and image formation The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor The remaining two dc motors are fan motors Since the printer transfers an image in four colors in line onto the paper small changes in the rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment The dc motors used for image formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation Figure 5 4 Motors
119. tab that you want to view 2 See the following sections for more information about each tab 370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Information tab The Information pages group consists of the following screens e Device Status Shows the printer status and the life remaining for HP supplies with 0 representing that a supply is empty The page also shows the type and size of print media that is set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Settings e Configuration page Shows the information that is also found on the printer configuration page e Supplies Status Shows the life remaining of HP supplies with 0 representing that a supply is empty This screen also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window To visit any Web site you must have Internet access e Event log Shows a list of all printer events and errors e Usage page Shows a summary of the number of pages that the printer has printed grouped by size and type e Device Information Shows the printer network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Settings tab Settings tab Use this tab to configure the printer from your computer The Settings tab can be password protected If this printer is networked always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab The Settings
120. tede D hetero Poen teda ateist 350 Distortiori or blurririg 22 eterne Rho E tabe o e ae A 350 SMEA me T 351 Misplaced mage snurre e tr eter teet dor ete ee Pea etg ecu dragen 351 vii viii Repetitive defects troubleshooting ssssssse emen 352 Interface troubleshooting socis eraran nean RE ae deigen aai 356 Communications CHECKS regens Ee Mec et E ei Hl e E Eo Eee PUn Pb ea b eee ERR Dj 356 EIO troubleshooting 231 022 0084 ene ei heen ita ed le Rp e ev ied 356 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations ssesse em 356 Printer Job Language PJL commande see emn 357 Control panel troubleshooting ssssssesseeeenee enne nennen eene nens 360 Printing menu map ec ect eoe beret e Lo de atero et 360 Information meri ut eee dp hb e T e E eb 361 Paper handling MENU SENNENG 362 GCorifigure device MENU sure hadet hedenske 363 Diagnostics menu uade ei De dedo ele LOU d dea pA RR eda euo 367 Service mend et ere Oeo e nte etie te 368 Tools for troubleshooting des i o NSA ell gae tee teen det re te sere e ao dene Dea diui bands 370 Embedded Web Server ded tet s ete eoe dede re e ort etn 370 To open the embedded Web server 370 Printer Status and Alerts software emen 372 Print the printer configuration page ssseem emen 373 Print the supplies status page sssssssssssssseseeeeenen emeret 375 Print the usage D er ege 376 Prinitthe d mo pag ru vet
121. the fuser e Fuser delivery unit From the fuser to the output bin e Duplex feed unit From the output bin to the registration shutter at the bottom of the ETB Fuser Delivery unit Duplex feed unit Pickup Feed unit Paper path for simplex printing Paper path for duplex printing Pickup feed system Pickup feed unit At the bottom of the paper path the pickup unit picks individual pieces of media from the trays Then the ETB carries the media to the top of the paper path The following sequence of events occurs 1 The formatter sends a print command to the DC controller which rotates the pickup motor the drum motors the ETB motor and the fuser motor 2 The cassette feed roller and registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate Media is picked from the cassette or multipurpose tray A separation claw in the cassette prevents picking multiple sheets of media A separation pad in the multipurpose tray prevents multiple sheets from feeding 4 The registration shutter corrects any skew in the media and the media is fed at a specified speed according to the size and type of the media 5 As the ETB carries the media past each print cartridge toner is transferred onto the media Pickup feed system 147 Figure 5 35 Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection The printer can
122. the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Light color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light color Table 7 20 Causes for light color A poor contact exists in the transfer bias Clean the contacts for the affected color If the contacts between the ETB and the printer contacts are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the contacts or the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The photosensitive drum is worn Replace the print cartridge for the affected color The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA 344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 20 Causes for light color continued The laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the affected color See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controll
123. the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Replace the paper pickup PCA Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly Calibrate the printer Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 285 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued 13 XX YY JAM IN TOP A jam exists in the top cover Press for detailed COVER AREA arca information about clearing the jam For help press pp Press A and Y to step through the instructions Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models WARNING The fuser might be hot 4 Replace the fuser 5 Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place If it is defective replace it 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in the Press for detailed TRAY 4 multipurpose tray information about clearing the jam For help press pp Press and V to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean or replace the separation pad Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid Replace the tray 1 pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller S
124. the cartridge or with the 10 00 03 yellow print cartridge printer reader writer Reseat the connectors between the memory PCA J602 J605 and the antenna PCAs J901A D the memory PCA and the DC controller PCA J1028 Replace the antenna PCA Replace the memory PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 13 XX YY DUPLEX A duplex job was interrupted by Press for more JOB INTERRUPTED interference as media passed information through the output bin during For help press duplexing Remove one or two pages from the output bin as i directed by the message alternates with on the control panel display 13 XX YY DUPLEX Press to continue JOB INTERRUPTED panang Discard top sheet Note and press C If JAM RECOVERY OFF some pages will not be or reprinted Resend the missing pages 13 XX YY DUPLEX JOB INTERRUPTED Discard top two sheets and press ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 283 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm 0 em 0 Message 13XX YY JAM IN DUPLEX PATH For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN PAPER INPUT PATH For help press 284 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A jam exists in the duplex path A jam exists in the media input path Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press and V to step through th
125. the connector J1037 on the DC controller PCA Immediately after turning the printer on measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1037 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the power supply fan Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 58 X A memory tag error was Turn the printer off and PRINTER ERROR detected then on ANE Replace the memory PCA For help press X Description y 3 CPU Replace the DC controller alternates with PCA Calibrate the printer 4 power supply after replacing the DC 58 X controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color PRINTER ERROR LaserJet 4650 models To continue turn off then on ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 315 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton 0 Message 59 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 59 X Y PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 316 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A printer motor error has occurred X Description 0 motor error 1 motor startup error 2 motor rotation error 3 fuser motor startup error 4 fuser motor rotation error 5 print cartridge motor startup error 6 print cartridge motor rotation error 9 ETB motor startup error A ETB motor rotation error B developing disengaging motor startup error C deve
126. the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3The product includes LAN Local Area Network options When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors the product meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 4For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA 29 January 2004 For regulatory topics only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger StraRe 140 B blingen D 71034 B blingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Relations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 ENWW Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement 29 Country region laser safety statements Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements
127. the media size and then press 2 to select TRAY xx EMPTY The specified tray is empty and Refill the tray at a convenient TYPE SIZE needs to be filled but the time current job does not need this tray to print correctly alternates with ytop 7 Ready For menus press ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 259 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued eem Acton Message TRAY xx OPEN For help press alternates with Ready For menus press TRAY xx SIZE XXXX SIZE For help press alternates with TRAY xx SIZE lt XXXX SIZE To change move switch in tray xx TRAY xx TYPE SIZE Size detected by tray alternates with TRAY xx TYPE SIZE To change type press 260 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The specified tray is open or is not closed completely An undetectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size that the tray detected Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx The tray switch is in the STANDARD position Close the tray Adjust the side and rear guides against the media If the media used is Letter AM Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM
128. them Figure 6 21 Remove the cassette tray 2 pickup rollers Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft Figure 6 22 Replace the cassette tray 2 pickup rollers 180 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 23 Note ENWW Paper pickup drive unit 1 2 Remove the paper pickup unit See Paper pickup unit On the bottom of the paper pickup unit remove the screw holding the gear cover in place and then remove the gear cover Unhook the spring from the gear callout 1 Using a flat blade screwdriver push down on the tab in the center of the gear callout 2 to release it and then remove the gear Remove three black screws callout 3 Disconnect the three connectors on the back of the paper pickup drive unit and then remove the unit Remove the paper pickup drive unit Multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 1 2 3 Remove tray 2 from the printer and remove any paper in the tray Rotate the two lock pins outward callout 1 and tilt the cassette cover forward to remove it Push the blue roller callout 2 towards the back of the tray and remove it The locking pins are not captive Do not loose them when the tray cover is removed 4 5 6 Pull up on the multipurpose tray pickup roller callout 3 and remove it Push outward on the two tabs that h
129. to reprint jammed pages e OFF The printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages During the recovery process the printer might reprint several pages that were printed correctly before the jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To disable paper jam recovery 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUP ao ARON 324 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW 6 Press V to highlight JAM RECOVERY 7 Press to select JAM RECOVERY 8 Press V to highlight OFF 9 Press to select OFF 10 Press the Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or the MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button to return to the READY state To improve print speed and increase memory resources you might want to disable jam recovery If jam recovery is disabled any pages that are involved in a jam will not be reprinted Avoiding jams Table 7 7 Common causes of jams kue om The print media does not meet HP Use only media that meets HP specifications recommended media specifications A supply item is installed incorrectly causing Verify that all print cartridges the ETB and the repeated jams fuser are correctly installed You are reloading media that has already Do not use media that has been previously passed through a printer or
130. tray 3 4 assembly Sensors detect the presence of media in each of these trays Switches detect the size of the media Motors and solenoids drive the various feed rollers Note The 2 x 500 sheet feeder is only available for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Three photo sensors detect the progress of media along the paper path If media does not reach or pass one of these sensors within a specified time the DC controller determines a jam and notifies the formatter Figure 5 33 Pickup feed system illustrates this system DC controller PCB wA A oe I SE REN ERR ERROR EE EN Y L I al 3 n Ji e ol rela pi amp o zazGd ZEZ gZ ollagi 415 5 P el se 2 2 25 E1235 O20 5 OL 2 amp D e go D E D E OI oC 2125 ai A o a o a a a S O eS O ZIO S Se ix ol Z gt 3 c m aR sel el eS mi m c a2 6 8 3 2 2282 G 2 Eg xz HELT 9193 2 5 E o o D o c iu Dis 9 Z ZZzzzs4 x Sele Si A55 ZI S ml ea OQ O OlOlO zz ez amp Qui Oz 6 5 Gi gt ui UO 65 O EX ie OlOu oi S S eal 8 8oeop ear 2 2 off gk nl EN ET Ke Z o9 2 2 AA 25 amp IE E 182 HI e a al a a al wile 2 Ww ce N ca HI a A O x x Z x MIR O 5 oia LLI lt x ul oi ol Yf SITTI o Fuser PIZ ui PU a leie e deli z T tu t 2 Qs x x O elivery a lt a EX x X Z roller E 2f wl amp T A 2 yz O a lt p e Eau ui O lu Qa c KL Dei a 75 LLI D gt
131. use inks that can tolerate 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions or that melts offsets or discolors when exposed to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use transparencies that are designed for use with Inkjet printers or other low temperature printers Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media e For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib xerographic paper e Verify that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Special media such as envelopes transparencies custom size paper or media that is heavier than 120 g m should be fed only from tray 1 To print on any special media use the following procedure 1 Load the media in a tray 2 When the printer prompts you for the paper type select the correct media type for the media that is loaded in the tray For example select HIGH GLOSS HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only when loading high gloss laser paper 3 In the software program or the printer driver set the media type to match the media type that is loaded in the paper tray For the best print quality always verify that the media type that is selected on the printer control panel and the media type that is selected in the software program or prin
132. with the printer Features Use the HP embedded Web server to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your computer With the HP embedded Web server you can do the following e View printer status information e Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones e View and change tray configurations e View and change the printer control panel menu configuration e View and print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e Add or customize links to other Web sites e Select the language in which to show the embedded Web server pages e View and change network configuration HP Toolbox HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only The HP Toolbox is a software program that can be used for the following tasks e Check the printer status e View troubleshooting information e View online documentation e Print internal printer pages You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network You have to perform a complete software installation before you can use the HP Toolbox 74 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW ENWW Other components and utilities Several software programs are available for Windows and Macintosh users as well as for network administrators These programs are summarized in the following table Software installer automates the printing system installation
133. 0 sheet paper feeder rear cover 1 Remove two screws callout 1 and remove the printer anchor plates callout 2 2 Remove six screws callout 3 and remove the rear cover Figure 6 79 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 1 of 2 Figure 6 80 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 2 of 2 ENWW Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 227 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover 1 Remove the following assemblies e 2x500 sheet paper feeder front cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front cover e 2x500 sheet paper feeder rear cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 2 Remove four screws callout 1 and remove the left cover Figure 6 81 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder right cover 1 Remover the following assemblies e 2x500 sheet paper feeder front cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front cover e 2x500 sheet paper feeder rear cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover 2 Remove four screws callout 1 and then remove the right cover Figure 6 82 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder right cover ENWW Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 229 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e 2x500 sheet paper feeder left cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover e 2x500 sheet paper feeder right cover See 2 x 500
134. 00CN Table 8 5 on page 447 Multi purpose tray pickup roller assembly RG9 1529 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 Outrigger assembly 4650 Only RG5 7523 000CN Table 8 23 on page 483 Paper feeder drive assembly 4600 Only RG1 4138 020CN Table 8 20 on page 477 Paper feeder drive assembly 4650 Only RG5 7541 000CN Table 8 20 on page 477 Paper feeder PCA assembly 4600 Only RG1 4139 000CN Table 8 20 on page 477 Paper feeder PCA assembly 4650 Only RG1 7542 000CN Table 8 20 on page 477 Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only RG5 6469 000CN Table 8 11 on page 459 Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only RG5 6468 040CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only Only RG5 6468 040CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only pickup assembly Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only Only RG5 7453 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only RG5 7466 000CN Table 8 11 on page 459 Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only RG5 7453 040CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Paper pickup drive assembly 4600 Only RG5 6469 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Paper pickup drive assembly 4650 Only RG5 7466 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Paper pickup PCA pickup Paper pickup PCA RG5 6392 000CN Table 8 4 on page 445 Paper pickup rollers 4650 Only RF5 3739 000CN Table 8 23 on page 483 Paper sensor PCA assembly RG5 6392 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 495 Table 8 27
135. 06 1 If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid The pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 329 Table 7 10 Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder continued Cause The paper feeder PCA is defective Replace the paper feeder PCA The paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Jams in the paper path The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in the paper path Table 7 11 Causes for jams in the paper path The registration shutter is defective Make sure that the shutter is clean and moves smoothly and that the spring is in place If the shutter is damaged replace the paper pickup assembly This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller The drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears This applies to jams that occur in advance of are damaged the registration roller The registration roller and registration sub roller Clean the registration roller or registration sub are dirty worn or damaged ro
136. 1 Illustrations and parts lists The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units FRU for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers At the end of this chapter are an alphabetical and numerical master parts list Figure 8 1 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer major components 442 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Fuser assembly ETB assembly Paper pickup assembly Cassette Paper pickup drive assembly Disengaging drive assembly Drum drive assembly cyan magenta Drum drive assembly yellow Drum drive assembly cyan magenta Drum drive assembly black Fuser drive assembly PBs OANDOARWDND A 35 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 443 Printer PCAs Figure 8 2 ENWW grams nd dia 444 Chapter 8 Parts a Table 8 4 Printer PCAs ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 445 External covers and panels External covers and panels Figure 8 3 ENWW 446 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 5 External covers and panels base Jee 1 ko meme feen o s mee a o External covers and panels 447 Internal components Internal components 1 of 5 Figure 8 4 ENWW 448 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 6 Internal components 1 of 5 Control panel assembly 220 V 4600 Only Drum grounding assembly cyan and magenta long
137. 2 side view ENWW Optional 500 sheet paper feeder 223 Reinstallation tip When reassembling the drive unit the cam shown in callout 5 and the gear shown in callout 6 should be in the positioned as in Figure 6 76 Align the 500 sheet paper feeder cam and gear Figure 6 76 Align the 500 sheet paper feeder cam and gear 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers The procedure for removing the 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers is essentially the same as for the cassette tray 2 pickup rollers See Cassette tray 2 paper pickup rollers 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 500 sheet paper feeder PCA WARNING The paper feeder PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device 1 Remove the top plate from the 500 sheet paper feeder see 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate and then turn it upside down 2 Disconnect five connectors callout 1 Remove the screw callout 2 4 Remove the paper feeder PCA Figure 6 77 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder PCA ENWW Optional 500 sheet paper feeder 225 Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front cover 1 Remove the tray 3 and tray 4 cassettes 2 Remove two screws callout 1 and remove the front cover Figure 6 78 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front cover 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 x 50
138. 2 J605 and the antenna PCAs J901A D the memory PCA and the DC controller PCA J1028 Replace the antenna PCA Replace the memory PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Turn the printer off and then on Remove all of the print cartridges and turn the printer off and then on If the error persists replace the indicated cartridge Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press and V to step through the instructions Printer error troubleshooting 301 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 13 02 00 JAM IN A page is jammed in tray 2 Press for detailed Tray X tray 3 or tray 4 information about clearing the jam For help press Press and V to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean the feed roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Replace the tray X pickup solenoid Replace the pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly for tray 2 Replace the tray X paper feeder PCA for the 500 sheet tray 3 or the 2 x 500 sheet feeder Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
139. 3 Fuser power supply circuit This printer uses an induction heating method to heat the fuser Figure 5 6 Fuser power supply circuit shows the configuration of the fuser power supply Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Fever DC controller Print paper Fuser sleeve supply PCB PCB Pressure roller i i d NE d CURRENT Current CONTROL control signal circuit IC1012 CPU FUSER SLEEVE Safety TEMPERATURE monitor DETECTION onio signal circuit d i 1 j I I Thermoswitch Fuser Figure 5 6 Fuser power supply circuit The fuser power supply has three main components e Fuser sleeve A high frequency current flows through an induction heating coil in the fuser sleeve causing the metal sleeve to heat e Thermistors Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve one in the center and the other at the end Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve e Thermoswitch The thermoswitch is located at the bottom center of the fuser sleeve When the fuser is overheating the switch opens and power to the induction heating coil is shut off Table 5 3 Fuser temperatures Overhead transparencies 172 C 342 F color 1 4 speed 185 C 365 F monochrome 1 2 speed Gloss 167 C 333 F 1 3 speed Envelopes 190 C 374 F Full speed 114 Chapter 5 The
140. 3 Kbps The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles e Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP e Serial Port Profile SPP e Object Push Profile OPP e Basic Imaging Profile BIP e Basic Printing Profile BPP with xHTML Print The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett Packard company under licence Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Printer drivers Note ENWW The optimal way to control the printer is by establishing settings in a software program or through the printer driver Changing print settings in a software program affects only that particular print job In most software programs you can select print settings from menus within the program Software program settings and printer driver settings override the settings on the printer control panel For best print quality always use the printer driver to select the paper or media type Different media types use different printer settings For example selecting transparencies in the driver causes the printer to use a color table that is designed for the best print quality on transparencies Selecting transparencies also causes the printer to adjust printer speed and fuser temperature Selecting heavy or glossy media for example causes the printer to change the engine speed The printer driver also gives you customized control of color text graphics and photos Use the printer driver to set the following color control opt
141. 32 for yellow and J1033 for black Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Developing disengaging motor error 1 Reconnect the connectors J4024 and J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the DC controller PCA Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models No system was found Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the firmware DIMM One or more printer settings Press 2 to continue that were saved in the non volatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default Pressing Gi Check the printer settings should clear the message to determine which Printing can continue but settings have been unexpected behavior might changed OCCUF Turn the printer off and then back on X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard Printer error troubleshooting 317 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton 0 Message 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL For help press alternates with 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL To continue press 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL T
142. 3668 67924 Portuguese overlay 4600 Only Portuguese label 4650 Only Swedish overlay 4600 Only Swedish label 4650 Only Czech overlay 4600 Only Czech label 4650 Only Hungarian overlay 4600 Only Hungarian label 4650 Only Polish overlay 4600 Only Polish label 4650 Only Russian overlay 4600 Only Russian label 4650 Only Turkish overlay 4600 Only Turkish label 4650 Only Arabic overlay 4600 Only Arabic label 4650 Only Greek overlay 4600 Only Greek label 4650 Only Hebrew overlay 4600 Only Hebrew label 4650 Only Japanese overlay 4600 Only Japanese label 4650 Only Korean overlay 4600 Only Korean label 4650 Only Thai overlay 4600 Only Thai label 4650 Only Simplified Chinese overlay 4600 Only Simplified Chinese label 4650 Only Traditional Chinese overlay 4600 Only Traditional Chinese label 4650 Only HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide ENWW Table 8 2 Supplies and accessories continued 5021 0330 PCL PJL Technical Reference Package Q3668 90901 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer service manual this service manual is for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models C9720A C9720 67901 Black print cartridge Black print cartridge Europe C9721A Cyan print cartridge Cyan print cartridge Europe C9722A Yellow print cartridge Yellow print cartridge Europe C9723A Magenta print cart
143. 4 recycling supplies 26 ENWW registration color plane 140 regulatory label 11 removing parts 159 repair approach 34 repetitive defects troubleshooting 352 replacement intervals supplies 81 replacement parts configuration configuration replacement parts 319 replacing fuser kit 90 parts 159 print cartridges 85 transfer kit 87 reports printing 361 373 reset cold 403 Resets menu 367 RGB Color settings 341 RGB sample page printing 361 381 right cover removing 170 rollers 500 shet paper feeder removing 224 image formation operations 131 locating 409 pickup feed system operations 144 repetitive defects troubleshooting 352 Tray 1 removing 181 Tray 2 removing 180 S scanner motor control 122 screwdrivers required 160 screws 440 screws types of 161 security network 76 sensors 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder testing 394 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder removing 232 drum home position removing 188 environment 451 environment 4650 111 environment 4650 operations 141 environment 4650 removing 185 fuser delivery removing 218 fuser inlet paper removing 217 image stabilization control 141 locating 413 output bin full removing 219 paper path test 388 pickup feed system 146 toner 128 transparency detection OHT 148 separation operations 135 separation pad removing from Tray 1 181 sequence of operations 108 serialnumber 407 serial number locating 11 service agreements 37 Index 513 service approach 34 Se
144. 4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE gt Setting not saved To change size move guides in tray TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE gt Setting not saved To change move tray switch to CUSTOM TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE gt Setting saved To change move tray switch to STANDARD A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position Adjust the side and rear guides agai
145. 4 HP LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card 105 3 Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 HP LaserJet 4650 models 4 Connect the network cable Reconnect the power cable and turn the printer on 5 Print a configuration page In addition to a printer configuration page an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print If it does not print uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot 6 Perform one of these steps e Select the correct port See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions e Reinstall the software and select the network installation 106 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Theory of operation This chapter provides information about the following topics Basic operation 108 Operation Sequence EE 108 Engine control system sssssssessssseseseeeeeeneeene nnne nenne nennen nennen nnns 110 DC controller CIFCUIL cierre eterne ta bee Ra EET n ERROH EMERGERE EARTH IHE S CERERI ERR E RES ETE 110 Motors fans and environment Sensor eene nnne 111 Fuser power supply circuit IA Heater temperature control sssssssss
146. 4 HP Toolbox HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only sss 74 Other components and utilities e mee D Setting network security on the printer essssssseeeenm emnes 76 Locking the control panel trt arr ott Ert e gna EE Cod pe te dota a oe daa a 76 ENWW 4 Maintenance Cleaning the printer and accessories sssssssseseeeeneene emen emen 80 Cleaning Spilled toner taste dde metuere aue ae Me ARER Y NER AR NR Ren ELA geet 80 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items ss nnsnenneneseeeeensrtrntensseeeerenrrnnnnnsseeeeenn 81 ETB life under different circumstances eee 82 Locating supplies A 84 Replacing supply items tren e tote niet cade na ode edd eno dnd 85 Changing print cartridges sssssessseeeeeen ee eem ennemis 85 Replacing the transfer unit 24 scsi i iced re eee e eb eee nea ikea 87 Replacing the fuser nennen enne nennen serre nennen ener nnn 90 Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models d 93 Installing memory and font DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 93 Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models d 97 Installing memory and fonts HP Color LaserJet 4650 models nssnsesereerrrerrreerennne 97 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card sssssse enne 105 5 Theory of operation sf i lee TT ge PO TM 108 Operation sequence ssssssssssssssssssseeenenee eene rn nn einn nnne nrtr resti
147. 4600 models is 04460002 The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is 05465004 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight SERVICE Press to select SERVICE Press or V until the first digit of the PIN appears D Press to save the digit The control panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk Press lt at any time to move to the previous digit 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits are typed Clear event log Use this item to clear the printer internal event log Total page count The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted not including engine test prints If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value In this way the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter The page count is in two categories total mono pages and total color pages Transfer kit count Use this item to reset the transfer unit count if the value is lost such as when you replace the formatter This value is initially set to zero at the factory Type a value up to 120 000 This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW TRANSFER KIT to YES in the Resets menu
148. 4600dn 4650 4650n and 4650dn printer 2 HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn 4600hdn and 4650dtn printer 3 HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Table 1 1 Model configurations HP LaserJet 4600 models HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer model number The HP CLJ 4600 printer is the base model C9660A which includes 96 megabytes MB of synchronous dynamic random access memory SDRAM one 500 sheet input tray Callout 1 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer 2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Table 1 1 Model configurations continued HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer model number The HP CLJ 4600n printer contains all of the C9692A features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n print server network card and automatic 2 sided printing duplexing Callout 1 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer model The HP CLJ 4600dn printer contains all of the number C9661A features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n print server network card automatic 2 sided printing duplexing an additional 500 sheet feeder and 10 MB of SDRAM Callout 2 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer model The HP CLJ 4600dtn printer contains all of the number C9662A features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n prin
149. 4650 models e To turn PowerSave on or off 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to enter the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight RESETS Press to select RESETS Press V to highlight POWERSAVE Press to select POWERSAVE Press A or Y to select ON or OFF o oN OP aA o m Press 2 to set the selection Press Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models X e Using PowerSave 53 Connecting to a computer Note Note Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers support network and parallel connections at the same time Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer Parallel connections HP Color LaserJet 4650 models You can not use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time To establish a parallel connection connect the printer to the computer by using a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284 C Plug that connector into the printer s parallel port The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters 30 feet long When used to describe a parallel interface the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port Parallel port
150. 5 ENWW 430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting CYYY YY LLY Tonoer o FA o YLO ogay 300NL EXNYL H YO wr lt o Q Q A 13838 1nOS LLOI NIS Ne zzsr Josuas paa Jadeq EYS J0jouu ulen LW N A gt No abesr Josues Jaded ayjesseo 1940 cds aeesr vaezsr IO Zon E v NYISdO NNISdO NLOSdO ANDd NSISdO VAPT VOd YIMYG CH ne vizsr Josues Jaded ayasseo JaddN LYS Us Uonoejep Uwe UONDSJSP ezis Jaded ezis Jaded ayesseo Jaddn 9jesseo J9 0 LMS TMS PE PP KGR arzsr jn wS SN o s Naziso OND enaziso LN3ZISd 713Z159 AND T13ZISO VI3ziso N jN s s piouejos dnyaid piouojos dnyoid 9joesseo Jamo ayasseo JaddN CIS LIS 2 x 500 sheet feeder ircuit diagram General c Figure 7 56 431 Diagrams ENWW 432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Parts and diagrams This chapter contains information about the following topics tre ele e 434 Ordering parts and Suppli eSis ninin aa nennen mer eterne nnns nns 435 Parts that wear 435 SEET 435 Customer support 200 2c ceeeeeceece cece ee ee eect ee anett eee cea ee cae eeeeeee ees geaeaaeaeeeeeeeseesneaeeaeeeeeetesseees 435 Supplies and accessories nc niriosdn siia anae aa aaa aiaa aea aaaea 435 Common RT 440 Illustrations and parts lists tnnt ttt rh See tere ee deep
151. 6 49 ENWW Formatter case 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield Right cover See Right cover 2 Atthe rear of the printer remove eight screws callout 1 3 Onthe DC controller PCA release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable and disconnect the cable callout 2 When removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 4 Disconnect one connector callout 3 and remove the formatter case Remove the formatter case 1 of 2 Internal components 201 Figure 6 50 Remove the formatter case 2 of 2 Laser scanner components Removing the laser scanner assembly requires several distinct procedures Remove the laser scanner cover plate 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield Right cover See Right cover 2 On the DC controller PCA disconnect four connectors callout 1 3 On the DC controller PCA release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable and disconnect the cable callout 2 CAUTION Wh
152. 60A Figure 1 7 Power and regulatory label Site requirements The printer must be kept in an appropriate location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory In particular be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter The following are recommendations for the printer location and placement Make sure that the printer installation location has the following attributes e A well ventilated dust free area e A hard level surface with not more than a 2 angle e For the HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n and 4600dn the surface must support at least 37 kg 81 Ib e For the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn the surface must support at least 44 kg 97 Ib e For the HP Color LaserJet 4650 4650n and 4650dn the surface must support at least 36 kg 80 Ib e For the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn the surface must support at least 44 kg 97 Ib 12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW CAUTION Note Figure 1 8 ENWW e A level surface that supports all four corners of the printer e A constant temperature and humidity not near water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances The HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn must not be installed on an elevated surface Always install the HP CLJ 4650hdn printer on a hard level floor Make sure to keep the printer away from the following environmental features e Direct sunlight dust open flames
153. 67 RB2 8498 030CN Table 8 18 on page 473 RB2 8540 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RB2 8540 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RB2 8541 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 498 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number RB2 8542 000CN RB2 8590 000CN RB2 8591 000CN RB2 8596 000CN RB3 0607 000CN RB3 0978 000CN RB3 0979 000CN RF5 3739 000CN RF5 3739 000CN RF5 3739 000CN RF5 3749 000CN RF5 3750 020CN RF5 3773 020CN RF5 3774 030CN RF5 3775 030CN RG1 4138 020CN RG1 4139 000CN RG1 4140 040CN RG1 7542 000CN RG5 5469 000CN RG5 5469 000CN RG5 6390 000CN RG5 6391 100CN RG5 6391 100CN RG5 6392 000CN RG5 6392 000CN RG5 6393 000CN RG5 6393 000CN RG5 6394 000CN RG5 6395 000CN RG5 6395 000CN Fixed level left plate secures the printer to the Table 8 22 on page 481 feeder 4650 Only Fixed level right plate secures the printer to the feeder 4650 Only Paper pickup PCA Table 8 4 on page 445 Table 8 22 on page 481 Paper sensor PCA assembly Table 8 16 on page 469 een 0 eene EE High voltage power supply PCA assembly Table 8 8 on page 453 Numerical parts list 499 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RG5 6396 000CN Table 8 4 on page 445 RG5 6396 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 6399 030CN Table 8 4 on page 445 RG5 6399 030CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 6400 030CN Table 8 4 on page
154. 9 To install the software for Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows 2003 1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box click Search 2 Onthe Locate Driver Files screen select the Specify a Location check box click to clear all of the other check boxes and then click Next 3 Type the letter for the root directory For example X where X is the letter of the root directory on the CD ROM drive Click Next Follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when the installation has been completed Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen oN Oo p Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed Note If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for help or more information 70 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Network configuration ENWW Use the information in this section to configure the printer for use in a network Configuring the printer for the network You can configure certain network parameters on the printer from the printer control panel or for most networks from the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh The utilities are provided on the printing software CD ROM that comes with the
155. A 330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 11 Causes for jams in the paper path continued The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Jams in the top cover The following table describes the causes of and solutions for jams in the top cover Table 7 12 Causes for jams in the top cover The fuser paper sensor or sensor lever is Make sure that the fuser paper sensor lever defective moves smoothly and is set in place Replace the lever if it is damaged Replace the sensor if it is defective The fuser sleeve or pressure roller does not If the fuser drive gears are worn or damaged rotate smoothly replace the fuser The fuser inlet guide is dirty or is covered with Clean the fuser inlet guide toner The fuser sleeve or pressure roller is dirty worn Clean the fuser sleeve or pressure roller If it is or damaged damaged replace the fuser The fuser delivery sensor or sensor lever is Make sure that the fuser delivery sensor lever defective moves smoothly and is set in place Replace the lever if it is damaged Replace the sensor if it is defective The fuser delivery roller is worn Replace the fuser The fuser delivery roller drive gears are worn or Replace the fuser damaged The face down delivery rolle
156. Alerts For networked printers these alerts only appear for your jobs Note that even if you are setting alert options for all printers not all of the options that you select will apply to all printers For example when selecting the option to notify you when the print cartridges are low directly connected printers that support Printer Status and Alerts will generate a message when the print cartridges are low However none of the networked printers will generate this message unless it affects a user specific job 372 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW To specify which status messages appear 1 Open Printer Status and Alerts in one of these ways e Double click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon which is near the clock in the Tray Manager e On the Start menu point to Programs point to Printer Status and Alerts and click Printer Status and Alerts 2 Click the Options icon in the left pane In the For field select the printer driver for this printer or select All Printers 4 Clear the options for the messages that you do not want to appear and select the options for the messages that you do want to appear 5 In Status check rate select how frequently you want the software to update the printer status information that the software uses to generate the messages Status Check Rate might not be available if the printer administrator has restricted the rights to this function To view status messages and information
157. Alphabetical parts list DEE Description Table and page Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 13 on page 463 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 14 on page 465 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 17 on page 471 Plate developer disengagement change plate RB2 8239 030CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Plate drive grounding RB2 8255 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Plate drive interlock RB2 8225 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Plate grounding RB2 8542 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Plate separation assembly RF5 3749 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 Rear cover assembly RG5 7494 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Roller oblique RB1 2155 000CN Table 8 17 on page 471 Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Table 8 20 on page 477 Sensor bracket assembly RB2 8540 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Sensor flag RB2 8498 030CN Table 8 18 on page 473 Separation pad RF5 3750 020CN Table 8 15 on page 467 459 Spring tension Spring tension RS6 2537 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Spring scanner support RB2 8246 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Spring tension Spring tension RS6 2511 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 Spring tension
158. COLOR SET REGISTRATION Note A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500 sheet feeder is used with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models PRINT MODES OPTIMIZE CALIBRATE NOW HP LaserJet 4600 models 364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting CYAN DENSITY MAGENTA DENSITY YELLOW DENSITY BLACK DENSITY RESTORE COLOR VALUES PRINT TEST PAGE SOURCE ADJUST TRAY 1 ADJUST TRAY 2 ADJUST TRAY 3 ADJUST TRAY 4 A list of available modes appears REDUCE HP Color LaserJet 4650 models BACKGROUND TRANSFER STORE OPTIMIZE Use this item to modify the halftone settings for each color Use this item for simplex and duplex image alignment Use this item to associate each media type with a specific print mode Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type Use this item to perform all printer calibrations D Max D Half color plane registration and drum phase adjustment ENWW ENWW Table 7 43 Print quality submenu continued bem o ue pem QUICK CALIBRATE NOW HP LaserJet 4650 models FULL CALIBRATE NOW HP LaserJet 4650 models System setup menu Use this item to perform a partial printer calibration D Max and D Half used for color tone correction Use this item to perform a full printer calibration which includes D max D Half drum phase calibration and color plane registration The System setup menu allows you to make changes to
159. Color LaserJet 4650 models only for jam locations 322 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 6 Error messages and associated jam locations 13 01 00 JAM IN TRAY x 5 printer A 13 01 00 jam occurs when the paper is late in arriving at the paper leading edge sensor PS3 in the paper pickup assembly This event could be a no pick resulting in the absence of media in the paper path or could be a sheet that was delayed and jammed somewhere in the feed area between the specified tray and the paper pickup assembly If the jam occurs during a multiple page document media might arrive in the fuser but the jam is still a result of the media arriving late to the paper leading edge sensor PS3 from the specified tray The printer will not boot up if a 13 01 00 jam occurs 13 02 00 JAM IN TRAY x 4 or 5 printer A 13 02 00 jam occurs when the paper leading edge sensor PS3 has been triggered but never clears The media remains in the registration assembly After opening and closing the front covers and ETB the printer can boot up when a 13 02 00 error exists if the sensor is stuck or media remains in the sensor 13 09 00 JAM IN TOP COVER 1 printer A 13 09 00 jam occurs when AREA the media has successfully left the paper pick unit cleared the paper leading edge sensor PS3 and arrived at the fuser triggering the fuser inlet paper sensor PS11 The media folds into an accordion jam in the fuser and never triggers
160. ECEPPEHELEEEEEPEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEELE SEDET T S 50bE05Z65522836962002300RSPDZUD0 226225033603 D ds ses rk pbrk ekip sie stk ebl sp Pp p Ha Jes Jemen ozor 25654 ETE esosd ET 405085 Gang Aes asodind hpyy sosuag dn apesseg 15650 ETE 105ueg jeded stees vessa ETE 29 sosuag LHO vod dmpid T peusps deeg 7 g t i feit esodind pinyy zH fe L 7 23 H VI t BEBE wups i S Vum HU EE 3 dnyold ayesseg Ld 5 Y I ij JAN 2010 dm4 z t r ze T I amma l z 3 5 a D I aner t s fue iads sow ala on ko Y 8 H SE ouod f S 5 2 IE ssi z M 4 TH vous 1 H ZS 8 1 XE saevo ees FEE KR SNSala SER mi TH avs peeds aLam R ZB aces 6Sdl D D ER att wn vad HEIN vod lg d i uonoarag jens aeuo Ferrey used EJ KN uen Tr H T r Ki Janjaooy UO Em bn panua L DE w n o ap LIUM janua E S su looo wen zx s 2 z ebpuueo 9 wr paa Jeneoep 4f H ms 9 linus t zE one e s TH oves osod sl m e Tip PENSNOL GE 5 EE e eBpuue omr B 99H DN SE fn uz JO woa b Se n e Hi KEEN 9 TAS ess 3 POH S6pupe oleae OAM men TI s TE 1353 ozizar Tur n E 1 e HE e zeg GE Sr T e mais o8puueore off omr SC TH anoni mr omr VEG ane ace KS VOd 19014409 OG zd 503222 EE 5 822528 EEN s5882 255 bs 3222 EE 8555 BEER zen emm r 283 E z 223 2080 ee oor soar E MOSN3S queuuojhu euuajuy 9
161. ENWW Internal components 449 H Y Aha A ip L e d Internal components 2 of 5 Figure 8 5 ENWW 450 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 7 Internal components 2 of 5 ENWW Internal components 451 Internal components 3 of 5 Figure 8 6 ENWW 452 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 8 Internal components 3 of 5 s Jas Feo emma T ENWW Internal components 453 AO B pv cc M A CN AN N WO SSS X AN ANE N A Wit io Ss MN VELGE QI DA R DI Ea r RR AS FR RR AR g AN N i BYA AYR PA Ges qo SA AS Internal components 4 of 5 Figure 8 7 ENWW 454 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 9 Internal components 4 of 5 ENWW Internal components 455 e S mg B de 5e eu 0 Rs e 22 4 C 2 SLUT A DEF A A CANC p Ch US oN Be x V WV gt Internal components 5 of 5 Figure 8 8 ENWW 456 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 10 Internal components 5 of 5 ENWW Internal components 457 Figure 8 9 Paper pickup drive assembly 458 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 11 Paper pickup drive assembly Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only RG5 6469 000CN Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only RG5 7466 000CN ENWW Internal components 459 Drum drive assembly Figure 8 10
162. EPCEEEEPECEDEEEEEEUPECEECEEEEEEEEEEEEEPEEEEREI ROAGESEORSSS M zs REE pa LLLLLLILII moer ior CIJ DLLILLILILLLILLILLLILLLLILLLILLILLIILLLILLILLLILII Dni eror IFT TTTTTTTTTTT Lecker e i4 vert han owe SITT rj 89d 1804U09 fuouiew rom eror fearon z fa o i pl sl ne ze anos H 89d fiddng jewog eBeijon wo1 sepeuuo4 soasonnaropessiodea jeueg jonuo euusluy 9 BUUDIUV euuojuv W Buoy xg 19p904 soded Jeued jonuoo 1 T 8 L I e T D T Y j E 9 2 JejUlld General c 428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Figure 7 53 sosuag Jedeg Jasna ras T T t zur Wig uonosteq E Jaded stoe zue ems ee ms 2 THOUT200V wun send LHL ZHL wow een B mor PMS Vue 1000 2 ae D E B3B un won FE HENE xo EH d imd B G vcore econ Gg Hen ele ofte E mm mei me Tm Tungen Jr FEE OE T ag 8 T FE oe S CEA S 1 T od Aiddng samog een or sur 7 WOd Aiddng amod afieyon mo7 vom anos omunod NOS ken nodvd Des nm oso anos uso usa E fado oe DE vava xmas e op ce p vid ones pee sevo xnolds 3 aNod Loge az enma oe Deed dava Dee Em anos Horn leva fe 1521 Nod voids ez IM es nett MOUM NOOdHL E KA Ke Lien Nos anos varer ase anos ben aoe waver vu T neee anos
163. ERMANENT STORAGE FULL To continue press 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL To continue press 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on One or more printer settings that were saved in the non volatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default Pressing should clear the message Printing can continue but unexpected behavior might occur X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A non volatile storage device is full Pressing amp should clear the message Printing can continue but unexpected behavior might occur X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A non volatile storage device is failing to write Pressing should clear the message Printing can continue but unexpected behavior might occur X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A critical hardware error has occurred Press to continue Turn the printer off and then on Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed Press CO to continue For 68 0 errors turn the printer off and then on If a 68 0 error persists perform an NVRAM intitialization For 68 1 errors use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive If a 68 1 errors persists reinitialize the hard disk Press to continue Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists
164. F1 3 cartridge fan vertical fan F2 Immediately after starting the print operation measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the cartridge fan Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 57 4 Formatter fan error F1 1 Reconnect the connector 41003 on the DC controller PCA Immediately after turning the printer on measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the formatter fan Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models A memory tag error was Turn the printer off and detected then on Replace the memory PCA X Description Replace the DC controller ore PCA Calibrate the printer 4 power supply after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm 0 em 0 Message 59 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 59 X Y PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on ENWW A printer motor error has occurred X Description 0 motor error 1 motor startup error 2 motor rotation error 3 fuser motor startup erro
165. For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin go to www hp com go webjetadmin The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP Ux and Solaris networks It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at www hp com support net printing HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers are equipped with several utilities that make them easy to monitor and manage on a network Utilities 73 Embedded Web server This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server which provides access to information about printer and network activities A Web server provides an environment in which Web programs can run in much the same way that an operating system such as Windows provides an environment in which programs can run on your computer The output from these programs can then be viewed in a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator When a Web server is embedded it resides on a hardware device such as a printer or in firmware rather than being available as software that is loaded on a network server The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone who has a network connected computer or a standard Web browser can use There is no special software to install or configure For more information about the HP embedded Web server see the Embedded Web Server User Guide You can find this guide on the CD ROM that is included
166. G5 7531 000CN Table 8 24 on page Only 485 2 x 500 upper cassette 4650 Only RG5 7535 000CN Table 8 21 on page 479 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly RG5 7530 000CN Table 8 26 on page 4650 Only 489 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly RG5 7529 000CN Table 8 25 on page 4650 Only 487 2 x 500 sheet feeder tray assembly 4650 Only Q3674 67901 Table 8 21 on page 479 500 sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly Q3673 67901 Table 8 19 on page 475 Adjuster cover 4650 Only RB2 3691 000CN Table 8 23 on page 483 Antenna memory PCA assembly RG5 6396 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Arm paper size RB2 8349 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 Arm pressure RB2 8151 020CN Table 8 8 on page 453 Arm test print RB2 8250 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Bracket sensor RB2 8540 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable AC 110 V RG5 6427 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable AC 220 V RG5 6434 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable antenna RG5 6418 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Cable cassette size RG5 6431 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Cable cassette size optional RG5 6430 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Cable DC power supply RG5 6415 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable environment sensor 4650 Only RG5 7471 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 490 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list EE Description Table and page Cable flat RH2 5471 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable interface RG5 6422 000CN Table 8 10 o
167. Gompletely blank Image iiec itti ett Ete vade cee e ette ee Det euo MEE r eu ARA 346 All black or solid Color oet ind anda ENEE a eee 346 Dots in vertical lines valaenes Ke a e eere 346 Dirt on the back of the paper nar nnnnnnentnnnnnnnnnnnnnteonsnnnrnnnnnnnnnen 347 Dirt on the front of the paper sssssssssssssseseseeeneeemen em e eene enne eren 347 Vertical lines EE 348 White vertical lines e Re D e n RR ee NP REDE 348 Horizontal ue 349 White horzontallines e ccce rnc rto tede nete ese ce eR AR ee e RE DR e E COR egene 349 Missing Color RM Lc RE paid 349 Blank spots d ettet ep ae ro p e e rele e penta ARR te 350 Poor fusing usant ohne ear ee alta ee 350 Distortion or blurring onore tette amt un kaka 350 luz T sU 351 Misplaced Image Linser etur carr e TRE ke c Me bete I Sa 351 Repetitive defects troubleshooting AA 352 Interlace troubleshooting ransa erroe rete eden dit 356 Communications checks nennen enne enne 356 RIO troubl shoeting van iie ene pite rre ere p rese didis 356 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations essem 356 Printer Job Language PJL commande emen 357 Control panel troubleshooting ssssesseeenee nennen nennen emnes 360 Fnnting amenu map EE 360 niente m 361 Paper handling MENU zs c tiae tote Secular eene dressene dude oes 362 Configure device menu esse edet eed edente tede tede cin tede ds niger P ede ri eed dd teda 363 Bleu TEE 367 Service MENU ze
168. If the message persists remove and reinstall the flash DIMM If the message persists replace the flash DIMM No action is necessary Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on Printer error troubleshooting 265 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press alternates with Ready INCORRECT COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels To enable writing to the flash memory turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on Press and then press for help Press and Y to step through the instructions The wrong PIN was typed Type the correct PIN After three incorrect PIN entries the printer returns to Ready INCORRECT SUPPLIES For status press C Initializing permanent storage I
169. J 4650 Figure 7 28 Location of motors and fans Table 7 53 Motors and fans Cyan drum motor nm E FAN1 Formatter fan FAN2 Cartridge fan FAN3 Power supply fan HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 29 Motor 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder motor M1 Print Stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60 000 mS If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job print time you can recover the printer in one of two ways e After the print job is completes press Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to return to the Diagnostic menu before the timer times out e After the timer times out press Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state When the timer trips the control panel display shows the message Printing stopped Press C to continue Pressing HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models will print the previously selected
170. Jet 4650 models 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 14 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Power used 426 watts 430 watts Printing 34 watts 36 watts Standby 30 watts 32 watts PowerSave 0 watts 0 watts Off HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Power used 560 watts Same as the 110 V models Printing 38 watts Standby 26 watts PowerSave 0 3 watts Off HP Color LaserJet 4650 models except HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Power used 560 watts Same as the 110 V models Printing 40 watts Standby 31 watts PowerSave 0 3 watts Off HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Minimum recommended circuit capacity for a HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Heat output idle BTU hour Same as the 110 V models for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models except for the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Heat output idle BTU hour Same as the 110 V models for the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Values are subject to change See www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for current information The PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes Environmental specifications Temperature 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Humidity 30 to 70 relative humidity RH 10 to 80 RH Altitude not applicable 0 to 2600 m 0 to 8530 ft ENWW Identification site requirements and specifications 15 Acoustic emissions Sound Power Level SPL Declared Per ISO 9296 Active 22 ppm le
171. LASH DEVICE FAILURE To clear press alternates with Ready Flash disk X initializing Do not power off FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press alternates with Ready FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press alternates with Ready The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing The EIO disk device in slot X is not working correctly SHOW EVENT LOG was selected on the control panel and the event log is empty A device failure has occurred on the specified drive The new flash DIMM that is installed in slot X is initializing The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full To enable writing to the disk turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on No action is necessary Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and it replace with a new EIO disk drive No action is necessary Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on
172. LaserJet 4650 models Use this test to test paper path sensors and the door open switch manually The following illustrations and tables show the locations of these sensors 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS Press to select DIAGNOSTICS Press V to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST Press to select MANUAL SENSOR TEST IRON Diagnostics 391 6 Open and close doors or move sensor flags to see the sensor status change on the control panel display Environment Sensor CLJ 4650 only amp Figure 7 21 Location of sensors Figure 7 22 Sensors on the the paper pickup unit the sensors are on the back side of the PCA 1 Cassette paper sensor PS1 2 Multipurpose tray paper sensor PS2 3 Paper leading edge sensor PS3 4 Overhead transparency sensor PS4 392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 23 Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor 1 Fuser inlet paper sensor PS11 2 Fuser delivery sensor PS12 3 Output bin full sensor PS13 Table 7 51 Sensors ENWW Diagnostics 393 Zu DD J 2 Bs E E Figure 7 24 Sensors 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Feed sensor SR3 2 Upper cassette paper sensor SR1 3 Lower cassette paper sensor SR2 Component test special mode test Use the component test to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems Each component test ca
173. NSERT OR CLOSE TRAY XX For help press 266 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels This message appears when the printer is turned on as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize This message appears when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed Press and then press for help Follow the instructions on the control panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply Press and V to step through the instructions No action is necessary No action is necessary Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued INSTALL lt COLOR gt The cartridge is either not Insert the cartridge or installed or not correctly make sure that the CARTRIDGE installed in the printer cartridge is fully seated alternates with Note Press for detailed information The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption Press and Y to step levels through the instructions For help press If the error persists replace the cartridge Verify that the
174. NU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION OY eov ww 402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Engine resets WARNING CAUTION ENWW Use the following procedures when you perform engine resets Cold reset A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets control panel variables However it does not clear the values in the Service menu such as the serial number and page counts Performing a cold reset erases all of the ElO card information To perform a cold reset 1 Turn the printer on 2 As the printer performs its power on sequence press and hold HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 When SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the control panel display press until COLD RESET appears on the control panel display 4 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The printer performs a cold reset and then continues its power on sequence NVRAM initialization Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number the event log the page counts the calibration settings and the ElO card Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the print
175. NWW ENWW Horizontal lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for horizontal lines Table 7 30 Causes for horizontal lines The photosensitive drum has scars that run from Replace the print cartridge for the affected color end to end The fuser sleeve has scars that run from end to Replace the fuser end White horizontal lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white horizontal lines Table 7 31 Causes for white horizontal lines The photosensitive drum has scars that run from Replace the print cartridge for the affected color end to end The ETB belt has horizontal scars Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Missing color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for missing color Table 7 32 Causes for a missing color A poor contact exists in the developing bias Clean the contacts If they are still dirty after contacts of the high voltage PCA and the print cleaning or if they are damaged replace the cartridge print cartridge or the high voltage contacts Replace the high voltage PCA The primary charging roller is defective Replace the print cartridge for the missing color The laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the missing color Calibr
176. PowerSave mode at the appropriate time but the error message continues to appear 118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Input Output This section explains the printer input output I O capabilities Parallel interface The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface IEEE 1284 The I O provides high speed and two way communication between the printer and the host allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer The user can configure the HIGH SPEED item on the control panel menu This item is found by navigating to the Configure Device menu in the I O menu and Parallel Input The default setting Yes allows the I O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers When set to No the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers The user can also configure the Advance Functions item The default setting ON allows for two way parallel communications The Off mode disables the advanced functionality The I O is compatible with the bidirectional parallel interface standard Expanded I O HP Color LaserJet 4600 models The optional HP Fast InfraRed receiver enables wireless printing from any IRDA compliant portable device such as a laptop computer to the printer The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending infrared port within operating range The connection can be blocked b
177. RDER SUPPLIES More than one supply item is low For menus press ORDER SUPPLIES More than one supply item is low and the SUPPLIES LOW For status press setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenus is set to STOP 254 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Order the image fuser kit Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life Press for detailed information Press and V to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press 2 to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Press 2 twice to continue printing Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message ORDER TRANSFER KIT XXXX PAGES LEFT To continue press ORDER TRANSFER KIT LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT To enter menus press OUTPUT BIN FULL Remove all paper from bin Performing PAPER PATH TEST Performing upgrade Print
178. RSAVE TIME Settings depend on the printer Reduces power consumption model when the printer has been inactive for an extended period PERSONALITY Sets the default personality to automatic switching PCL PDF or PostScript emulation CLEARABLE WARNINGS Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or ON ES when another job is sent Determines printer behavior when the system generates an auto continuable error SUPPLIES LOW CONTINUE Sets low supplies reporting STOP options COLOR SUPPLY LOW AUTOCONTINUE BLACK Sets the COLOR SUPPLY OUT printer behavior When a STOP color supply is empty and the printer is set to AUTOCONTINUE BLACK the printer will continue printing using black toner only JOB STORAGE LIMIT 1 to 100 Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer JAM RECOVERY AUTO Sets whether the printer will ON attempt to reprint pages after a jam OFF LANGUAGE A list of available languages Sets the default language appears UO menu AUTO CONTINUE Use the I O menu to configure the printer I O options 366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 45 I O submenu eier Jas Jeer UO TIMEOUT 5 to 300 Use this item to select the I O timeout in seconds PARALLEL INPUT HIGH SPEED Use this item to select the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS speed at which the parallel port communicates with the host and to enable or disable the bidirectional parall
179. Reference Manual e To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345x PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM PJL EOJ EC 12345x e To set the password send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345x PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD numeric password 0 to 65535 PJL EOJ EC 12345x e To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345x PJL JOB PASSWORD numeric password PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAxIMUM QPJL EOJ EC 12345x ENWW Setting network security on the printer 77 78 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW ENWW Maintenance This chapter provides information about the following topics Cleaning the printer and accessories ssssessseeeeeeeenem mener 80 Cleaning Spilled toner inet ire esa ener ane qe ee dee 80 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items sss 81 ETB life under different circumstances nemen 82 Locating supplies 84 Replacing supply tems usen et trn te Rena RO eee RE ee hai de eaa kt ne Rue ne a de AGE e idee 85 Changing print cartridges ssssssssseeeenee eee enne enne nnne en nennen nennen 85 Replacing the transfer unit ocior trit e detiene seta e teta de der de denda 87 Re
180. SIZE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press 41 5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press 41 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 41 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray A printer error has occurred X Description 1 unknown misprint error 2 beam detect misprint error 3 media feed error size 4 no VSYNC error 5 media feed error type 6 ETB detection error 7 feed delay error 9 noise VSREQ If the incorrect size was selected cancel the job or press for more information Press A and Y to step through the instructions If the incorrect type was selected cancel the job or press for more information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Press C to continue or press for more information If the message persists turn the printer off and then on Printer error troubleshooting 289 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued 49 XXXX A critical firmware error has Press Cancel Job to clear PRINTER ERROR occurred that caused the the print job from the processor on the forma
181. See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield 2 Disconnect one connector callout 1 3 Squeeze the two locking tabs callout 2 and remove the cassette paper size detection switch Remove the cassette paper size detection switch Internal components rear The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the rear of the printer Internal components 195 Formatter 1 Remove eight screws callout 1 Note The formatter in Figure 6 43 Remove the formatter HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown is for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 model The formatter for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 model has different connectors but the eight screws are in the same location 2 Grasp the black disk drive lock callout 2 and pull the formatter out of the printer Figure 6 43 Remove the formatter HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown Note Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the formatter See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 196 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW CAUTION Figure 6 44 ENWW Low voltage power supply 1 2 3 4 5 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover e DC controller shield See DC controller shield e Right
182. T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina n kym tt m llelasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Ala katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas da apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser Country region laser safety statements 31 32 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW ENWW Service approach This chapter provides information about the following topics Service approach P rts and Supplies erret deeg E Ede Lue e edd de Ordering parts supplies and accessories over the Internet ssssssesensssesseerrrrrre neseno Ordering directly through the embedded Web server for printers with network ce MIS Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software HP Color LaserJet 4650 models OMY EL Exchange te e ele TEE World Wide Web EEN HP Service Parts Information ccccccececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseceeaecaeeeeeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeeeeeeeetennaes HP customer EE Ordering related documentation and software sss 33 Service approa
183. W Image defects ENWW If specific defects occur repeatedly print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page and follow the instructions on the page If you are unable to resolve the problem use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem Image defects fall into the categories that are listed in Table 7 18 Image defects Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow In general the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs Check the items in the order in which they appear Table 7 18 Image defects Image defect Light image Light color Dark image Dark color Completely blank All black solid color Dots in vertical lines Dirt on back of paper Dirt on front of paper Vertical lines White vertical lines Horizontal lines White horizontal lines Missing color Blank spots Poor fusing Distortion or blurring Smearing See Completely blank image An all black or solid colored See All black or solid color image is printed Vertical lines of white dots See Dots in vertical lines appear in the image The back non printed side of See Dirt on the back of the the paper is dirty paper The front printed sided of the See Dirt on the front of the paper paper is dirty Vertical lines are printed See Vertical lines White vertical lines appear in See White vertical lines the i
184. X control 141 documentation 38 438 door switch removing 212 DOS commands 356 dots troubleshooting 346 drivers available 62 downloading 36 Help 63 settings 61 drum cleaning operations 136 image formation operations 131 rotation tracking operations 128 drum drive units removing 185 drums drive assemblies part numbers 461 drive assembly part numbers 449 ground assembly part numbers 449 motors 418 sensors 413 duplexer feed unit operations 152 jams causes of 331 media specifications 18 models including 2 E e mail alerts 372 Edge Control settings 341 EIO connections locating 9 10 EIO slots 57 electrical specifications 14 ENWW electrostatic discharge 160 electrostatic image formation block 131 embedded Web server accessing 370 features 74 370 Information tab 371 Networking tab 371 ordering supplies 35 Other links tab 372 Settings tab 371 enabling DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4600 95 HP Color LaserJet 4650 104 engine control system operations 110 engine diagnostics 385 engine test page 402 envelopes printing 22 specifications 18 environment sensor 4650 operations 111 141 part numbers 451 removing 185 environmental specifications 12 15 environmental stewardship 26 error messages 4600 alphabetical 246 4600 numerical 282 4650 alphabetical 262 4650 numerical 300 clearable 119 jams 322 types of 245 ESD electrostatic discharge 160 ETB transfer kit count resetting 406
185. a demonstration page Print RGB Samples Use this item to print color samples for different RGB values HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Print CMYK Samples Use this item to print color samples for different CMYK values HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Print File Directory Use this item to print a page that shows the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk Print PCL Font List Use this item to print a page that shows the available PCL fonts Print PS Font List Use this item to print a page that shows the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Configure device menu printing menu Print PS Errors Use this item to print PS error pages Print PDF Errors Use this item to print PDF error pages Configure device menu resets menu Reset Factory Settings Use this item to clear the page buffer remove all perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults Powersave Use this item to reset PowerSave mode to the factory default 30 minute setting Reset Supplies Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed This item also resets the page count of that supply to zero Configure device menu print quality menu Adjust color Use this item to modify halftone settings for each color Set Registration Use this item to align simplex and duplex images Print Modes Use this item to asso
186. a hint for the I O switching algorithm The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command PJL ECHO This printer supports the ECHO command which transmits its parameters over the I O channel to the host that issued the command PJL USTATUS JOB ON OFF This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I O channel that delivers the command 358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW PJL USTATUSOFF This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I O channel that delivered the command For this printer it duplicates the function of PJL USTATUS JOB OFF AND QPJL USTATUS DEVICE OFF Note All commands that this printer s PJL command set does not support are returned with the message QPJL xxxx lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ENWW Interface troubleshooting 359 Control panel troubleshooting When you press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the menus the high level menus appear in the following order e RETRIEVE JOB this menu appears only if a hard disk is installed e INFORMATION e PAPER HANDLING e CONFIGURE DEVICE e DIAGNOSTICS e SERVICE A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus Figure 7 5 HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map shows a sample of one page of the menu map The menu map pri
187. about 160 ohms replace the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid The pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly The paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Jams in tray 2 The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 2 Table 7 9 Causes for jams in tray 2 The separation tabs in the paper cassette are Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the deformed tray or replace the cassette The pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller The feed roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the feed roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the feed roller 328 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 9 Causes for jams in tray 2 continued The drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged The cassette pickup solenoid is damaged Disconnect the connector for the cassette pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCA Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J1020 13 and J1020 12 If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms replace the cassette p
188. ace the toner level sensing PCA Replace the DC controller Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Cr Acton Message 55 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 55 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection Press to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat or replace the connectors between the DC controller and the formatter If the problem persists replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Replace the formatter Initialize NVRAM See NVRAM initialization Printer error troubleshooting 295 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message 57 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 58 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 58 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 296 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting emm Acton 0 A printer fan error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on X Description 57 3 Cartridge fan error F2 1 Reconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller 4 formatter fan horizontal fan PCA
189. ag x mcdio ess 127 Toner level detection cccccccceceeeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeenaececeeeseseeceneeeeeeeesetenseaeees 128 Developing cylinder disengaging eeeseesrrsesrsrrreserrrrenrinnnesrnnrnaarreneeeennnne 129 ETB nit et ibi ett Nm eege 130 Primary exposure vic eer dee ito ben idee E Hoe 131 Primary charging her eR ORDEI 132 Laser Deam exposure teinte EIN Ira Aure e M bee A da 132 xiii xiv Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Development block tete Reti peu ess 133 Attaching the paper to the EIB 134 Toner transfer ote rite eti ei pev ets tibi t eid 135 DEC ParatlOn M EXE 135 FUSING itr pH P RU ED EO ture te 136 ETB Cleaning iiid tete ede ace ERU Eoo Ded ve did dee b edd 138 Drumccleanltig
190. ailure has occurred on the specified drive The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full emm Acton Press C2 to continue The printer is currently deleting No action is necessary the stored job Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive To clear the message turn the printer off and then on If the message persists remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive If the message persists replace the EIO disk drive Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and then try again To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on ENWW ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press alternates with Ready EIO DISK X Initializing EIO DISK X NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press Event log empty F
191. alibration arnnrrernonrrrnnrnnrrrnnnonrrnnnnnnrnnnnenrrnnrrnnnrenrennrnensennnnne 140 Drum phase le EU TEE 140 Image stabilization Control 141 Pickup feed RE 144 Pickup feed unit 22 0 2 ceccceceee cece eee eeceeeee cence eee ea aaanaeceeeeecdeaaaaeaeeeeeeeeesesseneceeeeeeeeteneeaeees 147 Fuser delivery unit 2 ect re eet EES 151 Duplex feed unit sssssssssssssessssseeeer ennemi esent nennen 152 500 sheet paper feeder eec eir tere EES eere ee eU Ter ha n de red in 153 ENWW v vi Pickup and feed operations esses eene tens 153 2 X 500 sheet feeder tree ete e and eene eed xao ane dn Aes ken ka ace din rend eH E Rue axe 155 Pickup and feed system ctio ipee Ic ae ERU in ERTAKKA ade RR tala V dad p ze dae 155 6 Removal and replacement Introduction EE 160 Repair ed 160 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD eene 160 REQUIRED TOONS EEE RE NE ne 160 TYPOS Of SCEOWS C 161 SUP PSS une gik Aaa 163 Print cartridges and EIB 164 Covers and external components cccececeeeeeeceececeeeeeeeeeecaaecaeeeeeeeteesecsneaeeeeeeeeeetseteesees 165 Bree 165 Usu EPEN 166 KE Te e ee gu M 167 le EE 169 aeneo EE 170 Multipurpose tray tray TEEN 171 FROMM COVEN im Mmm 172 Control panel m 173 Installing a n
192. an error occurs that prevents printing and Auto Continue Off is set the message appears until HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is pressed Read only memory Besides storing microprocessor control programs the read only memory ROM stores dot patterns of internal character sets fonts Random access memory The random access memory RAM contains the page I O buffers and the font storage area It stores printing and font information received from the host system and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print image data before the data is sent to the print engine Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter Note that adding memory DIMMs might also increase the print speed for complex graphics DIMM slots HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer The DIMM slots can be used to add memory fonts or firmware upgrades Firmware DIMM HP Color LaserJet 4600 models To upgrade printer firmware install a new firmware DIMM firmware DIMMs are flashable See Installing memory and font DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4600 models for more information Flash memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models To upgrade printer firmware install a new firmware Compact FLASH See Installing memory and fonts HP Color LaserJet 4650 models for more information Nonvolatile memory The printer uses nonvolatile memory NVRAM to store I O and information about the print envi
193. and fans HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers Environment sensor Figure 5 5 Fan and environment sensor HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 112 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5 2 Function of motors fans and environment sensor M1 Cyan cartridge Drives the dc motor 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 motor photosensitive drum 1 4 M2 Yellow cartridge motor M3 Magenta cartridge motor M4 Black cartridge motor M5 Pickup motor Drives the pickup roller Stepping motor 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 and feed roller 1 4 M6 ETB motor Drives the ETB 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 1 4 M7 Developing Separates the Stepping motor No disengaging motor photosensitive drums and the developing cylinders M8 Fuser motor Drives the pressure dc motor 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 roller and delivery roller 1 4 FAN1 Formatter fan Exhausts heat around dc motor 2 speed full during the formatter and low printing 1 2 during voltage power supply standby unit FAN2 Cartridge fan Exhausts heat around dc motor No the fuser and cartridges full speed during printing only FAN 3 Power supply Exhausts heat around dc motor No fan HP Color LaserJet the pickup motor and full speed during 4650 models only low voltage power ae printing only supply Environment sensor Detects the NA HP Color LaserJet temperature and 4650 models only humidity levels inside the printer ENWW Engine control system 11
194. and replacement ENWW DC controller PCA 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield 2 Remove four screws callout 1 3 Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller PCA including the formatter ribbon cable callout 2 CAUTION When removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it or to damage the connector Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 4 Remove the DC controller PCA Figure 6 40 Remove the DC controller PCA Note Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the DC controller PCA See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Internal components 193 Memory controller PCA 1 2 3 4 Remove the DC controller PCA See DC controller PCA Remove three screws callout 1 Disconnect five connectors callout 2 Remove the memory controller PCA Figure 6 41 Remove the memory controller PCA 194 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 42 ENWW Cassette paper size detection switch 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover
195. ants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which i
196. anywhere in the office or home and connected to a wireless network running Microsoft Apple Netware UNIX or Linux network operating systems This wireless technology provides a high quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing network cables Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard Connecting to a computer 59 Note 60 HP Jetdirect 802 11b print servers are available for USB and parallel connections Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is not supported for the Macintosh operating system Bluetooth wireless technology is a low power short range radio technology that can be used to wireless connect computers printers personal digital assistants PDAs cell phones and other devices Unlike infrared technology Bluetooth s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be in the same room office or cubicle or have an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network programs HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer models use a Bluetooth adapter hp bt1300 to incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections The adapter has a 10 meter operation range in the 2 5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 72
197. appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed Force a calibration by selecting Full Calibrate Now on the Print Quality menu See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models If the message persists verify the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller Replace the color registration detection unit If the message persists replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Printer error troubleshooting 263 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message DATA RECEIVED To print last page press C Deleting DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY xx For help press alternates with DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY Xx Recommend move switch to STANDARD DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press C DISK DEVICE OPERATION FAILED To clear press alternates with Ready DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with To clear press Ready 264 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed When the printer receives another file the message should disappear A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom A device f
198. arity framing or line overrun has occurred while the printer was receiving data A connection with the card in EIO slot X has been broken abnormally The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur Press to resume printing see note below Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly If possible print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly Note A loss of data will occur If the incorrect size was selected cancel the job or press for more information Press A and Y to step through the instructions ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message 41 5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press 41 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 41 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press ENWW The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray A printer error has occurred X Description 1 unknown misprint error 2 beam detect misprint error 3 media f
199. aserJet 4650 models 262 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sss 282 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models sss 300 Replacement parts configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models sss 319 Formatter and DC controller sesssseeeeenn enm eme nennen 319 Formatter new or previously installed in another printer eeeeeeeeee 319 DC Controller new or previously installed in another printer ssssssssss 320 Paper path troubleshooting ssssssssssssssseeeseee nennen eene nnns 321 JANS roten t deco vei ON eub aute sched anda e beg vehe gie e eb dec eas 321 laten Zeene EE 321 Jam locations by error message sssssssssseee emere 322 JAM recovery aime nette cate ie mutet AEA 324 Avoiding CT 325 Persistent JAMS 2 aaret dekan Rare und 326 Paper transport troubleshooting esssssssssssseseeenem eee nnne 333 Multiple pages are fed cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaeeeeeeeeeseececueeeceeeeeeseseeeensineeeees 333 Media is wrinkled or folded ssessssseeeeeenne mener 333 Papen E WEE 334 Image formation troubleshooting sese emere nennen 335 Print quality troubleshooting tools HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
200. asticity of the print media causes it to separate from the ETB as the ETB reaches the top of its path Figure 5 26 Separation illustrates this step ETB belt ETB feed roller Print paper Fusing block The fourth part of the image formation process is the fusing block in which the toner image is fused to the media making a permanent image that cannot be smeared This block consists of one step fusing Separation Image formation system 135 Figure 5 27 Step 9 Fusing This printer uses the induction heating method to fuse the toner to the media This method uses quick fuser heating resulting in shortened wait time and reduced power consumption Figure 5 27 Fusing illustrates this step eee Coil Toner Fusing Cleaning block The fifth and final part of the image formation process is the cleaning block in which the ETB and the photosensitive drums are cleaned preparing them for the next print The next section provides more information about printer calibration and cleaning This block consists of two steps e ETB cleaning e Photosensitive drum cleaning Step 10 ETB cleaning See ETB cleaning for a complete discussion of ETB cleaning Step 11 Photosensitive drum cleaning See Photosensitive drum cleaning for a complete discussion of photosensitive drum cleaning Calibration and cleaning The printer automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain the best
201. at attaches the hinge unit and remove the hinge unit from the fuser drive Remove the fuser drive unit 1 of 2 Internal components 215 Figure 6 67 Remove the fuser drive unit 2 of 2 216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Fuser inlet paper sensor 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Fuser See Replacing the fuser 2 Unhook two tabs callout 1 they are on the front of the sensor 3 Disconnect the connector directly in front of those tabs This connector is hidden in the photo 4 Remove the fuser paper sensor Figure 6 68 Remove the fuser paper sensor ENWW Internal components 217 Fuser delivery sensor 1 Remove the following assemblies EE OV Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Fuser See Replacing the fuser Unhook the two tabs on the back of the sensor on the connector side Disconnect one connector callout 1 Remove the fuser delivery sensor callout 2 Figure 6 69 Remove the fuser delivery sensor 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 70 ENWW Output bin full sensor 1 Remove the following assemblies gt CoU Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Fuser See Replacing the fuser Unhook the two tabs callout 1 Disconn
202. at shipped in the box with the printer HP service agreements Call 800 835 4747 U S or 800 268 1221 Canada For extended Service call 800 446 0522 HP Toolbox HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only To check the printer status and settings and to view troubleshooting information and online documentation use HP Toolbox You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network You must have performed a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox HP support and information for Macintosh computers Visit www hp com go macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for driver updates Visit www hp com go mac connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user HP customer care 37 Ordering related documentation and software The following table lists part numbers for related documentation and software HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 5963 7863 HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator s 5971 3257 Guide PCL PJL Technical Reference Package 5021 0330 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Getting C9660 90902 Started Guide HP Color LaserJet 4650 Series Getting Q3668 90902 Started Guide HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service Manual C9660 90901 Note This service manual include both the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 model printers HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service Q3668 90901 Manual this manual provides service
203. at the top of the ETB unit to measure image density The DC controller emits a light from sensors located above the density detection patterns on the ETB The light reflected off the patterns is returned to the sensor and the data is returned to the DC controller Figure 5 32 Image density detection illustrates this process When the values that the density sensor detects are outside the specified range the DC controller resets the image density and issues an image density sensor out of guaranteed range warning to the formatter 142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 32 ENWW If the sensor receives no reflected light the DC controller stops the printer and issues a density sensor abnormality warning to the formatter DC controller PCB _ A TO Za sa Oz soles r z 78 r Oo 2 N q Zz OG i U ZE Lu Oa Sensor R Sensor L X gn ge Detection pattern ETB belt Image density detection Image formation system 143 Pickup feed system The pickup feed system picks media from the input trays and carries it along the paper path The printer has one multipurpose tray tray 1 and one 500 sheet cassette tray 2 A second 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4650 4650n and 4650dn models it is standard on the 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn 4650dtn models The HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn has 2 x 500 sheet feeder
204. ate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA Image defects 349 Table 7 32 Causes for a missing color continued The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Blank spots This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for blank spots Table 7 33 Causes for blank spots The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Poor fusing This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for poor fusing Table 7 34 Causes for poor fusing The media is not within specifications For Use media that meets specifications See example media that is too thick causes poor chapter 1 fusing The fuser is not within nip width specifications Replace the fuser The fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged Replace the fuser The pressure roller is scarred or damaged Replace the fu
205. ations 118 settings 53 PPDs Macintosh 64 67 pre troubleshooting checklist 241 preconfiguration driver 61 preprinted paper 23 primary charging operations 132 primary exposure operations 131 print cartridges diagnostics 388 395 installing 48 locating 84 operations 126 ordering 35 434 partnumbers 439 recycling 26 removing during service 164 replacement intervals 81 replacing 85 status page printing 361 375 storing 16 Print in Grayscale 340 PRINT period 108 Print quality menu 364 ENWW print quality troubleshooting after jams 337 blank images 346 blank spots 350 blurring 350 color 337 341 344 345 346 349 dark print 345 defects 343 diagnostic pages 337 dirty pages 347 dots 346 fusing poor 350 light print 344 lines 348 media 335 misplaced images 351 repetitive defects 352 smearing 351 printer drivers available 62 Help 63 settings 61 printer languages PJL 121 357 supported 5 Printer Status and Alerts 372 Printing menu 363 processor 119 PS font lists printing 361 380 Q quality troubleshooting after jams 337 blank images 346 blank spots 350 blurring 350 color 337 341 344 345 346 349 dark print 345 defects 343 diagnostic pages 337 dirty pages 347 dots 346 fusing poor 350 light print 344 lines 348 media 335 misplaced images 351 repetitive defects 352 smearing 351 Quick Calibrate Now 405 R rear cover removing 165 rear top cover removing 167 recovery jam 324 recycled paper 2
206. attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it A firmware upgrade is in progress No action is necessary Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin The message disappears when the job is finished You can then remove pages from the bin Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the control panel display Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control panel display If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control panel display This will also delete any files saved in RAM To enable writing to the RAM disk turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin software To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued REINSTALL lt COLOR gt The cartridge is not fully seated Press for detailed CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press REMOVE ALL PRINT CARTRIDGES To exit press Cancel Job key REMOVE AT LEAST 1 PRINT CARTRIDGE To exit press Cancel Job key REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE alternates with For help p
207. atures PostScript Printer Description files Note If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation download them from www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support 1j4650 After you are connected select Downloads and Drivers to find the driver that you want to download You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP authorized service or support provider See the support flyer that came in the printer box OS 2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS 2 Note If the printer driver you want is not on the printer CD ROM or is not listed here check the installation notes and Readme files to see if the printer driver is supported If it is not supported contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program you are using and request a driver for the printer Additional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD ROM but are available from the Internet or from HP Customer Care e PCL 5c printer drivers for Windows 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP and Server 2003 e OS 2 PCL 59 6 printer driver 62 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW e OS 2 PS printer driver e UNIX model scripts e Linux drivers e HP Open VMS drivers Note The OS 2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS 2 They are not available for Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean or Ja
208. ay until the printer finishes printing the configuration page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page Note If the printer is configured with EIO cards for example an HP Jetdirect Print Server or an optional hard disk drive an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices Figure 7 7 Printer configuration page HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Printer information Event log Installed personalities and options Memory Security Paper trays and options OO Om P GO A 374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 8 ENWW Pager Trays and Options HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configuration page Printer information Event log Installed personalities and options Calibration information Color density Memory Security Paper trays and options ce JO Om P ob A Print the supplies status page The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies e Print cartridges all colors e Transfer unit e Fuser To print the supplies status page 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press W to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS 5 Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS The message PRINTING SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the control panel display until the printer
209. belt 108 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 5 1 Basic operation sequence WAIT wait period STBY standby period INTR initial rotations period PRINT print period LSTR last rotations period From the time the power switch is turned on until the ETB cleaning is completed From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period or last rotation until the formatter inputs a print command or until the power is turned off From immediately after the formatter inputs a print command until the TOP signal is sent to the formatter From the end of the INTR period until the leading edge detection sensor detects paper and then turns off the transfer positive bias From the end of the PRINT period until the ETB motor stops To clear a potential on the drum surface and to clean the ETB To keep the printer ready to print To stabilize the photosensitive drum sensitivity in preparation for a print operation To form an image on the photosensitive drum according to the video signal input from the formatter and to transfer the toner image to the paper To deliver the paper out of the printer and to clean the ETB During this period the printer checks the toner level and detects whether the cartridges are present The printer also executes the pulse width modulation adjustment color registration adjustment and image density calibration control as required When the formatter s
210. ble 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message SIZE MISMATCH TRAY XX lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with Ready TRAY XX EMPTY TYPE SIZE alternates with Ready TRAY XX OPEN For help press alternates with Ready TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE Setting saved 278 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray The specified tray is empty and needs to be filled but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly The specified tray is open or is not closed completely A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu Refill the tray at a convenient time Close the tray Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A
211. ble 8 17 on page 471 RG5 7459 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 RG5 7466 000CN Table 8 11 on page 459 RG5 7466 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 RG5 7467 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 7467 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 RG5 7468 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 7468 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 RG5 7469 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 7469 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 RG5 7470 000CN Table 8 4 on page 445 RG5 7470 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 RG5 7471 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 RG5 7475 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 RG5 7480 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RG5 7489 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 RG5 7494 000CN Table 8 5 on page 447 RG5 7518 000CN 2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly 4650 Table 8 21 on page 479 Only RG5 7523 000CN Outrigger assembly 4650 Only Table 8 23 on page 483 RG5 7529 000CN 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly Table 8 25 on page 487 4650 Only RG5 7530 000CN 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly Table 8 26 on page 489 4650 Only RG5 7531 000CN 2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly 4650 Table 8 24 on page 485 Only RG5 7534 000CN Table 8 21 on page 479 RG5 7535 000CN Table 8 21 on page 479 RG5 7541 000CN Table 8 20 on page 477 RG9 1529 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 RH2 5471 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 RH5 1495 000CN Motor M8 fuser DS brushless 24 V 4600 Only Table 8 14 on page 465 502 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number
212. came in the printer box or go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for help or more information To set up Windows sharing to use the printer on a network If the printer is directly connected to a computer with a parallel cable you can share the printer on the network so that other network users can print to it Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Note Note ENWW See your Windows documentation to make Windows sharing available After the printer is shared install the printer software on all computers that share the printer Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software The printing system software supports Apple Mac OS version 9 1 x and later The printing system software includes the following components e PostScript Printer Description PPD files The PPDs in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers provide access to printer features An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the CD ROM that came with the printer Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system e HP LaserJet Utility The HP LaserJet Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer e Name the printer e Assign the printer to a zone on th
213. cedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the front of the printer ENWW Internal components 177 Paper pickup unit 1 Remove the DC controller shield See DC controller shield 2 Use a screwdriver to rotate the ETB latch receptacles up They are stiff and might be difficult to move Remove two screws callout 1 4 Disconnect the connector J1020 on the DC controller callout 2 and push the connector through the hole in the chassis callout 3 5 Lift the paper pickup unit up and pull it forward to remove it Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Remove the paper pickup unit 2 of 2 178 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Paper pickup sensor PCA 1 Remove the paper pickup unit See Paper pickup unit 2 Push in on the black tab callout 1 on the right side of the paper pickup unit and then remove the sensor cover 3 Remove three screws callout 2 disconnect the connector callout 3 and then remove the sensor PCA Figure 6 19 Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA 1 of 2 Figure 6 20 Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA 2 of 2 ENWW Internal components 179 Cassette tray 2 paper pickup rollers 1 Remove the following assemblies e Print cartridges and ETB See Replacing supply items e Paper pickup unit See Paper pickup unit 2 From the bottom of the paper pickup unit firmly push down on the paper pickup rollers callout 1 to remove
214. celing a job The message will continue to appear while the job is stopped the paper path flushed and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded Checking paper path The engine is turning its rollers No action is necessary to check for possible jams Checking printer The engine is doing an internal test 262 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE To continue press Clearing event log Clearing paper path CLOSE FRONT COVERS For help press CPR SENSOR OUT OF RANGE The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages will be printed This message appears while the event log is cleared The printer will exit the menus after the event log has been cleared The printer jammed or detected misplaced media when it was turned on The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically The covers have to be closed The CPR Sensor is not behaving properly Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions No action is necessary No action is necessary 1 Press for more information 2 Close the front covers Note This message might also
215. ces printers plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating systems the World Wide Web and most office software that is sold today SRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high definition television Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room s lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen For more information see Matching colors The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW Microsoft Office and many other programs use sRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems SRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching SRGB improves your ability to match colors among the printer the computer monitor and other input devices scanner digital camera automatically without the need to become a color expert Color options Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents Image formation troubleshooting 339 Note Note Color options use object tagging which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects text graphics and photos on a page The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color set
216. ch Printer repair normally begins by using the printer s internal diagnostics and the following three step process 1 Isolate the problem to the major system for example the host computer the network or server or the printer system 2 Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine 3 Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 7 After you locate a faulty part the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units FRUs Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level Hewlett Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles 34 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW Parts and supplies CAUTION ENWW Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual Order replacement parts from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider Ordering parts supplies and accessories over the Internet To order supplies in the US contact www hp com go ljsupplies To order supplies worldwide see www hp com ghp buyonline html To order accessories see www hp com Ordering directly through the embedded Web server for printers with network connections Use the following
217. ciate each media type with a specific print mode 400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Optimize Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type Calibrate Now For HP Color LaserJet 4600 models use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality Full Calibrate Now For HP Color LaserJet 4650 models use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality Quick Calibrate Now For HP Color LaserJet 4650 models use this item to partially calibrate the printer for optimum print quality Color Ret Use this item to turn on or turn off a color printer Resolution Enhancement technology REt setting ENWW Diagnostics 401 Test pages Figure 7 30 Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning Engine test page To verify that the printer engine is functioning print an engine test page Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the left side of the printer as shown in Figure 7 30 Test page switch The test page should have a series of horizontal lines The test page can use only tray 2 as the paper source so make sure that paper is loaded in tray AK A 1 NSW N Test page switch Formatter test page To verify that the formatter is functioning print a configuration page as follows 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or ME
218. cing any of the drum drive gears See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Drum home position sensors 1 Remove the drum drive gears See Drum drive gears 2 Disconnect four connectors callout 1 3 Push each drum home position sensor holder behind the connectors shown in callout 1 toward the rear of the printer and flex it to remove the projection Remove the sensor 188 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Disengage the two tabs that hold each drum home position sensor in its holder and then remove the sensors Figure 6 34 Remove the drum home position sensors Note Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive position sensors See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Drum drive motors 1 Remove the drum drive gears See Drum drive gears 2 From the front of the printer release the tab that holds the black interlock cover callout 1 in place and then remove the interlock cover ENWW Internal components 189 3 Remove the interlock arm from the interlock lever callout 2 Figure 6 35 Remove the interlock cover Ki e VE mg Y IK ei m Ve L i Figure 6 36 Remove the interlock arm 4 Liftthe cartridge shutter bar callout 3 up and out of the printer 5 Remove four screws callout 4 In the picture the gear hides the screw in t
219. cing the printer gather the following tools e Phillips 2 magnetized screwdriver 152 mm 6 inch shaft e Small flat blade screwdriver e Small needle nose pliers e ESD strap e Penlight optional 160 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 1 ENWW All components in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer use Phillips head screws that require a 2 Phillips screwdriver Make sure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver Figure 6 1 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver The surfaces on a Phillips tip are more beveled surfaces Phillips Posidriv Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison Types of screws Table 6 1 Types of screws describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where to use each type of screw The screws vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location Table 6 1 Types of screws mmm que Screw machine with washer To hold plastic to metal M3x8 For example printer covers part number xA9 1276 000CN Screw self tapping To hold plastic to plastic For example printer cover to a plastic hinge Screw truss head To hold sheet metal to sheet metal M3x6 part number xA9 1275 000CN For example formatter cage Introduc
220. cled paper 24 size detection operations 148 158 skewed troubleshooting 334 specifications 17 speed control 150 tough paper 23 transparencies 21 troubleshooting 19 troubleshooting print quality 335 weight equivalence table 24 wrinkled troubleshooting 333 media jams See jams memory base 2 enabling 4600 95 enabling 4650 104 installing 4600 93 installing 4650 97 NVRAM initialization 403 510 Index operations 119 part numbers 445 PCAs locating 420 tag print cartridges 127 verifying installation 4600 96 memory controller PCA removing 194 memory tag antenna PCAs removing 191 menus control panel Configure device 363 Diagnostics 367 I O 366 Information 361 locking 76 map printing 360 Paper handling 362 Print quality 364 Printing 363 Resets 367 Service 368 406 System setup 365 unlocking menus 403 messages 4600 alphabetical 246 4600 numerical 282 4650 alphabetical 262 4650 numerical 300 clearable 119 jams 322 types of 245 misplaced images troubleshooting 351 model number locating 11 models features 2 5 motors developing disengaging removing 192 diagnostics 395 drum drive removing 189 locating 418 locations 398 operations 111 pickup feed system 146 scanner control 122 multi feeds troubleshooting 333 multipurpose tray See Tray 1 N Networking tab embedded Web server 371 networks cards models including 2 cards partnumbers 436 communications troub
221. cling supplies 26 weight equivalence table paper 24 Windows drivers supported 62 installing network software 66 installing software 65 69 sharing 66 wireless printing 59 wrinkled pages troubleshooting 333 Index 515 516 Index ENWW O invent 2004 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company LP www hp com Q3668 90901
222. color laser class quality with millions of smooth colors HP ImageREt 3600 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system that HP developed to deliver superior print quality and technological innovation The HP ImageREt system incorporates technology that optimizes each element of the print system Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed that meet a variety of user needs The system is comprised of key laser technologies for color printing including image enhancements smart supplies and high resolution imaging The ImageREt core technologies are refined in higher level systems for more advanced system users and additional technologies are integrated The HP ImageREt 3600 is a complete HP proprietary printing solution developed and implemented for the first time in the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer HP now offers superior image enhancements for general office and marketing documents HP ImageREt 3600 performs well in different environmental conditions and with a variety of media and the image mode is optimized for printing on HP High Gloss Laser Paper Paper selection For the best color and image quality select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel sRGB Standard red green blue SRGB is a world wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors input devices scanners digital cameras and output devi
223. com support net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect 4650 external print server HP Instant Support Professional Edition ISPE is a suite of Web based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products ISPE helps you quickly identify diagnose and resolve computing and printing problems The ISPE tools are available at www instantsupport hp com Telephone support HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period When you call you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you For the telephone number for your country region see the flyer that shipped in the box with the product or visit www hp com support callcenters Before calling HP have the following information ready product name and serial number date of purchase and description of the problem You can also find support on the Internet at www hp com Click the support amp drivers block Software utilities drivers and electronic information Visit www hp com go clj4650 software for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The Web page for the drivers might be in English but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer for phone contact information HP service information To locate HP Authorized Dealers call 800 243 9816 U S or 800 387 3867 Canada For service for your product call the customer support number for your country region See the flyer th
224. connection HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 54 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Note To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed These enhanced capabilities include bidirectional communication between the computer and printer faster transfer of data and automatic configuration of printer drivers USB configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models This printer supports a USB 1 1 connection The port is located on the back of the printer as shown in Figure 3 3 USB connection You must use an A to B type USB cable Note USB support is not available for computers running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 You can not use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time Figure 3 3 USB connection 1 USB connector 2 USB port Auxiliary connection configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models This printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input devices The port is located on the back of the printer as shown in the figure below Figure 3 4 Auxiliary connection 1 Auxiliary connection port ENWW Connecting to a computer 55 Network connections Use one of the following procedures to establish the appropriate connection to the network Direct to network Connect one end of the network cable to the RJ 45 port on the HP Jetdirect print server card Connect the other end to the network
225. connectors between the memory tag antenna memory controller board and the DC controller are seated correctly Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color Replace the memory controller PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models INSTALL FUSER The fuser is either not installed Insert the fuser or make 5 or not correctly installed in the sure that the installed fuser For help press printer is fully seated Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that fuser connector J4034 is good Replace that connector if necessary Replace the fuser assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 267 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message INSTALL SUPPLIES For status press INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT For help press LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XxX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press 268 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrect
226. continued Cause The print media is perforated or embossed This media does not separate easily You might need to feed single sheets from tray 1 One or more printer supply items have reached Check the printer control panel for messages the end of their useful life prompting you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies The print media was not stored correctly Replace the print media Media should be stored in its original packaging in a controlled environment Persistent jams If jams occur repeatedly use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path Items are listed in the order that you should use to investigate In general items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs Items at the end of the list are more complex repairs Basic troubleshooting for jams Use the following basic troubleshooting process for jams 1 Gather data 2 Identify the cause of the problem 3 Fix the problem Data collection To troubleshoot jams gather the following information e The exact jam error code tat appears on the control panel display e The location of the leading edge of the media that is in the paper path e Whether media is in the paper path when the jam occurs or in the input tray e Whether the jam occurs at p
227. cutive JIS B5 16K A4 A5 and custom size media the tray is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer Note The 2 x 500 sheet feeder is available only for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models e Includes built in 2 sided printing on the HP Color LaserJet 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn 4650dn 4650dtn and 4650hdn printers Includes a 250 sheet face down output bin 6 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Table 1 2 Printer features continued fom pmi Accessories Printer hard disk which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as job storage the hard disk is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn and 4650hdn printers HP CLJ 4600 models Dual inline memory modules DIMMs HP CLJ 4650 models Compact Flash memory Printer stand Optional 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 and custom size media the feeder is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn 4600hdn and 4650dtn printers HP CLJ 4650 models Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 4 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 and custom size media the feeder is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4650hdtn printer HP CLJ 4600 models Fast InfraRed FIR pod HP CLJ 4650 models Two 200 pin DDR SDRAM slots One slot is available for adding memory to the printer DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules Connectivity Optional enhanced in
228. d V to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean or replace the separation pad Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid Replace the tray 1 pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Press to resume printing see the note below Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages Note A loss of data will occur Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur Printer error troubleshooting 305 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton 0 Message 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW For help press alternates with 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press 22 SERIAL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press 40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION To continue press C 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION To continue press V 41 3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press 306 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state The printer serial buffer has overflowed during a busy state A serial data error p
229. d meets the specifications for this printer The paper is excessively rough Use a smoother xerographic paper Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies can show any of the image quality problems that appear on any other type of media as well as defects that are specific to printing on transparencies In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the media handling components Note Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them In the printer driver Paper tab select Transparency as the media type Also make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer See Print media specifications For more information see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Handle transparencies by the edges Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages can be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin Try printing the job in smaller batches The printed colors are unacceptable Select different colors in the software program or printer driver If you are using a reflective overhead projector use a standard overhead projector instead Print quality problems that are associated with the environment Print quality problems can occur if the printe
230. d paper contain no more than 5 ground wood Weight equivalence table The weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade Note Text and book grades marked with an asterisk actually calculate to 51 61 71 and 81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50 60 70 and 80 Table 1 6 Weight equivalence table Bond weight Text Book Cover Bristol Index weight Tag weight Metric 17 x 22 in Weight E Ge weight 25 5 x 30 5 24 x 36 in weight 25 x 38 in i 22 5x28 5 in EE E EE ee ce ET HEJ B jJ e ee EN CENE NEL NEN MEN INNEN UNE pomme KE m E ucc sl i p C C C OT m m p I m po m m gg s em 24 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Table 1 6 Weight equivalence table continued B je T f D I I9 m fee e Jk pm m pem e pm Je Ie fee fe Jee fee Jk fe fe fe Jee Se Jk Je Je Je Jee e fe fe Je fe Je Per Sek Je Ia Je Per m fm fe Je Je Je Peer m fe fe Ja fe fe frem ENWW Print media 25 Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas 03 Power consumption Power usage drops s
231. d the user selects to reset the transfer count FUSER KIT COUNT Range 0 to 9999999 Use this item to reset the page 150 000 is the maximum count of the current fuser if the value is lost This item number of pages the fuser can i int automatically resets to Zero print when the fuser is replaced and the user selects the to reset the fuser count SERIAL NUMBER A 10 digit number that varies Use this item to update the by printer serial number if you replace the formatter SERVICE ID If you replace the formatter use this item to set the date to the date that the printer was first used rather than the date that the new formatter was installed COLD RESET PAPER LETTER If the customer uses default vi paper size of A4 used in Europe use this item to reset the default if you replace the formatter ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 369 Tools for troubleshooting Embedded Web server When the printer is directly connected to a computer the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 95 and later In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct connection you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver Select the option to load Printer Status and Alerts The proxy server is installed as part of the Printer Status and Alerts software When the printer is connected to the network the embedded Web server is automatically available You can gain access to the embedded Web server fro
232. dard size information IN TRAY xx and the switch in the tray is set For help press to custom Press A and Y to step through the instructions alternates with DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY Xx Recommend move switch to STANDARD ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 247 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press EIO DISK x NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press FLASH DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press 248 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A device failure has occurred on the specified drive The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it The EIO disk in slot x is not working correctly A device failure has occurred on the specified drive eem Acton 1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the
233. delet deed ento iate eet ud 420 DG controller P OA Rete tt eu E aer 422 lenire M M 424 General circuit diagtatm iiti tno ctt e tar Mete stage S Tena ie Dag PAR ES 428 ENWW ENWW 8 Parts and diagrams lage A 434 Ordering parts and supplies 22 0 2 cece eee eeeeeceeeeeece eee ee eee ee ee cecaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeess 435 Parts that wear oczc cnr EEcNegege Eugen Nee EE deele ete 435 WI fM ETT 435 Cilstomer Support Em 435 Supplies and accessories eret teet ea d np en spec de denna dd dead 435 Common fasteners ssssssssssssssssseeeeeereere tenen nnn nenemrenen enn n enne rner trennt nnn 440 Illustrations and parts EE 442 External covers and panels sssssssssssssssssssssenene eene eren nennen nnne 446 rie lu e EE 448 500 sheet paper feeder rrrrrnnnnnnnanvnvrvrorrrorrrorerrrrrernrernresenononosrsonosononosnsonanananananananann ananasen 474 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssssseesseeeenee nennen nennen nennen 478 Alphabetical parts list eene nennen nennen nnns 490 Hie IR E ln CHE 498 Index ix ENWW ENWW List of tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4
234. der Installed personalities and options on the configuration page see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide If the host system and printer are still not communicating replace the formatter PCA and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer If the problem persists a protocol analyzer might be needed in order to find the source of the problem HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box products that do not offer the correct surge protection These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCA This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett Packard Company warranty AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations Parallel MS DOS commands Ensure that the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications 356 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Note ENWW MODE LPT1 P For MS DOS version 4 0 and above MODE LPT1 B This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1 If you are using LPT2 or LPT3 replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port Printer Job Language PJL commands See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PJL commands This manual is available with the HP PCL PJL reference set on CD ROM part number 5021 0337 PJL Enter This command enables the specified printer language If the printer does not rece
235. disk drive To clear the message turn the printer off and then on If the message persists remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive If the message persists replace the EIO disk drive Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and then try again To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on To enable writing to the disk turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and replace it with a new EIO disk drive 1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the flash DIMM To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on If the message persists remove and reinstall the flash DIMM If the message persists replace the flash DIMM ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm Acton Message FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press C INCORRECT COLOR CARTRIDGE alte
236. e Feed the connector cables through the frame and reconnect the connectors to the DC controller To remove the laser scanner assemblies 1 Remove the laser scanner retaining bars See Remove the laser scanner retaining bars 2 Slide the cyan laser scanner unit to the left and then pull it out of the printer 3 For the yellow magenta and black laser scanner units first unhook each assembly from the white strap callout 1 Then pull the laser scanner units out of the printer 206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW CAUTION When reinstalling the laser scanner units always reconnect them to the strap callout 1 Failure to do so could cause the laser scanners to become distorted and the laser beam could become skewed resulting in image defects CAUTION The laser scanner unit is not adjustable in the field Do not disassemble it Figure 6 58 Remove the laser scanner assemblies Internal components right side The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the right side of the printer ENWW Internal components 207 High voltage power supply PCA WARNING The high voltage power supply PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Right cover See Right cover Remove three screws callout 1 Pinch the four retainer clips
237. e default value is ANY TRAY 1 TYPE A list of available types appears Use this item to configure the media type for tray 1 The default value is ANY TRAY lt N gt SIZE A list of available sizes appears Use this item to configure the media size for tray 2 tray 3 or N 2 3 or 4 Note A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500 sheet feeder is used with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models TRAY lt N gt TYPE N 2 2 3 or 4 Note A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500 sheet feeder is used with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A list of available types appears tray 4 The default setting is the size that is detected by the guides in the tray To use a custom size move the switch in the tray to custom Use this item to configure the media type for tray 2 tray 3 or tray 4 The default is PLAIN ENWW ENWW Configure device menu The Configure device menu has several submenus Use these submenus to change the printer s default printing settings adjust the print quality change the system configuration and I O options and reset the printer to its default settings Printing menu The settings in the Printing menu affect only jobs that do not have identified properties Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values from this menu Table 7 42 Printing submenu COPIES 1 to 32000 Use this item to set the default number
238. e replacement interval To install or order Installing the print cartridges For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Installing the print cartridges For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Installing the print cartridges For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Installing the print cartridges For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Supplies 163 CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Table 6 2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items continued Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate To install or replacement order interval Image transfer kit REPLACE 120 000 pages 40 months Replacing the ETB TRANSFER KIT transfer unit For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Image fuser kit REPLACE 150 000 pages 50 months Replacing the FUSER KIT fuser For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Approximate life expectancies based on 3 000 pages per month The approximate average A4 Letter size page count is based on 5 coverage of individual colors Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary 3Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary The Hewlett Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause p
239. e 6 87 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor 1 of 2 Figure 6 88 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed sensor 2 of 2 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper sensor 1 SY ON Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover Disconnect two springs callout 1 and then remove two e rings callout 2 Disconnect five connectors callout 3 and then remove four screws callout 4 Remove the sheet metal cover callout 5 For the upper cassette paper sensor disconnect one connector callout 6 and then remove the upper cassette paper sensor callout 7 For the lower cassette paper sensor disconnect one connector callout 8 and then remove the lower cassette paper sensor callout 9 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper sensor 2 of 3 Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 233 Figure 6 91 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper sensor 3 of 3 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper detection switch 1 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover 2 Forthe upper cassette detection switch disconnect one connector callout 1 release the switch retaining tabs callout 2 and then remove the upper cassette paper switch callout 3 3 For the lo
240. e DIMM Q2630A Q2630 67951 4650 Only 128 MB memory DDR Q2631A Q2631 67951 4650 Only 256 MB memory DDR Q2635A Q2635 67904 4650 Only Firmware Compact flash Control panel overlays 4600 Only and labels 4650 Only C9660 40002 English overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67901 English label 4650 Only C9660 40003 French overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67902 French label 4650 Only C9660 40004 German overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67903 German label 4650 Only C9660 40005 Italian overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67904 Italian label 4650 Only C9660 40007 Danish overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67906 Danish label 4650 Only C9660 40008 Dutch overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67907 Dutch label 4650 Only C9660 40009 Finnish overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67908 Finnish label 4650 Only C9660 40010 Norwegian overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67909 Norwegian label 4650 Only C9660 40006 Spanish overlay 4600 Only Q3668 67905 Spanish label 4650 Only Ordering parts and supplies 437 Table 8 2 Supplies and accessories continued Product number Reference materials 438 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams C9660 4001 1 Q3668 67910 C9660 40012 Q3668 67911 C9660 40013 Q3668 67912 C9660 40014 Q3668 67913 C9660 40015 Q3668 67914 C9660 40016 Q3668 679015 C9660 40017 Q3668 67916 C9660 40018 Q3668 67917 C9660 40019 Q3668 67918 C9660 40020 Q3668 67919 C9660 40021 Q3668 67920 C9660 40022 Q3668 67921 C9660 40023 Q3668 67922 C9660 40024 Q3668 67923 C9660 40025 Q
241. e density Figure 5 20 Primary exposure illustrates this step ll yo charging CS Primary roller Photosensitive drum Primary exposure LED Image formation system 131 Step 2 Primary charging To prepare for latent image formation a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surface The primary charging roller is made of a conductive rubber A dc bias is applied to the primary charging roller to maintain uniform potential on the drum surface Figure 5 21 Primary charging illustrates this step Primary charging rc di roller Photosensitive A drum DC bias TIT TIT Figure 5 21 Primary charging Step 3 Laser beam exposure As the laser beam scans the drum surface it neutralizes the negative charge to form the the electrostatic latent image The remaining areas where the laser beam has not struck retain a negative charge Figure 5 22 Laser beam exposure illustrates this step gt Laser beam gt Unexposed area Figure 5 22 Laser beam exposure 132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 23 ENWW Development block The second part of the image formation process is the development block where toner is transferred onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum to create a visible image This printer uses a contact development method that keeps the de
242. e drum and the developing cylinder should not be in contact with the drum The bottom half of the print cartridge can pivot up and down causing the developing cylinder to either come in contact with or move away from the photosensitive drum A small block inside the printer causes each cartridge to pivot When the block is pushed up the rear of the cartridge is pushed up and the front of the cartridge swings down The developing cylinder disengages from the drum Figure 5 18 Developing cylinder disengaging illustrates this process Axis Photosensitive Cartridge dram N Developing cylinder t Developing disengaging block UP Developing cylinder engaged Developing cylinder disengaged Figure 5 18 Developing cylinder disengaging The developing cylinders are disengaged only during monochrome printing or during ETB cleaning During monochrome printing the developing cylinder in all cartridges except the black cartridge is disengaged During ETB cleaning the developing cylinders in all cartridges are disengaged ENWW Image formation system 129 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit The ETB unit feeds the media through the printer and helps transfer toner onto the media Figure 5 19 ETB unit illustrates the ETB unit Transfer charging roller DC controller PCB gt ETB belt ETB feed roller Attaching roller Figure 5 19 ETB unit The following are t
243. e error persists replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 290 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm 0 em Message 50 X FUSER ERROR For help press A fuser error has occurred X Description 1 low fuser temperature 2 fuser warmup service 3 high fuser temperature 4 faulty fuser 5 inconsistent fuser 6 open fuser Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down Reinstall the fuser and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer Replace the connector if it is damaged Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser If resistance does not meet the following guidelines replace the fuser e J4034 5 to J4034 6 300 500 KOhms J4034 1 to J4034 2 less than 1 KOhm Check for continuity between connector pins J4034 4 and J4034 2 If no continuity exists replace the fuser Replace the fuser power supply PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Printer error troubleshooting 291 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message 51 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with
244. e instructions Determine whether the ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective Replace the ETB if they are Check the duplex feed guide which is part of the control panel crossmember assembly If the guide is worn or damaged replace the crossmember assembly Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press A and Y to step through the instructions Check the registration shutter and make sure that it is in place Replace the paper pickup assembly if the shutter is damaged Check the paper pickup feed rollers and replace them if they are worn or damaged Check the connectors gears solenoids motors and PCA on the paper pickup assembly Replace the paper pickup assembly if necessary ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued 13 XX YY JAM IN There is a jam in the media path 1 Press for detailed PAPER PATH information about clearing the jam For help press Press A and Y to step through the instructions If paper is folding into an accordion shape check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place If the attaching roller gears are defective replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing
245. e network sssseseeem emm 71 Configuring Novell Net Ware frame type parameters sssssee 71 Software for networks aee e m ER Eua E eR RE E ER teaser ENEE SE 72 HP Web Jetadmin E 73 NIX EE EE EE ENE RE 73 DI era druene 73 Embedded Web ENEE 74 FAUST 74 HP Toolbox HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only arrrnnrrnnnnnonnnrrrnnnennnrrrnnnnennrrrrnnerenenn 74 Other components and utilities esses lO Setting network security on the printer ssssssssseeeenenm emm eem enn 76 39 Locking the control panel nahe IE ap ette 76 40 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Unpacking the printer Note Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date WARNING The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer weighs approximately 36 kg 80 Ib HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer 1 Do not cut the straps Open the top flaps of the packing box Detach the straps from the top flaps and lay them on the floor AS SE ENWW Unpacking the printer 41 2 Lift the box frame up and off of the printer 3 Ifthe printer has an optional 500 sheet paper feeder it is packaged on top of the printer Lift the 500 sheet paper feeder from the package and place it in the prepared location 42 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 4 Remove the shipping blocks accessory packs and inn
246. e network e Assign an IP to the printer e Download files and fonts e Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X but the utility is supported for the Classic environment To install printer drivers from Mac OS 9 1 x and later 1 Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The CD ROM menu runs automatically If the CD ROM menu does not run automatically double click the CD ROM icon on the desktop and then double click the Installer icon This icon is located in the Installer language folder of the Starter CD ROM where language is your language preference For example the Installer English folder contains the Installer icon for the English printer software Follow the instructions on the computer screen gt A Open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility located in the Startup Disk Applications Utilities folder Double click Printer AppleTalk 5 6 Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection click Change 7 Select the printer click Auto Setup and then click Create 8 On the Printing menu click Set Default Printer The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic All the print panels appear in the Print dialog box in a program Installing the printing system software 67 Note Note 68 To install printer drivers from Mac OS 10 X 1 Connect the
247. e neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements for text graphics and photographs To gain access the Manual color options on the Color tab select Manual and then select Settings Manual color options Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color or Color Map and Halftone options individually for text graphics and photographs Some programs convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases the Photographs settings also controls text and graphics Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photographs independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority e The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority 340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW CAUTION ENWW Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text graphics and photographs Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting e Black Only generates neutral colors grays a
248. e orange shipping lock 86 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 6 Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out Discard the tape 7 Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated 8 Installation is complete Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions Replacing the transfer unit Replace the transfer unit when a REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message appears on the control panel display Note If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life for example if it is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel See Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life 1 Turn the printer off 2 Use the side handles to open the top cover ENWW Replacing supply items 87 3 Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit 4 Locate the blue release buttons on each side of the transfer unit near the bottom of the transfer unit 5 Grasp the transfer unit with two hands Simultaneously press both of the blue buttons and slide the transfer unit out of the printer 6 Remove t
249. e printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM Note The transfer kit page count is not reset by replacing the formatter ENWW Replacement parts configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 319 After installing the replacement formatter perform a full calibration procedure three times See Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models DC Controller new or previously installed in another printer After replacing the DC controller turn the printer power on When the READY message appears on the control panel display you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information for example the duplexing option page counts and serial number can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM After installing the replacement DC controller perform a quick calibration procedure three times See Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 320 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Paper path troubleshooting Use the information in this section to troubleshoot errors in the printer paper path Jams Jam error messages occur if media fails to arrive at or clear the paper path sensors in the allowed time Dedicated paper sensors detect whether media is present in the sensor and whether media is feeding normally When the DC controller detects a jam it immediately stops the printing process and the appropriate ja
250. e toner transfer plate Drum motor Em u Waste toner container Primary charging roller motor a l x Memory Z tag I H I Developing I home position Toner container sensor N Stirrers Photosensitive PS5 drum La Toner charging roller Toner level Toner level Developing disengaging detection detection Developing cylinder block sensor sensor light emitter light receiver Figure 5 15 Print cartridge The following are the physical components inside the print cartridge e Photosensitive drum e Primary charging roller e Developing cylinder e Toner charging roller e Stirrers e Waste toner transfer plate The photosensitive drum rotation drives the primary charging roller All other components are driven by the drum motor The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block which causes the developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge It stores this information on a memory tag that is built into each cartridge 126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 16 ENWW Memory tag The memory tag is an EEP ROM that is built into the print cartridge It stores information about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life Figure 5 16 Memory tag illustrates how the memory tag operates DC controller PCB u Memory controll
251. ect one connector callout 2 Remove the output bin full sensor callout 3 Remove the output bin full sensor Internal components 219 Cartridge fan Note The cartridge fan is the vertical fan that is closest to the front of the printer 1 Q 9r g Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield Disconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCA Remove the cables from the guides callout 1 Remove the two screws callout 2 Remove the fan holder and fan from the printer callout 3 Remove the fan from the fan holder Figure 6 71 Remove the cartridge fan Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the cartridge fan be sure that the arrow on the fan holder and the arrow on the fan are pointing in the same direction 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Formatter fan Note The formatter fan is the horizontal fan that is closest to the rear of the printer 1 Remove the following assemblies oP ON Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield Cartridge fan and holder See Cartridge fan Disconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller Remove two screws callout 1 Remove the fan holder and
252. ed for color tone calibration D Max and D Half and takes about 68 seconds 1 Press MENU to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE 3 Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 4 Press V to highlight PRINT QUALITY 5 Press to select PRINT QUALITY 6 Press V to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW 7 Press 2 to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW Wait for the printer to calibrate Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller the ETB the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner Full Calibrate Now includes the Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration Full Calibrate lasts for about 3 minutes and 15 seconds 1 Press MENU to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE 3 Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 4 Press V to highlight PRINT QUALITY 5 Press to select PRINT QUALITY 6 Press V to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW 7 Press to select FULL CALIBRATE NOW Wait for the printer to calibrate Engine resets 405 Service menu The following sections describe the Service menu Using the Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu When you select SERVICE from the list of menus you are prompted to enter your 8 digit PIN number The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet
253. ee Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 286 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in tray 2 Press for detailed TRAY 2 information about clearing the jam For help press pp Press and V to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean the feed roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Replace the tray 2 pickup solenoid Replace the tray 2 pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in tray 3 Press for detailed TRAY 3 information about clearing the jam For help press Press A and Y to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean the feed roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Replace the tray 3 pickup solenoid Replace the tray 3 pickup motor Replace the tray 3 paper feeder PCA Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 287 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued
254. ee Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Right cover See Right cover High voltage power supply PCA See High voltage power supply PCA Toner level detection PCA See Toner level detection PCA Remove one screw callout 1 Remove wires from the guides callout 2 Remove the high voltage contact block callout 3 Repeat for each of the four high voltage contact blocks Remove the high voltage contact blocks cyan is shown Internal components 211 Door switch 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Right cover See Right cover 2 Remove one screw callout 1 Disconnect two connectors callout 2 4 Remove the door switch Figure 6 63 Remove the door switch Internal components top The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the top of the printer 212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW WARNING Figure 6 64 ENWW Fuser power supply PCA The fuser power supply PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover Disconnect the J203 connector callout 1 Remove the cable callout 2 from the fuser power supply cover Remove one screw callout 3 and then remove t
255. eed error size no VSYNC error 5 media feed error type 6 ETB detection error 7 feed delay error 9 noise VSREQ emm Acton 0 If the incorrect type was selected cancel the job or press for more information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Press to continue or press for more information If the message persists turn the printer off and then on Printer error troubleshooting 307 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 49 XXXX A critical firmware error has Press Cancel Job to clear PRINTER ERROR occurred that caused the the print job from the processor on the formatter to printer memory To continue abort operation This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid operations In some Try printing a job from a cases electrical noise in the different software program cable can corrupt data during If the job prints go back to transmission to the printer the first program and try Other causes include poor printing a different file If quality parallel cables poor the message appears only connections or home grown with a certain software programs On rare occasions program or print job the formatter is at fault which contact the software is usually indicated by a 79 vendor for assistance Service Error Turn the printer off and turn off then on then on If the message persists with different sof
256. el communication EIO x The following are the possible Use this item to configure the Where x 1 2 or 3 values EIO devices installed in slot 1 NOVELL Ke DCL LLC IPX SPX TCP IP APPLETALK Resets menu Use the Resets menu to reset factory settings disable and enable PowerSave and update the printer after new supplies are installed Table 7 46 Resets menu ees ues emm RESTORE FACTORY None Use this item to clear the page SETTINGS buffer remove all perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults POWERSAVE Use this item to enable and disable PowerSave RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or NEW FUSER KIT new fuser kit has been installed Diagnostics menu Use the Diagnostics menu to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer Control panel troubleshooting 367 Table 7 47 Diagnostics menu mem pmi PRINT EVENT LOG SHOW EVENT LOG PQ TROUBLESHOOTING DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK Paper Path SENSOR TEST HP Color LaserJet 4650 models PAPER PATH TEST SENSOR TEST Prints an event log that shows the last 50 entries in the printer event log starting with the most recent Shows the last 50 events on the control panel display starting with the most recent Prints a series of print quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot any print quality
257. ell servers It supports only direct mode network installations between Windows computers and a printer To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server use an HP utility such as HP Web Jetadmin or HP Install Network Printer Wizard or a Novell utility such as NWadmin To install the printing system software 1 If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP make sure that you have administrator privileges 2 Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by printing a configuration page On the second page locate the printer IP address You might need this address to complete network installation 3 Close all software programs that are open or running 4 Insert the printer CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If the welcome screen does not open start it by using the following procedure e Onthe Start menu click Run e Type the following x setup where x is the letter of the CD ROM drive e Click OK When prompted click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when the installation has been completed You might need to restart the computer e Oro Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that
258. embly 4600 Only RG5 6512 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only RG5 7452 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only RG5 7452 000CN Table 8 14 on page 465 Fuser power supply PCA 110 V RG5 6399 030CN Table 8 4 on page 445 Fuser power supply PCA 110 V RG5 6399 030CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Fuser power supply PCA 220 V RG5 6400 030CN Table 8 4 on page 445 Fuser power supply PCA 220 V RG5 6400 030CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Gear 29T RS7 0136 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 457 LED PCA assembly RG5 6394 000CN Table 8 12 on page 461 Low voltage power supply assembly 110 V RG5 6410 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Low voltage power supply assembly 220 V RG5 6411 020CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Memory controller PCA RG5 6396 000CN Table 8 4 on page 445 Memory tag antenna PCA RG5 5469 000CN Table 8 4 on page 445 Memory tag antenna PCA assembly RG5 5469 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 494 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued Microswitch front cover WC4 5169 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 Motor M6 ETB DC brushless 24 V RH7 1605 000CN Table 8 17 on page 471 Motor M7 developing disengaging stepping RH7 1494 000CN Table 8 13 on page 463 Motor M8 fuser DS brushless 24 V 4600 Only RH5 1495 000CN Table 8 14 on page 465 Motor M8 fuser DS brushless 24 V 4650 Only RH7 1605 000CN Table 8 14 on page 465 Multi purpose tray assembly tray 1 RG5 6467 0
259. emm Acton 0 Message 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY For help press alternates with 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To continue press 22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW For help press alternates with 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION To continue press 288 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory The printer ElO card in slot X has overflowed its I O buffer during a busy state The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state A connection with the card in EIO slot X has been broken abnormally 1 Press 2 to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur 2 Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur 1 Press to resume printing Note A loss of data will occur 2 Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly If possible print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm 0 em 0 Message 41 3 UNEXPECTED
260. emory controller PCA DC controller PCA Formatter PCA Firmware DIMM PCA HP CLJ 4600 Compact FLASH HP CLJ 4650 A OO JO Oo E ob A CH 420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW e k Figure 7 45 PCA 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder PCA ENWW Diagrams 421 DC controller PCA J1020 sch J1012 J1030 J1033 s 403 ef J1026 LJ 8 J1003 J1004 J1027 31034 J1002 SW1001 C LED1001 J1015 e S J1023 E S E Ge e eo N Q e o e J1024 E e J1020 a p 1016 dech eo o e J1006 J1019 LT 1 J1001 J1013 U l J f 1 J1017 J1007 J1014 J1018 LEOLP Zerr Figure 7 46 422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Location of DC controller PCA components HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW Figure 7 47 ENWW 1 3 J1030 J1020 102 7 Don 31004 1037 J SW1001 J1006 m J1034 J1019 P J1007 J1014 Location of DC controller
261. en removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Remove the formatter case See Formatter case Figure 6 51 Disconnect the laser scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable 5 At the rear of the printer place the cardboard spacer included with the laser scanner assembly underneath the V mark on the bottom of the printer frame callout 3 CAUTION Always place the spacer under the printer frame This spacer supports the printer and keeps it from flexing when the plate that covers the laser scanner units is removed If the printer frame flexes the laser beams can become skewed resulting in print quality problems 6 Remove four screws callout 4 7 Using needle nose pliers pull down on the right side of the wire clip then release the left side of the clip from the bracket Repeat this step for each of the four clips 8 Remove the plate that covers the laser scanner units Figure 6 52 Remove the laser scanner cover plate 1 of 2 ENWW Internal components 203 ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO VARNING 1 ADVARSEL Figure 6 53 Remove the laser scanner cover plate 2 of 2 Hint When reinserting the four wire clips insert the left end of the clip first thread the clip under the center notch and then insert the
262. ends a sleep command the printer enters PowerSave mode After the power is turned on the cartridge is cleaned every 35 pages and the ETB is cleaned every 100 pages The last rotations period lasts until the instant the formatter sends a print command Then the initial rotations period starts again Basic operation 109 Engine control system Figure 5 2 Note 110 Chapter 5 Theory of operation The engine control system is the brain of the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer It controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter The engine control system consists of the following e DC controller PCA e Fuser power supply PCA e High voltage PCA e Low voltage power supply unit e Formatter Each of these components is described in this chapter E ee ee dee Set r ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DC controller PCA Fuser power supply Formatter PCA High voltage PCA Low voltage power supply unit E LASER SCANNER SYSTEM IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM gt PICK UP FEED SYSTEM Engine control system In this manual the abbreviation PCA stands for printed circuit board assembly Components described as a PCA can consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts such as cables and sensors DC controller circuit The DC controller controls the print operation sequence for the printer The seq
263. ents 469 com gt VER A N s Z ETB assembly Figure 8 15 ENWW 470 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 17 ETB assembly ETB assembly 4600 Only RG5 6484 040CN ETB assembly 4650 Only RG5 7455 000CN Motor M6 ETB DC brushless 24 V RH7 1605 000CN Roller oblique RB1 2155 000CN Photo interrupter TLP 1241 WG8 5362 000CN ENWW Internal components 471 Exploded view 2 Exploded view 1 Fuser assembly Figure 8 16 ENWW 472 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 18 Fuser assembly 1 Fuser assembly 110 V RG5 6439 110CN 4600 1 Only 1 Fuser assembly 110 V RG5 7450 000CN 4650 1 Only Fuser assembly 220 V RG5 6517 110CN 4600 Only Fuser assembly 220 V RG5 7451 000CN 4650 Only Sensor flag RB2 8498 030CN EN Fuser cover right RF5 3775 030CN ENWW Internal components 473 500 sheet paper feeder 500 sheet paper feeder assembly Figure 8 17 ENWW 474 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 19 500 sheet paper feeder assembly 500 sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly Q3673 67901 Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder RG1 4140 040CN ENWW 500 sheet paper feeder 475 Figure 8 18 500 sheet paper feeder internal components 476 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 20 500 sheet paper feeder internal components Paper feeder PCA assembly 4600 Only RG1 4139 000CN Paper feeder PCA assembly 4650 Only RG1 7542 000CN Roller paper pickup RF5 3739
264. epetitive defects troubleshooting Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page Use the repetitive defects ruler on the next page Figure 7 3 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page Use the Table 7 38 Repetitive defect spacing table to determine which roller is causing the defect To resolve the problem try cleaning the roller first If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged replace the indicated part Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers Instead rub the roller with lint free paper If dirt is difficult to remove rub the roller with lint free paper that has been dampened with rubbing alcohol The letter codes before certain roller names in Table 7 38 Repetitive defect spacing correspond to the letters at the top of the repetitive defects ruler in Figure 7 3 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 Not all rollers are shown in the ruler Defects on the cassette or the multipurpose tray pickup roller cause defects only on the leading edge of the image Table 7 38 Repetitive defect spacing B Developing cylinder B Developing cylinder cylinder 33mm 33mm Defect on front of paper on front of Defect on front of paper Print cartridge Print cartridge C Primary charging Blank spots Print cartridge roller D Toner feed roller Toner feed roller aen aen
265. er If yes go to step 5 If no check the following items Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control panel display to view informatiom about a current printer error See View the event log on the control panel display in this chapter Correct the error After correcting the error print a configuration page and verify the printer configuration information See Print the printer configuration page in this chapter Go to step 5 5 Does the image quality meet the user s requirements If yes go to step 6 If no check the following items Print the print quality troubleshooting pages See Print quality troubleshooting pages in this chapter Solve the print quality problems and then go to step 6 6 Can you successfully print from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network If yes then this procedure is completed If no print a job from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network Perform the appropriate corrective actions Troubleshooting process 243 Troubleshooting power on When you turn on the printer if it does not make any sound or if the control panel display is blank check the following items 1 OG De EG xen Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet that is of the correct voltage Verify that the on off switch is in the ON position
266. er Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary In most situations use a cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu Before initializing NVRAM print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information e Total page count and color page count e Transfer kit count e Fuser kit count e Serial number To initialize NVRAM 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display shows the memory count press and hold V until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 Press 4 Press Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control panel display Engine resets 403 5 Press until NVRAM INIT is highlighted 6 Press The printer initializes NVRAM and then continues its power on sequence Hard disk initialization A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the printer s hard disk Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code appears on the control panel indicating an EIO disk error Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it To initialize the hard disk 1 Turn the printer on 2 As the printer performs its power on sequence press and hold the Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 Pr
267. er See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Dark image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark images Table 7 21 Causes for dark images C mm 0000000 The image density is not adjusted correctly Decrease the density for each color The color registration detection unit is dirty Clean the lens on the color registration detection unit The color registration detection unit is defective Replace the color registration detection unit The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Dark color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark color Table 7 22 Causes for dark colors A poor contact exists in the drum ground Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the primary charging bias and developing bias affected color If they are still dirty after cleaning contacts of the high voltage PCA and the print or if they are damaged replace the cartridge cartridge The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
268. er The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Chapter 1 Product information ENWW CAUTION ENWW Paper type Paper weight Heavy 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib Extra heavy 120 to 163 g m 32 to 43 Ib Cardstock 163 to 199 g m 43 to 53 Ib Intermediate 90 to105 g m Tough paper 5 mil re e When printing on heavy paper types use the following guidelines e Use tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 to 199 g m 32 to 53 Ib bond e For optimum results when printing on heavy paper use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to HEAVY e In either the software program or the driver select HEAVY as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper e Because this setting affects all print jobs return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer Doing so can cause misfeeds paper jams reduced print quality and excessive mechanical wear HP LaserJet Tough paper When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper use the following guidelines e Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper by the edges Oils from your fingers that are deposited on HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems e Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results e In either t
269. er PCB Antenna unit Memory tag X C Memory data Cartridge Memory tag The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the printer is turned on whenever the top cover is closed and whenever it receives a READ command from the formatter The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation and whenever it receives a WRITE command from the formatter If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row the DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality Toner level detection The printer monitors print cartridge life in several ways to ensure continued high print quality e The number of developer rotations measures the usefulness charge of the toner e The toner sensor monitors remaining toner and informs the user of toner low or out conditions e The number of photosensitive drum rotations measures the life of the photosensitive drum which degrades slightly with each rotation The cartridge life represented on the supplies status page and in the gauges on the control panel is a combination of all three of these components The lowest remaining percent is the number reported to the customer However information about which of these components is low or out is not reported During the life of a print cartridge the customer receives three different control panel messag
270. er cardboard frame that surrounds the printer CAUTION Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself At least two people must lift the printer and place it in the prepared location While two people can lift the printer using three or four people to lift the printer is a much easier and safer way to move the printer 5 Lift the printer from the packaging pallet and place it in the prepared location ENWW Unpacking the printer 43 6 If you are using an optional 500 sheet paper feeder or a 2 x 500 sheet feeder HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only align the printer with the guide pins on top of the paper feeder the optional 500 sheet paper feeder is shown in the following illustration Note While two people can lift the printer at least one other person should be available to help position the printer on an optional paper feeder if one is installed 44 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 8 Using the side handles open the top cover Firmly lift the two green handles one on each side of the fuser Lift the fuser cover completely and pull on either of the orange tabs to remove the orange fuser packing tape and plastic shipping locks Close the fuser cover CAUTION Make sure that you remove all of the packing materials to avoid damage to the printer when the power is turned on 9 Open the front cover and remove the packing tape from the transfer unit Close the front cover and the top cove
271. er cassette Figure 5 42 2 x 500 sheet feeder pickup and feed operation illustrates this sequence 1 The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver N The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor M1 in the paper feeder and the feed roller starts to rotate 2 x 500 sheet feeder 155 3 After the printer enters the SCANNER READY state the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of paper The paper feeder pickup solenoid SL1 for tray 3 SL2 for tray 4 turns on The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up paper in the cassette 156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 4 Separation pads eliminate any extra sheets and a single piece of paper enters the feed path lt q O A o E o O I 1 S3 TYNDIS NOLLO3 L3Q Y3dYd 0334 D Sd TYNDIS NOLLO313G H3dVd 3ILLISSVO H3ddf NTS TYNDIS JAYA GION3 OS dNMYDId SLLASSVO H3ddh T Sd TYNDIS NOILOSLAG H3dVd ALLASSVO H3MOT1 TIS TYNDIS 3AIHQ GION3 10S dNMOId 3LL3SSVO H3MOT TYNDIS TOHLNOO HOLON NIVIN TYNDIS NOILO3 L3G 3ZIS H3dVd ALLASSVO YAddN TYNDIS NOILO3 13G 3ZIS H3dVd 3 LLHSSVO HMC EM EM mm ONE mg ww mmm eee 2 x 500 sheet feeder pickup and feed operation Figure 5 42 157 2 x 500 sheet feeder ENWW Figure 5 43 Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection The printer can se
272. er diagnostic tests or to leave the special state press the Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button and then select Exit The printer will reset itself and then return to the normal state You need to have a good understanding of how the printer operates in order to use the engine diagnostics successfully Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests make sure that you understand the information in chapter 5 of this manual Diagnostic tests Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues For component or noise isolation you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers Removing the covers provides a better view of the areas that are being tested To operate the printer with the covers removed the door switch SW4 callout 1 lever must be depressed this is the door closed position and you must depress the ETB connector callout 2 after closing the ETB Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on ty Door switch and ETB connector Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change The ETB must be closed and its connector
273. er has accepted a No action is necessary request to print an internal page but the current job must finish printing before the internal page can print please wait Resend The firmware upgrade was not Attempt the upgrade again upgrade completed successfully Resetting kit count YES is selected in the Reset No action is necessary Supplies menu Counts for any of the supplies that cannot be detected as new will be reset Restoring factory settings The printer is restoring factory No action is necessary settings Restoring The printer is restoring the last No action is necessary saved state Rotating motor The printer is executing a Press Stop when ready to stop Component Test and Motor is this test Toexit press Stop button the component selected Rotating The printer is executing a Press Stop when ready to stop e Component Test and the Belt this test belt drive Only is the component selected To exit press Stop button Rotating color motor A component test is in progress Press Stop when ready to stop The component selected is the this test To exit press Stop button color Cartridge motor Rotating The printer is executing a Press Stop when ready to stop Component test and the Fuser this test Motor is the component To exit press Stop button selected Setting saved A menu selection has been No action is necessary saved fuser motor ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 277 Ta
274. es e OK The cartridge has between 15 and 100 life remaining e Order cartridge The cartridge has 15 life remaining In typical printing situations this represents about 2 weeks of use e Replace cartridge One of the three components listed above has reached its end of life The printer stops and printing cannot continue until the cartridge is replaced Developer rotations The developer roller rotations are tracked on the print cartridge memory tag e label Tracking rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the developer or toner is actually worn out which would result in print quality defects Image formation system 127 Over time the toner loses its required properties as a result of excessive stirring and recharging Although the cartridge will correctly signal LOW or OUT because of wear some toner might remain in the fresh toner hopper In addition to toner wear the developer roller wears during use so developer life tracking is necessary In situations where low coverage documents are printed frequently the developer rotations might cause a LOW signal before the toner level reaches its low level Toner sensor For the first 75 of the cartridge life toner depletion within the cartridge is calculated by counting pixels An optical toner level sensor then tracks the final 25 of toner The toner is measured and then reported on the toner gas gauge on the control panel or on the
275. es If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English follow this procedure 1 Opent the top cover Use a small flat blade screw driver to release the locking tabs on either side of the control panel overlay and then remove the overlay 2 Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button 174 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press C to select SYSTEM SETUP Press V to highlight LANGUAGE Press to select LANGUAGE o o NO aS 10 Press Y to highlight the desired language and then press to select and save the language choice Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed Labels are available for several languages If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English follow this procedure 1 Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label 2 Pos
276. ese items you must access the Print Quality menu and select CALIBRATE NOW to ensure good print quality after the repair When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Message Access denied menus locked BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE To continue press Clearing paper path 246 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting An attempt has been made to modify a menu item but the printer administrator has enabled the control panel security mechanism The message will disappear shortly and the printer will return to the Ready state The 500 sheet input tray is not making a sufficient connection with the printer The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages are printed The printer jammed or detected misplaced paper when turned on The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically Contact the printer administrator to change settings Verify that the printer is on a level surface Turn the printer off Reseat the printer on the 500 sheet input tray If the printer is on the optional printer stand make sure that the support straps
277. ess zi The message INITIALIZE DISK appears on the control panel display 4 Press The printer initializes the hard disk and continues its power on sequence Calibration bypass During certain diagnostic procedures you need to bypass the automatic calibration that is performed whenever the printer is turned on To bypass calibration 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display shows the memory count press and hold Y until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 Press 4 Press Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600printer or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control panel display 5 Press until SKIP CALIBRATION is highlighted 6 Press The printer skips calibration and then continues its power on sequence Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller the ETB the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner 1 Press to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE 3 Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE 4 Press V to highlight PRINT QUALITY 5 Press to select PRINT QUALITY 6 Press V to highlight CALIBRATE NOW 404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW 7 Press to select CALIBRATE NOW Wait for the printer to calibrate Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Quick Calibrate Now is us
278. ew overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sesseessse 174 Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 175 Internal components sssssssssssssssseseseneneneem eren nnne nns nien ne nerr tris EE nns n ener nn nnn nnns 177 DC controller shield eie este er ene eee ge RR EH INO RAE ee a aue aA EUR eve kae 177 Internal components front sse nennen nnns 177 Internal components left side ssssssssseene nennen nnne 184 Internal components rear sssssssesseeeeneeenen nennen nnne nennen nns 195 Internal components right aide 207 Internal components top rere rot roa rue rh beu dn due kadre 212 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder enne nnne 222 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate sssssssssssssseeee 222 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 00 2 2 ccc ceeceeceeeenecceececeeeeee cease eeaeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseuennnenaeens 223 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers rrrrrnrrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnneennrrnnnnnnnnen 224 500 sheet paper feeder PC 225 Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder nennen 226 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder front Cover sssssssrssrrrnrersstesttttntnntttettrtrnnntnnnteenentn nanne 226 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder rear cover ssssssssssssssseseseeeeeeenen 227 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover 228 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder right co
279. ex and one copy To specify other settings scroll down the menu and select the setting and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test e Source Select tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 if the single 500 sheet paper feeder or the 2 x 500 sheet feeder is installed or tray 4 if the 2 x 500 sheet feeder is installed 388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note Figure 7 20 ENWW e Duplex Enable or disable 2 sided printing e Copies Set the numbers of copies to be printed the choices are 1 10 50 100 or 500 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS Press to select DIAGNOSTICS Press V to highlight PAPER PATH TEST Press to select PAPER PATH TEST Select the paper path test options when the printer prompts you om ARON Sensor Test special mode test Use this diagnostic test to test the printer sensors and switches Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display See Table 7 50 Sensor test letter codes for a definition of the sensor letter codes A 1 below the letter indicates that paper is present For the paper size sensor the range of values is from 0 to 7 Figure 7 20 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement indicates the switch state and paper size that are associated with each of these values the tray 3 or tray 4 paper size switches for the single 500 sheet feeder and the 2 x 500
280. fan from the fan printer Remove the fan from the fan holder Figure 6 72 Remove the formatter fan Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the formatter fan be sure that the arrow on the fan holder and the arrow on the fan are pointing in the same direction ENWW Internal components 221 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 500 sheet paper feeder 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate 1 Remove two screws callout 1 and then remove the front cover from the 500 sheet paper feeder 2 Remove the six screws callout 2 and then remove the top plate Note The internal components of the 500 sheet paper feeder are mounted on the underside of the top plate Figure 6 73 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder top plate 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 1 Remove the top plate from the 500 sheet paper feeder see 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate and turn it upside down 2 Remove the spring and the E ring callout 1 Unhook the tab in the center of the gear callout 2 and remove the gear 4 Disconnect three connectors callout 3 two of the connectors are on the paper feeder PCA 5 Remove two screws callout 4 and then slide the drive unit out Figure 6 74 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 1 of 2 top view Figure 6 75 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 2 of
281. finishes printing the supplies status page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page PF eo ND Tools for troubleshooting 375 Note If you are using non HP supplies the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for the supplies The supplies status page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same supplies information as the page shown below mn ege Fuser Kit 100 Order HP Part 110 0M76A 220V QMT7A 2A qg co a S OG Figure 7 9 Supplies status page HP Color LaserJet 4650 model is shown Black print cartridge information Cyan print cartridge information Magenta print cartridge information Yellow print cartridge information Image transfer kit ETB information Image fuser kit information OO Om P GO A Print the usage page The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side the number that were printed on two sides duplexed and totals of the two printing methods for each media size It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT USAGE Press to select PRINT USAGE AN PSN 376 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW
282. for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu To change the media type press C2 Use and Y to highlight the type and then press 2 to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to CUSTOM adjust the guides against the media and close the tray Use A and Y to highlight the media size and then press 2 to select ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued eem Acton Message TRAY xx TYPE SIZE Size specified by user alternates with TRAY xx TYPE SIZE To change type press TYPE MISMATCH TRAY xx TYPE alternates with Ready To enter menus press C Unable to store job lt JOBNAME gt USE INSTEAD TRAY 2 lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt TRAY 3 lt TYPE gt The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx The tray switch is in the CUSTOM position This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type This results in a 41 5 Unexpected Type in Tray xx error The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared so the printer dete
283. fter printing the PCL font list page Tools for troubleshooting 379 Note The PCL font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same PCL font list page information as the page shown below hp color LaserJet 4650 printers Di Bold Figure 7 13 PCL font list page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown Print the PS font list page The PS font list page list the PS fonts emulated PostScript that are available on the printer 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT PS FONT LIST 5 Press to select PRINT PS FONT LIST The message PRINTING PS FONT LIST appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the PS fonts list page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PS font list page 380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 ENWW The PS font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same PS font list page information as the page shown below hp color LaserJet 4650 printers Di Albertus Extra Bold Albertus Medi Antique Olive Bold PS font list page Print the RGB samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The RGB samples page is used for RGB color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Press MENU to o
284. g one or more cartridges e Black Magenta Yellow Cyan laser scanners Use the following four tests to rotate each scanner motor individually e Fuser motor Use this test to rotate the fuser motor and drive gears ENWW Diagnostics 395 e Alienation motor also called the developing disengaging motor This test moves the developing disengaging rod clutches and plates through their three positions e Clean Home Middle position all cartridges disengaged used during cleaning cycle e Color Top position no cartridges disengaged used during color printing e Black Lowest position C M and Y cartridges disengaged black engaged used during black only printing e Tray1 tray 2 solenoids This test activates and releases the tray 1 and tray 2 solenoids The tray 1 solenoid is the lower solenoid The tray 2 solenoid is the upper solenoid You can remove the two securing screws and rotate the paper pickup unit to get a better view of the solenoids SL2 SL1 SC ee Figure 7 25 Location of solenoids Table 7 52 Solenoids SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly Multi purpose tray pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly 396 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 26 Solenoids on the paper pickup unit y e Figure 7 27 Solenoids 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Upper cassette pickup solenoid SL1 2 Lower cassette pickup solenoid SL2 ENWW Diagnostics 397 FAN 3 CL
285. ge The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is printed The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed No action is necessary Printer error troubleshooting 255 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued eem Acton Message Processing from tray XX Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press C RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press Ready Diagnostics mode To exit press Cancel Job button Receiving upgrade 256 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The printer is actively processing a job from the indicated tray Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete A device failure has occurred on the specified drive The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system The
286. ged replace the paper pickup assembly 334 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Image formation troubleshooting Note ENWW The image formation system is the central hub of the printer During image formation an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper The image formation system consists of the following physical components e Four laser scanners e Four print cartridges e ETB e Fuser Before beginning image formation troubleshooting check that the media meets the specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Print quality troubleshooting tools HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Go to www hp com cpso support new pq 4650 4650home html to identify and troubleshoot print quality issues for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printers as well as to show customers and service personnel how to troubleshoot print quality issues This Web site suggests solutions for eight print quality issues It includes a tool that uses standard images in order to ensure that the support agent and the customer have a common diagnostic method for isolating the issue You can also visit the Web site from www hp com by using the following procedure Open the HP CLJ 4650 print quality troubleshooting Web site 1 On the Main www hp com page click Support amp Drivers Type CLJ4650 in the open text field and then click the forward arrows Click the product name in the list that is provided RON Click print qua
287. ges HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Rotating lt color gt Laser A scanner test is in progress Press Cancel Job when you Scanner want to stop this test To exit press CANCEL JOB Rotating The printer is executing a Press Cancel Job when you Component test and the want to stop this test Transfer Motors component is To exit press selected CANCEL JOB transfer motors SIZE MISMATCH The tray is loaded with media Adjust the side and rear that is longer or shorter in the guides against the media feed direction than the size that For help press is configured for the tray TRAY xx lt SIZE gt If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray alternates with switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray Ready switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel For menus press C Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu TRAY xx CONTAINS The media type in the specified To change the media type UNKNOWN MEDIA tray cannot be determined press 2 Use A and W to highlight the type and then press to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to CUSTOM adjust the guides against the media and close the tray Use A and Y to highlight
288. ght CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUP Press V to highlight LANGUAGE Press to select LANGUAGE Oo 0 Ch Go dE 10 Press Y to highlight the desired language and then press to select and save the language choice Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed Labels are available for several languages If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English follow this procedure 1 Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label 2 Position the new label over the top of the control panel 3 Press the label firmly down onto the control panel Note When applying the label start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel 4 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUP Press V to highlight LANGUAGE 10 Press 9 to select LANGUAGE c v o m 11 Press Y to highlight the desired language and then press to select and save the language choice ENWW In
289. has been installed that is not made by HP This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or Stop is pressed Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels The identified print cartridge is near its end of life No action is necessary No action is necessary If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty To continue printing press Stop The first pending job will be cancelled If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline CAUTION Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty Order the identified print cartridge The estimated pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer Printing will continue until REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE appears Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Printer error troubleshooting 271 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton
290. he fifth DIMM slot 100 pin and vice versa Use these DIMM slots to upgrade the printer with the following accessories e More printer memory DIMMs are available in 64 128 and 256 MB e Flash memory DIMMs available in 4 MB unlike standard printer memory flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer even when the printer is off e DIMM based accessory fonts macros and patterns e Other DIMM based printer languages and printer options Single inline memory modules SIMMs that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer Before ordering additional memory print a configuration page to see how much memory is currently installed 1 Press to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION Installing memory and font DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4600 models You can install more memory for the printer and you can also install a font DIMM so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet Static electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer 1 Turn the printer off and disconnect all power and interface cables Locate the formatter board in the
291. he components of the ETB unit ETB belt ETB feed roller Attaching roller Transfer charging rollers four ETB driven rollers three 53 sg O Z D ue Gi 2 i m mO OG WE Z O O ETB SPEED DETECTION signal ETB driven roller The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller causing the belt to rotate All other rollers are driven by the belt rotation A sensor at the top of the ETB unit detects its speed The DC controller maintains a constant ETB feed speed to ensure good color registration 130 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 20 ENWW Electrostatic latent image formation block The image formation process begins in the electrostatic image formation block see Figure 5 14 Image formation process where the electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum This block consists of three steps e Primary exposure e Primary charging e Laser beam exposure After the last step is complete areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed to the laser beam retain a negative charge The areas that have been exposed to the laser are neutralized This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the eye Step 1 Primary exposure To prepare for primary charging light from the primary exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface in order to avoid inconsistent charg
292. he fuser power supply cover callout 4 Remove two screws callout 5 and then use needle nose pliers remove four clips callout 6 Disconnect four connectors callout 7 and then remove the fuser power supply PCA Remove the fuser power supply PCA 1 of 2 Internal components 213 Figure 6 65 Remove the fuser power supply PCA 2 of 2 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the fuser power supply PCA connect the J203 connector last 214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 66 ENWW Fuser drive unit 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover e Control panel See Control panel From the left side of the printer at the top and front of the printer frame unhook the white tab that holds the hinge cover in place and remove the hinge cover This tab is located above and to the right of the black drum drive unit On the DC controller disconnect the three connectors J1002 J1030 and J1034 Remove three screws callout 1 in Figure 6 66 Remove the fuser drive unit 1 of 2 and Figure 6 67 Remove the fuser drive unit 2 of 2 Disconnect the connector callout 2 This connector is hidden in Figure 6 67 Remove the fuser drive unit 2 of 2 It is on the rear left side of the fuser drive unit Remove the fuser drive unit from the printer Remove the screw th
293. he inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out Discard the tape 5 Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge Insert the print cartridges starting with the bottom cartridge in the position shown C cyan Y yellow M magenta K black 6 Close the transfer unit and front cover Close the top cover After a short while the Ready message should appear on the control panel display ENWW Installing the print cartridges 49 Installing a new overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 50 Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed Overlays are available for several languages If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English follow this procedure 1 Open the top cover Use a small flat blade screw driver to release the locking tabs on either side of the control panel overlay and then remove the overlay 2 Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button 3 Press O HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highli
294. he media type press Use and VW to highlight the type and then press to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to CUSTOM adjust the guides against the media and close the tray Use and V to highlight the media size and then press 2 to select ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued eem Acton Message TRAY XX TYPE SIZE Size specified by user alternates with TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To change size or type press C TYPE MISMATCH TRAY XX TYPE For help press alternates with Ready Unable to mopy job lt JOBNAME gt Unable to store job lt JOBNAME gt USE TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To change press Y To use press L i The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the CUSTOM position This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type This results In a 41 5 Unexpected Type in Tray xx error The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold A mopy job cannot be mopied because of a memory disk or
295. he new transfer unit from the bag Place the used transfer unit in the bag for recycling See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 88 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 7 Hold the transfer unit on either side Guide the feet into the cups and slide the transfer unit into the printer 8 Close the transfer unit and front cover Close the top cover and turn the printer on After a short while a NEW TRANSFER KIT message appears on the control panel display 9 Press Y to highlight YES 10 Press to reset the transfer unit count 11 Wait for the printer to calibrate Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life for example if it is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel Use the following steps to calibrate the printer 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press 9 to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press to select PRINT QUALITY Press V to highlight CALIBRATE NOW HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or FULL CALIBRATE NOW HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 7 Press to select CALIBRATE NOW HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or FULL CALIBRATE NOW HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 8 Wait for the printer to calibrate Or 9n
296. he printing environment print media or printer components Common causes of color variation The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers programs and output devices e Halftone patterns that are produced on monitors and the types of patterns that are used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output e The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer and most good quality paper has a very high white level In addition phosphor used in color monitors and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color rendering capabilities Differences between output are common Blues generally match better than reds e The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color Fluorescent light lacks many colors that are present in incandescent light and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light When comparing color choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes Image formation troubleshooting 337 e Long term color variations occur as paper ages Use high qual
297. he software program or the driver select TOUGH PAPER as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper Preprinted forms and letterhead Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead e Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat resistant inks that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature of approximately 190 C 374 F heat for 0 1 second e Inks must be non flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Print media 23 e Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off of preprinted paper e When using the duplex printing setting load pre printed forms and letterhead into tray 2 and tray 3 with the front of the page facing down and the top edge of the page towards the back of the printer To load preprinted forms and letterhead into tray 1 load them with the front of the page facing up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide The Hewlett Packard Company recommends that recycle
298. he upper left corner 6 Disconnect the connector for each drum drive motor from the DC controller PCA 190 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 37 Note Figure 6 38 ENWW 7 Remove the drum drive motors Remove the drum drive motors cyan motor is shown Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive motors See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Memory tag antenna PCAs 1 2 3 4 5 Remove the drum drive units See Drum drive units Remove one screw callout 1 and remove the grounding plate callout 2 Remove the white retainer callout 3 Disconnect the connector callout 4 from the memory controller PCA Remove the memory tag antenna PCA which is inside the slot ar STEELS Remove the memory tag antenna PCA cyan is shown Internal components 191 Developing disengaging motor assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear cover See Rear cover Top cover See Top cover Rear top cover See Rear top cover Left cover See Left cover DC controller shield See DC controller shield Developing disengaging rod See Drum drive developing disengaging rod 2 Remove three screws callout 1 Disconnect two connectors callout 2 4 Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly Figure 6 39 Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly 192 Chapter 6 Removal
299. hem if they are still contacts between the ETB and the high voltage dirty or are damaged PCA The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Dirt on the front of the paper This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the front of the paper Table 7 27 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper One or more of the rollers are dirty See Repetitive defects troubleshooting for information about identifying the roller that might be dirty Clean the indicated roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the appropriate roller cartridge or assembly The pickup roller is dirty Clean the roller If is still dirty after cleaning replace the pickup roller assembly ENWW Image defects 347 Table 7 27 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper continued A poor contact exists in the attaching bias Clean the contacts Replace them if they are still contacts between the ETB and the high voltage dirty or are damaged PCA The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate No
300. ick Add in the lower left corner 7T Printa Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails see the installation notes or Readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for help or more information The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic All the print panels appear in the Print dialog box in a program Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected Only the HP LaserJet 4650 models supports the USB cable connection described in this section If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer the New Hardware Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer To install the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me 1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box click Search CD ROM drive 2 Click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for help or more information Installing the printing system software 6
301. ickup solenoid The pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly The paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Jams in tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 3 or 3 4 Table 7 10 Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder The separation tabs in the paper cassette are Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the deformed tray or replace the cassette The pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller The feed roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the feed roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the feed roller The drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged The connector to the printer has poor contact Reconnect all of the connectors to the printer Replace any damaged connectors The paper feeder pickup solenoid is damaged Disconnect the connector J4006 for the paper feeder solenoid from the paper feeder PCA Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J4006 2 and J40
302. idl tL neta ee dete eee tae 378 Print the file directory page eec eee a e e b ea eu er aie 378 Printthie PCL font list page eroe rote e fee no EP eee 379 Print the PS font list page edere descen oe da dere res eee ded nter dian de 380 Print the RGB samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 381 Print the CMYK samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 only ssssssss 382 BITerure t E 383 LED diagriostics deed e td eee dee dei e e pe du dee 383 Engine ele nee 385 Individual diagnostic tests nnan n E N E 386 MOESE PAGES EE 402 us Inge 402 Formater test page spunnet een eee 402 Engine E 403 Gold reset nd ha 403 INVBAM initialiZatior 3 essens tie tbt rer oe HL EUR e ae eU EE epe dee eed 403 Harddisk initializatioh 5 ooo tir Eee Oe e UE E RH 404 Calibration bypass oie dette ee e e ire Deme eed eure del 404 Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models seen 404 Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models sse 405 Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models sssseessssssrrssseserrsseerrrrssserees 405 Service MENU ua keen eet detect 406 Using the Service mert eiue eer ca ade Rp Re ie Ree Ra AERE 406 blc 409 Main Parks p EE 409 ee c ud tee Lideee ieee bee 411 SONSOMS xit hi teinte ee dE 413 Solenolds OM EN PE EE age MED IU BR E 416 Motors and CIE 418 PCAS hs teda
303. ignificantly while in PowerSave mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this printer As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Parkard has determined this product meets the ENERGY STAR for energy efficiency ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the U S Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency For more information see www energystar gov Paper use This product s optional automatic duplex feature two sided printing and N up printing multiple pages printed on one page capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life HP LaserJet printing supplies In many countries regions this product s printing supplies print cartridges fuser and transfer unit can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program An easy to use and free take back program is available in over 48 countries regions Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package 26 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW ENWW HP Printing Supplies Returns a
304. in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP Override the setting by pressing C The identified print cartridge is near end of its life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages that appear The fuser is near its end of life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP Order the identified print cartridge Press to continue Press for detailed information Press and V to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the identified print cartridge The estimate of pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer Printing will continue until REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE appears Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the image fuser kit Press to continue printing Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Printer error troubleshooting 253 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued ORDER FUSER KIT The fuser is near its end of life XXXX PAGES LEFT The printer is ready and will D continue for the estimated To enter menus press number of pages that appears O
305. ing PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Printing REGISTRATION PAGE Processing copy lt X gt of lt Y gt eem Acton The number of pages that Order the transfer kit remain for the transfer unit has reached the low threshold and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life Press for detailed information Press and V to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server The transfer unit is near its end of life Order an image transfer kit Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server The output bin is full and must Remove media from the output be emptied in order for printing bin to continue The printer is performing a Paper Path test No action is necessary however the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams A firmware upgrade is in No action is necessary process The printer is generating the Follow the instructions on the print quality troubleshooting printed pages pages The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed Follow the instructions on the printed pages The printer is generating the registration pa
306. ion CPR previously been installed in the printer When 50 pages have been 75 seconds DMAX DHALF printed since installing a print cartridge The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating When 1 000 pages have 75 seconds DMAX DHALF printed since the last calibration The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating When 8 hours have passed 75 seconds DMAX DHALF since the last calibration but not while the printer is in PowerSave mode Typically this calibration occurs during the first job or any control panel interaction after an overnight idle period When you request calibration 280 seconds 4 minutes 40 DMAX DHALF CPR drum from the control panel seconds phase CALIBRATE NOW for HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or QUICK CALIBRATE NOW and FULL CALIBRATE NOW for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Table 5 5 Cleaning timing and duration When the printer continuously either 5 seconds or 21 seconds primary and toner charging prints with no idle period or rollers spin down for 51 pages 5 seconds is the most common Image formation system 137 Figure 5 28 Table 5 5 Cleaning timing and duration continued At intervals of 90 and 140 16 seconds ETB pages The printer will finish printing the current job before cleaning ETB cleaning During this step all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums
307. ion is necessary No action is necessary Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the display Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control panel display If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued oasen Acton Message RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press alternates with Ready RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED To clear press alternates with Ready Ready Diagnostics mode To exit press Stop button Receiving upgrade REMOVE ALL PRINT CARTRIDGES To exit press Stop button REMOVE AT LEAST ONE PRINT CARTRIDGE To exit press Stop button REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it The printer is in a special diagnostics mode A firmware upgrade is in progress The printer is executing a Component test and the component selected is Belt only The printer is executing a Disable cartridge check or Component test where the Cartridge Motor is the component selected The identified print cartridge has reached
308. ions for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers e Print in Grayscale e Halftone options e Neutral Grays e Edge Control e RGB Color For the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only you can also set the following options e Driver Autoconfiguration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation Some accessories that the Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit optional paper trays and dual inline memory modules DIMMs If the environment supports bidirectional communication the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installed component by default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation e Update now If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer since installation the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts e HP Driver Preconfiguration HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that can be used to customize and dis
309. ipt Printer Description PPD files Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers The embedded Web server can be used by Macintosh computers if the printer is connected to a network PPDs Use PPDs in combination with the Apple PostScript drivers to gain access to the printer features and to allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs PDEs and other software is provided on the CD ROM Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system HP LaserJet Utility Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver The illustrated screens make selecting printer features easier than ever Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following e Name the printer assign it to a zone on a network and download files and fonts e Configure and set the printer for Internet protocol IP printing The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X but the utility is supported for the Classic environment Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing the printing system software Note Note Note ENWW The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD ROM The printing system software on the CD ROM must be installed in order to take full advantage of the printer feat
310. is replaced e After a set number of pages have printed e When the formatter sends an operation command Image density calibration consists of three steps 1 The DC controller forms density patterns for each color on the ETB by using varying levels of developing bias 2 The color registration detection unit measures the image density of the density patterns that are formed on the ETB 3 The DC controller uses the density measurements to adjust the developing bias to obtain he correct image density Image formation system 141 Image halftone calibration control DHALF This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurements to the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration Image density calibration must always be performed in advance of image halftone calibration Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps 1 Using the optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration the DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color cartridge 2 These density patterns are transferred to the ETB and the color registration detection unit measures the image density of these patterns Image data is returned to the formatter 3 The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration in order to obtain an ideal halftone image Image density detection Each of the image stabilization controls uses the color registration unit
311. is tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network with anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server card Tools for troubleshooting 371 Other links This section contains links that connect you to the Internet You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these Web sites Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it e HP Instant Support connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information that is specific to your printer e Order Supplies connects to the HP Web site where you can order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer where you can search for help regarding general topics Printer Status and Alerts software Printer Status and Alerts is supported only for Windows 95 and later versions The Printer Status and Alerts software is available to users of both networked and directly connected printers To use Printer Status and Alerts software with a directly connected computer you must select the Custom installation option when you install the pri
312. iten ea 368 Tools for troubleshooting o RU HIER RR RR ERI EG 370 Embedded Web Servel iL ei e e bet t o Eee edi bt t E e e t egerint 370 To open the embedded Web server 370 Printer Status and Alerts software emnes 372 Print the printer configuration page ssssem emm emm enn 373 Print the Supplies status page usunne rhet die leges de pe Lee d dte ede 375 Print the usage page ed tte one teu trud geesde 376 Printthe d mo pages Ara dence etg erento petitus 378 Print the file directory page eet eerte rnt tni drank enata e ann p hne roin 378 Print the PCL font listpage i ee p dae aet hc e Weed aditu 379 Print the PS font list page 1 itte eia re ateet ePi Ee t ee c ep rate ads 380 Print the RGB samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 381 Print the CMYK samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 only sssssss 382 DIAQNOSUCS Em 383 LED diagnosis t c tte fr retient eruta teen ER een HO MEAT 383 Engine diagnostiCs iem ente tet eb ede mete ns 385 Individual diagnostic tests rea oiee aa AR AEAEE nennen 386 Test P ges TEE 402 Engine testpage TEE 402 Formatter test page oa e E keen 402 ns Un 403 Gold E E 403 NVRAM Mie E re ET 403 Hard diskcinitialization 2 ndn needed Ness LER 404 Calibration bypass iuc geret ante aee erret ic eo eee EA dds dne ved Et D gae 404 Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ssee 404 238
313. ition the new label over the top of the control panel 3 Press the label firmly down onto the control panel LA Note When applying the label start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel ENWW Covers and external components 175 4 Press C HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUP Press V to highlight LANGUAGE 10 Press to select LANGUAGE Si 8 cw 0o wo 11 Press Y to highlight the desired language and then press to select and save the language choice 176 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Internal components The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components DC controller shield 1 Remove the following assemblies e Print cartridges and ETB See Replacing supply items e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover e Left cover See Left cover 2 Remove nine screws callout 1 A tenth screw might be located on the rear of the printer at the bottom of the DC controller shield callout 2 If that tenth screw is present remove it 3 Remove the DC controller shield Figure 6 16 Removing and replacing the DC controller shield Internal components front The following pro
314. ity paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration e Environmental changes can cause color variation The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum e All consumable components have a finite life span As these components reach the end of their useful life their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes e Paper roughness can cause colors to look different Use standard paper Color selection process The user selects the color in the program but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode Any color characteristics that the printer driver or programs do not address are set to the printer default The default color might not match the color the user selected Matching colors PANTONE color matching PANTONE has multiple color matching systems PANTONE Matching System is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints See www hp com for details about how to use PANTONE Matching System with this printer Swatch book color matching The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color refere
315. ive this command it enables the default language This ensures the correct operation for programs that do not support PJL The following is the command syntax QPJL Enter LANGUAGE PCL PostScript lt CR gt lt LF gt UEL This command also referred to as the universal exit language command terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL It performs the following actions e Prints all data that was received before this command e Performs a reset lt esc gt E in PCL lt cntrl gt D in PostScript e Turns control over to PJL This command is also a valid HP GL 2 terminator The UEL command must be immediately followed by the PJL command prefix Characters or control codes other than QPJL such as CR or lt LF gt enable the default language and process the print job in that language All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command In addition to starting PJL the UEL command creates the same effect as the lt esc gt E command However the lt esc gt E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility PJL COMMENT This command designates the current line as a comment which is ignored The following is the command syntax PJL COMMENT lt words gt lt CR gt lt LF gt QPJL INFO CONFIG This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically to meet the program requirements Interface tro
316. iver IC 2 ACC Frequency Integrator Drive comparator ircuit ircuit p 3 DEC circui circui N 4 X1000 i Frequency divider ASIC IC1014 Scanner motor driver PCB Scanner motor control circuit Laser scanner assembly 123 Image formation system The image formation system is the central hub of the printer Figure 5 13 Image formation system shows the image formation system During image formation an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper The image formation system consists of the following components e Four laser scanners e Four print cartridges e ETB e Fuser Primary charging Fuser roller Primary ei as Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder Transfer charging roller laser beam ETB belt VDATA4 VDATA4 o gt Bk cartridge VDATA3 VDATA3 dro mt M cartridge VDATA2 VDATA2 d ce gt 4 Y cartridge VDATA1 VDATAL Cl e C cartridge Memory Attaching tag roller O C O j Qc3 Memory controller PCB ex oes cm dI amp k Bx cr TUNE I Print command EE igh volt Formatter PCB VIDEO DC controller PCB Tr L supply signal I I Ee I Figure 5 13 Image formation system Image formation process The image formation process consists
317. job If you do not want the previous job to print press Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models first and then press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Note Do not attempt to perform a Print Stop test while the printer is calibrating because you be required to power cycle the printer If a jam message appears on the control panel display during testing activate the door switch ENWW Diagnostics 399 Information menu From the Information menu the following pages can be printed Print Menu Map Use this item to print the control panel menu map which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items Print Configuration Use this item to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and DDRs for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models trays and printer languages Print Supplies Status Page Use this item to print a page that shows the remaining life of the supplies Supplies Status Use this item to view a page that shows the supplies status in a searchable list on the control panel display Print Usage Page Use this item to print a page that shows a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer and lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports page count Print Demo Use this item to print
318. k but the power on checks pass try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the engine or display or with the formatter Perform the troubleshooting power on checks See Troubleshooting power on in this chapter When the control panel display is fuctioning go to step 2 2 Do any of the following messages appear on the control panel display READY OFFLINE or POWERSAVER ON if yes go to step 3 If no then check the following items Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control panel display to view informatiom about recent printer errors See View the event log on the control panel display in this chapter Does the LED blink at a constant rate See LED diagnostics in this chapter After correcting errors and performing the LED diagnostics go to step 3 3 Have you evaluated the event log If yes go to step 4 If no then check the following items Open the PRINT EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control panel display to show the last 50 printer errors See Diagnostics menu in this chapter If you experience jams while trying to print the event log see Paper path troubleshooting in this chapter Evaluate the event log Look for reoccurring errors After evualuating the event log go to step 4 4 Can you print a configuration page See Print the printer configuration page in this chapt
319. laration of ConformityDeclaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Development Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn printers HP Color LaserJet 4650 4650n 4650dn 4650dtn 4650hdn printers Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0304 00 C9660A C9692A C9661A C9662A C9663A 28 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Q3668A Q3669A Q3670A Q3671A Q3672A Including C9664A 500 sheetpaer feeder Q3673A Optional 500 Sheet Input Tray Q3674A Optional 2 x 500 Sheet Input Tray Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1999 EN60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN60825 1 1994 A11 1996 A2 2001 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class Bt 3 EN 61000 3 2 1995 A14 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 1998 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 3 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 1998 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to
320. late DDD use the following formula 30 calendar month 1 calendar day DDD If the calendar day is 31 use 30 instead For instance if the printer was first used on October 17 calculate DDD as follows Subtract 1 from 10 October is the tenth month of the year 10 1 9 Multiply 9 by 30 9 x 30 270 Add 17 to 270 270 17 287 Thus DDD 287 Converting the Service ID to an actual date You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows 1 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed 2 Divide DDD by 30 If there is a remainder add 1 to the result This is the month 3 The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows 1 12 1990 2002 so the year is 2002 2 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Since there is a remainder add 1 to 9 to get 10 which represents October The remainder in step 2 is 17 so that is the date 4 The complete date is 17 October 2002 A 6 day grace period is built into the date system Service menu 407 Cold reset paper When you perform a cold reset the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting If you replace a formatter board in a country region that uses A4 as the standard paper size use thi
321. lenoids 24 VB also functions as the door open DOPEN detection signal The CPU detects the door open with the signal Fuse Noise SES F002 filter Power Noise Wer epp switch i CPU one v Fuser power m supply PCB Door open detection switch 24VA 24VB p SWA 1 3 3V O AC DC converter 24VA y laser scanner unit 5V Joe DC controller PCB Memory controller Sensors High voltage gt Fan motors power supply Solenoids v d DO Low voltage power supply circuit Formatter system The formatter PCA is responsible for the following actions e Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces e Monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information through the control panel and the bidirectional I O e Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine e Storing font information e Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface e Controlling the PowerSave mode Engine control system 117 The formatter monitors the printer continuously through the video interface When the printer is ready to print the formatter sends a signal to
322. les Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh computer To install the printing system software 1 Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer Use a standard 2 meter USB cable 2 Close all software programs that are open or running Insert the printer CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and run the installer The CD ROM menu runs automatically If the CD ROM menu does not run automatically double click the CD ROM icon on the desktop and then double click the Installer icon This icon is located in the Installer language folder of the Starter CD ROM where language is your language preference 4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 Restart the computer Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Note Note Note Note ENWW 6 For Mac OS 9 x and later e From HD Applications Utilities open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility e Double click Printer USB e Next to USB Printer Selection click Change e Select the printer click Auto Setup and then click Create e Click the Desktop Printer Icon that was just created e On the Printing menu click Set Default Printer For Mac OS X From HD Applications Utilities Print Center start the Print Center If the printer does not set up automatically do the following e Click Add Printer e From within the printer list select USB as the connection type e Select the printer and then cl
323. leshooting 356 configuring 71 connecting to 56 EIO slots 57 installing HP Jedtdirect print servers 105 installing Macintosh software 67 installing Windows software 66 operating systems supported 58 ENWW security 76 software 72 Windows sharing 66 wireless 59 Neutral Grays settings 341 noise specifications 16 nonvolatile memory initialization 403 operations 120 Novell NetWare 58 Novell NetWare support 71 NVRAM initialization 403 operations 120 O on off switch locating 9 10 online Help drivers 63 operating environment specifications 12 15 operating systems supported 58 62 operations calibration 136 color plane registration 140 CPU 119 DC controller circuit 110 density control 141 duplexer 152 engine control system 110 environment sensor 4650 141 ETB electrostatic transfer transport belt 130 fans 111 formatter 117 fuser power supply 114 fuser delivery unit 151 heater temperature control 115 high voltage power supply 116 image stabilization control 141 image formation system 124 131 laser scanner 122 low voltage power supply 116 memory 119 motors 111 parallel interface 119 pickup feed system 144 PJL 121 PowerSave mode 118 print cartridges 126 scanner motor control 122 sequence of 108 ordering parts and supplies 35 434 OS 2 drivers 62 output bin delivery unit operations 151 full sensor removing 219 locating 9 10 ENWW output quality troubleshooting after jams 337 blank images 346 blank
324. lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dots in vertical lines Table 7 25 Causes for vertical lines of white dots The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA 346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 25 Causes for vertical lines of white dots continued The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Dirt on the back of the paper This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the back of the paper Table 7 26 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper One or more of the rollers are dirty See Repetitive defects troubleshooting for information about identifying the roller that might be dirty Clean the indicated roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the appropriate roller cartridge or assembly The pickup roller is dirty Clean the roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the pickup roller assembly A poor contact exists in the attaching bias Clean the contacts Replace t
325. lity troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics in the box to the right of the screen The customer can also go to www hp com bizsupport to find the print quality troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics These Web sites provide intuitive step by step directions for producing print quality troubleshooting pages that can be used to isolate issues and provide possible print quality solutions Print quality problems associated with media Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media e Use media that meets HP specifications e The surface of the media is too smooth See Print media specifications e The printer driver is set incorrectly Change the paper type setting to HEAVY or GLOSSY e The media that you are using is too heavy for the printer and the toner is not fusing to the media Image formation troubleshooting 335 The transparencies that you are using are not designed for correct toner adhesion Use only transparencies that are designed for HP Color LaserJet printers The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper The letterhead that you are using is printed on rough paper Use a smoother xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the printer who produces your letterhead to verify that the paper use
326. ller if it is dirty If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the paper This applies to jams that occur in advance of pickup assembly the registration roller The attaching roller is damaged Check the attaching roller to see if it is damaged If it is damaged replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion when it enters the ETB The cartridge shutter open close mechanism is The shutters in each print cartridge should open damaged as you close the ETB If a shutter does not open replace that print cartridge Also check for a This applies to jams in which media is crumpled damaged shutter mechanism in the printer into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt The cartridge drive motor assembly is damaged Inspect the cartridge drive assembly in each print cartridge If any are damaged replace the assembly for that print cartridge The attaching roller is defective Make sure that the attaching roller is clean and the spring is in place If the roller is damaged replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The paper leading edge sensor is defective Replace the pickup PC
327. llers and separation pads Bent separation tabs on the front corners of the input trays can cause misfeeds and multifeeds Replace the tray if necessary Defective paper tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter Defective paper sensors along the paper path might falsely signal a jam Scraps of media that remain in the paper path can cause intermittent jams Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams Also remove the fuser and carefully check it for debris from jams Paper path troubleshooting 327 Jams in tray 1 The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in tray 1 Table 7 8 Causes for jams in tray 1 The pickup roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the pickup roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the pickup roller The separation pad is defective Clean the separation pad If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the separation pad The drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged The multipurpose tray pickup solenoid is Disconnect the connector J1020 for the defective multipurpose tray pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCA Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J1020 11 and J1020 10 If the measured resistance is not
328. locating 84 part numbers 439 removing during service 164 replacement intervals 81 82 replacing 87 ETB assembly cleaning operations 136 diagnostics 395 operations 130 part numbers 455 471 eventlog 368 387 F factory settings restoring 367 fans cartridge removing 220 formatter removing 221 locating 418 locations 398 Index 507 operations 111 part numbers 453 power supply removing 199 Fast InfraRed pod locating 9 10 operations 119 features models 2 5 feed speed control 150 feeding operations 144 file directory printing 361 378 fiters 447 Finnish laser statement 31 FIR pod locating 9 10 operations 119 firmware part numbers 437 flash memory card installing 4650 102 flowchart troubleshooting 242 font DIMMs enabling 4600 95 installing 4600 93 installing 4650 97 font lists printing 361 379 formatter case removing 201 fan removing 221 LED 383 operations 117 part numbers 439 445 PCA locating 420 removing 196 test page 402 frame type parameters Novell NetWare 71 front cover locating 9 removing 172 Full Calibrate Now 405 fuser assembly part numbers 455 delivery sensor removing 218 drive assembly part numbers 455 465 drive unit removing 215 inlet paper sensor removing 217 part numbers 473 power supply operations 114 power supply part numbers 445 457 power supply removing 213 fuser kit count resetting 406 locating 84 part numbers 439 replacement intervals 81 replacing 90
329. loping disengaging motor rotation error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow Turn the printer off and then on This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed ETB motor error 1 Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector J4017 Reconnect the connectors J4022 for the ETB motor J4017 between the ETB and the printer and J4014 on the DC controller PCA Replace the ETB motor Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Fuser motor error 1 Reconnect the connectors J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCA Replace the fuser drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message 59 X Y continued 62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn off then on 68 X STORAGE ERROR SETTING CHANGE For help press alternates with 68 X STORAGE ERROR SETTING CHANGE To continue press oasen pem 0 Print cartridge motor error 1 Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCA J1013 for cyan J1031 for magenta J10
330. lossy paper e You can also configure the printer by using settings on the printer control panel Envelopes Envelopes can be printed on only from tray 1 Set the tray media size to the specific envelope size Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure high quality printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams e Do not load more than 20 envelopes into tray 1 e The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g m 28 Ib bond e Envelopes should be flat e Do not use envelopes that contain windows or clasps e Envelopes must not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged e Envelopes that include peel off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer s fusing process e Envelopes should be loaded face down with the postage end feeding into the printer first Labels To print on labels set the tray media type to LABELS on the printer control panel When printing on labels use the following guidelines e Verify that the adhesive material on the labels can tolerate 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Verify that no adhesive material is exposed between the labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause printer jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components e Donotrefeed a sheet of labels e Verify that the labels lie flat e Do not use labels that are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Heavy pap
331. ly placed out or low Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job emm o em Press and then press for help Follow the instructions on the control panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply Press and Y to step through the instructions Insert the transfer unit or make sure that the installed transfer unit is fully seated Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that the ETB connectors 44017 on the ETB and J1014 on the DC controller PCA are good Replace connectors as necessary Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To continue press Q LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt l
332. m Windows 95 and later Use the embedded Web server to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel The following are are examples of what you can do when you are using the embedded Web server e View printer control status information e Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray e Determine the remaining life of all supplies and order new ones e View and change tray configurations e View and change the printer control panel menu configuration e View and print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e View and change the network configuration To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or late or Netscape Navigator 4 or later The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based printer connections You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server To open the embedded Web server In a supported Web browser on your computer type the IP address for the printer To find the IP address print a configuration page Note After you open the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future 1 The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer the Information tab the Settings tab and the Network tab Click the
333. m message appears for the sensor that detects the jam Sensors shows the locations of all the sensors in the printer Jam locations Jams occur in the areas shown in Figure 7 1 Jam locations HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Jam messages correlate with these areas For instructions about clearing jams see the sections later in this chapter Figure 7 1 Jam locations HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Top cover area Duplex path Paper path Paper input path Trays ARON ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 321 vvv pr j hel Q ep a T T Figure 7 2 2 x 500 sheet feeder HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only 1 Pickup area 2 Paper feed area Jam locations by error message Use Table 7 6 Error messages and associated jam locations table to identify jam locations and to help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams See Figure 7 1 Jam locations HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer or Figure 7 2 2 x 500 sheet feeder HP
334. mage Horizontal lines are printed See Horizontal lines White horizontal lines appear in See White horizontal lines the image One of the four toner colors is See Missing color not printing The image has blank spots See Blank spots Toner is loose on the printed See Poor fusing image The image appears distorted See Distortion or blurring or colors seem out of alignment The image is smeared or dirty See Smearing Image defects 343 Table 7 18 Image defects continued Image defect Image defect Description Description More information Misplaced image The image is placed incorrectly See Misplaced image on the page Light image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light images Table 7 19 Causes for light images fee Seton The image density is not adjusted correctly Increase the density for each color A poor contact in the attaching bias contacts Clean the contacts Replace them if they are still between the ETB and the high voltage PCA dirty or are damaged The attaching roller is worn or damaged Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The high voltage PCA is defective Replace the high voltage PCA The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing
335. n Step 6 Attaching After the media is picked up from the input tray the attaching roller pushes it against the ETB The attaching roller has a positive dc bias and it creates a positive charge on the print media Figure 5 24 Attaching the paper to the ETB illustrates this step Attaching roller ETB belt ETB feed roller DC bias za Print paper Attaching the paper to the ETB Step 7 Transfer A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller which is directly opposite the photosensitive drum As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller it picks up a positive charge The negatively charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the positively charged print media Figure 5 25 Toner transfer illustrates this step This process is repeated for each color as the ETB carries the media from the bottom cartridge to the top C Y M K 134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 ENWW In four color printing as four colors of toner are piled up on the media the holding force of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses To counteract this effect the DC controller increases the positive dc bias that is applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color Print paper e ETB belt Photosensitive drum t Transfer charging roller a a Z DC bias TTT Toner transfer Step 8 Separation The el
336. n Ra 36 Bleu ge 37 Ordering related documentation and software eee 38 3 Installation and configuration Unpacking the printer sssssssssssssesesseenenneeeen e ener n nennen nnns 41 Installing the media tray 2 iiri Eterno rr dnte ea lad E entes lacer ER 46 elle Bee OT 47 Installing the print cartridges eren ertet naci irr tiet ene tert eoi EENS 48 Installing a new overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models sssseseesssssrrrsseerrrsseeerrsseeernssses 50 Installing a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 51 Testing the printer operation sssssssssssseseseeeeeeeerenennen nnnm nn nennen nnns 52 Using POWEIS AVC D 53 To set PowerSave Time eee ennemi enne nennen nnne 53 To turn PowerSave on or Off 1 esses eee ded d da ed dae 53 Connecting to a computer sssssssssssesee eee nenne ennemi nennen nennen nnne nnns 54 Parallel corinectlons ciini eb cbe ee ERE enn ete 54 USB configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models see 55 Auxiliary connection configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 55 Network connections nene eene nen nenne nen nennen enne nennen 56 Enhanced I O EIO configuration sisser eee thaz etna a enn saa ean 57 Wireless printing sssssesseenemm emm nennen nnnm rrr nnne nnne nennen nns 59 Printer ANVers E 61
337. n be performed once or repeatedly If CONTINUOUS is selected as the repeat option the test will cycle the component on and off This process continues for 2 minutes and then the test terminates Note The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests If covers are removed the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change The ETB assembly can be open closed or removed while some of these tests are executing Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests The control panel display prompts for removal of some or all cartridges during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components as well as to protect the cartridges and ETB Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS Press to select DIAGNOSTICS Press V to highlight COMPONENT TEST Press to select COMPONENT TEST Select the component test options when prompted by the printer O9 Uv e za Po 394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Menus cannot be opened during component tests so HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models serves the same function as the Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button The following component tests can be performed e Transfer motors This test turns the components that are i
338. n does not open start it by using the following procedure e On the Start menu click Run e Type the following x setup where x is the letter of the CD ROM drive e Click OK When prompted click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish when the installation has been completed You might need to restart the computer D aS amp Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed Installing the printing system software 65 Note 66 If installation fails reinstall the software If this fails check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box or go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 for help or more information Installing Windows printing system software for networks The software on the printer CD ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network For network installation on other operating systems go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 The HP Jetdirect print server that is included with the HP LaserJet 4650n HP LaserJet 4650dn or HP LaserJet 4650dtn printer has a 10 100 Base Tx network port If you need an HP Jetdirect print server with another type of network port go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Nov
339. n for the 500 sheet feeder is the same as that described in Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection For the 500 sheet feeder SW4001 SW4002 and SW4003 are the equivalent of SW1 SW2 and SW3 respectively in the 500 sheet cassette Paper feeder driver PCB gt gt Nan MAIN MOTOR CONTROL signals CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signals CASSETTE PAPER DIRECTION signal CSTS PAPER PICKUP SOLENOID signal CSTSL SL400 11g o SW4001 PS4001 Paper feeder SW4002 SW4003 Cassette pickup roller Cassette feed roller Figure 5 40 500 sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation 154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 2 x 500 sheet feeder Figure 5 41 ENWW The optional 2 x 500 sheet feeder available for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models standard on the 4650hdn printer is provides two 500 sheet casettes that accept a variety of paper types and sizes Each cassette can hold 56 mm 2 2 inches of 80 g m media about 500 sheets per Ce A gt OCH OO 2 x 500 sheet feeder Pickup and feed system The following is the sequence of operations for the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder the sequence of operation is the same for eith
340. n page 457 Cable left plate RG5 6413 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 Cable memory 4600 Only RG5 6420 000CN Table 8 6 on page 449 Cable paper feed RG5 6419 000CN Table 8 16 on page 469 Cable relay RG5 6414 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable sensor RG5 6423 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable connector fuser 4600 Only RG5 6425 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable connector fuser 4650 Only RG5 7480 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cable connector optional feeder RG5 6430 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Cam gear 66T RS7 0135 000CN Table 8 10 on page 457 Cap left RB2 8121 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Cap right RB2 8124 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 Cartridge inlet assembly RG5 6450 000CN Table 8 8 on page 453 Cassette tray 2 4600 Only RG5 6476 090CN Table 8 15 on page 467 Cassette tray 2 4650 Only RG5 7459 000CN Table 8 15 on page 467 Cassette frame left assembly frame left Cassette frame left assembly RG5 6459 000CN 6459 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 8 7 on Table 8 7 on page 451 451 Cassette frame right assembly frame Cassette frame right assembly assembly GE 6460 000CN Table 8 7 on page 451 Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder RG1 4140 040CN Table 8 19 on page 475 Color registration detection assembly registration detection Color registration detection assembly RGS 6454 000CN 6454 000CN Table 8 9 on page 455 8 9 on Table 8 9 on page 455 455 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 491 Table
341. n sssrinin aninda d enne nenne 140 Image stabilization Control 2i eiii eerte bereiten ea ikea ANE EES 141 Pickup feed BEE 144 Pick p feed BT TE 147 Fuser delivery unit 151 Duplex feed Lu TEE 152 500 sheet paper feeder cceecccccecceceeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeesecacaeceeeeeeeeseseaaeeeeeeeeeseceesaeeeeeetess 153 Pickup and feed operations sese nennen nnne eerte nnn 153 2 x 500 sheet feeder sseesssssssssssssseseseseeeeee ener enne eres tenth nnn nmernme nnne 155 Pickup and feed system EE 155 ENWW 107 Basic operation The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer functions are divided into four systems e Engine control system e Laser scanner system e Image formation system e Pickup feed system This chapter describes each of these systems thoroughly LASER SCANNER SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL S SEH d KID IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM KD PICKUP FEED SYSTEM To external device computer etc through the formatter Figure 5 1 Basic system operation Operation sequence A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the printer The basic operation sequence see Table 5 1 Basic operation sequence describes the main operational periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating Note In the following table ETB stands for electrostatic transfer transport
342. n the belt Unless print jobs are queued back to back each print job requires the belt to spin up Think of the ETB as having a limited number of wear units It has 200 000 wear units when it is new Each time the belt spins up it uses two wear units Each time it prints a page the belt uses one wear unit Because most print jobs are not queued the average number of pages per job or job length is a factor in how fast the ETB will wear out The shorter the average job the more quickly the ETB will wear out 82 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Figure 4 1 ENWW Figure 4 1 ETB total page count according to average job length shows how many pages an ETB will print given various average job lengths 250000 200000 150000 Pages ETB 100000 50000 0 T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Average Job Length ETB total page count according to average job length The printer assumes an average print job length of three pages to estimate how many pages are remaining on the ETB With an average job length of three pages the ETB will print 120 000 pages If all print jobs are exactly three pages long for each page printed the number of estimated pages remaining would decrease by one beginning with the maximum 120 000 pages If the job length is less than three pages the estimated pages remaining number decreases more quickly than the rate at which the number of pages actually printed increases If the job
343. nals the DC controller to slow the motors accordingly 148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 36 ENWW The OHT sensor uses a light transmitter and light receiver to detect the presence of plain paper When plain paper passes through the sensor the light is blocked and the OHT signal changes from low to high Consequently when the signal is not blocked but the paper leading edge sensor detects a sheet the DC controller determines that the media is an OHT Figure 5 36 Overhead transparency detection illustrates this process OHT sensor OHTS um S Registration shutter IY d Paper leading edge Registration roller detection sensor n Feed media Sub roller TOPI Signal Media Normal Plain paper OHT TOPI signal H L L OHTS signal L H L Overhead transparency detection Pickup feed system 149 Figure 5 37 Small size paper detection Because the printer s overhead transparency detection sensor is installed at the end of the feed path small size paper that does not pass the edge of the feed path can be mistaken for an OHT To avoid this problem the printer has a lever in front of the OHT detection sensor to distinguish small sized paper Small size paper is too narrow to trip the lever When the lever is tripped the flag attached to the lever momentarily blocks light from reaching the OHT detection sensor indicating that the media is full width The
344. nces is complex In general you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks that are used to create the swatch book are cyan magenta yellow and black These are usually referred to as process color swatch books Some swatch books are created from spot colors Spot colors are specially created colorants Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color Most process swatch books have a note about what process standards were used to print the swatch book In most cases they will be SWOP EURO or DIC To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu If you cannot identify the process standard use SWOP ink emulation Using color HP ImageREt 2400 HP Color LaserJet 4600 models HP ImageREt 2400 is a technology that provides the best color print quality without having to change driver settings or make trade offs among print quality performance and memory 338 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note ENWW HP ImageREt 2400 has been improved for this printer The improvements offer trapping technologies even greater control over dot placement and more precise control of toner quality in a dot These new technologies coupled with HP s multilevel printing process result in a 600 by 600 dpi printer that provides 2400 dpi
345. nd Recycling Program Information Since 1990 the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected millions of used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world s landfills The HP LaserJet print cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk shipped to our resource and recovery partners who disassemble the cartridges After a thorough quality inspection selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products e U S returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single pre paid and pre addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package For more information in the U S call 800 340 2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at www hp com go recycle e Non U S recycling returns Non U S customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the www hp com go recycle Web site for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Recycled paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN 12281 2002
346. nd black using only black toner This guarantees neutrals colors without a color cast e 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest black Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered Edge control has two components adaptive halftoning and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color plane registration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly Four levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level and adaptive halftoning is on e Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning RGB Color Two values are available for the RGB Color setting e Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB sRGB is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization www e Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully This value is recommended for the printing business graphics e Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode To render
347. nd the toner charging roller To prevent print quality defects this toner needs to be cleaned The DC controller alternately applies negative bias in different values to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller when one of the following occurs e The printer is turned on e The covers are closed e Atthe start of a print operation e After printing a specified number of pages Applying bias removes the toner from each roller The toner on the primary charging roller is transferred to the photosensitive drum and the toner on the toner charging roller is transferred to the developing cylinder Then the cleaning blade scrapes the toner on the photosensitive drum into the waste toner container as described above The toner on the developing cylinder is returned to the toner case Figure 5 30 Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning illustrates this process Primary charging roller To waste toner case Toner charging roller Developing cylinder To toner case 3 TITT DC bias Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning Image formation system 139 Color plane registration calibration The diameter of the rollers in individual print cartridges or ETB units varies from one to another For this reason whenever a new print cartridge or ETB unit is installed the printer must adjust the rotational speed of the rollers in order to ensure good color plane registration C
348. nel display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious use the printer error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem Paper path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems Explanations are provided about print media checks troubleshooting jams and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer Image formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print quality problems Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware printer configuration network configuration or software program Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel It also describes the control panel menus the items within each menu and the possible values for the menu items Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log Diagnostics provides instructions about how to gain access to and use the diagnostic tools that are incorporated into the printer Service menu provides procedures for opening the service menu and performing service oriented tasks These tasks include counts for entering the serial number service ID tran
349. network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The CD ROM menu runs automatically If the CD ROM menu does not run automatically double click the CD ROM icon on the desktop and then double click the Installer icon This icon is located in the Installer language folder of the Starter CD ROM where language is your language preference For example the Installer English folder contains the Installer icon for the English printer software Double click the HP LaserJet Installers folder Follow the instructions on the computer screen Double click the Installer icon for the desired language On your computer hard drive double click Applications Utilities and then Print Center Click Add Printer Select the AppleTalk connection type on OS X 10 1 and the Rendezvous connection type on OS X 10 2 9 Select the printer name 10 Click Add Printer 11 Close the Print Center by clicking the close button in the upper left corner ceo NOON d 95 Macintosh computers cannot be connected directly to the printer using a parallel port Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections USB HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS 9 x and later The Apple LaserWriter driver must be installed to use the PPD fi
350. ng messages the status message Ready appears if the printer is online Warning messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically alternate with Ready or with status messages and they appear until is pressed If CLEARABLE WARNING is set to JOB in the printer configuration menu these messages are cleared by the next print job Error messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed such as adding media or clearing a media jam Some error messages are auto continuable if AUTO CONTINUE ON the printer will continue normal operation after an auto continuable error message has appeared for 10 seconds Note Any button that is pressed during the 10 second appearance of an auto continuable error message overrides the auto continue feature and the function of the pressed button takes precedence Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on These messages are not affected by the auto continue setting If a critical error persists service is required ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 245 Note Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of th
351. ng the printer control panel Administrators can choose from multiple levels of security and can lock certain control panel menus allowing users to change the rest of the menus or lock all of the menus including the Cancel Job HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models button Levels of security Lock setting Control panel items locked LOW I O submenu System setup submenu Resets submenu Service menu locked with a factory set PIN Configure Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with a factory set PIN Information menu Paper Handling menu Configure Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with a factory set PIN Cancel Job button HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Stop button HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 76 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence you must use an MS DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility The PJL Technical Reference Manual is located on CD ROM part number 5961 0976 Order a copy of this manual from the HP Web site www hp com Note In the following examples EC represents the escape character For more information about using escape characters see the PJL Technical
352. noise Do not remove or exchange cartridges before you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic After starting the test you can remove or exchange cartridges 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK 5 Press to select DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK To exit this diagnostic test press the Cancel Job button HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Stop HP Color LaserJet 4650 models and then select Exit diagnostics Paper path sensor test HP Color LaserJet 4650 models This test displays the status of each paper path sensor 1 Press MENU to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight PAPER PATH TEST 9 Press to select PAPER PATH TEST 6 Select the paper path test options when the printer prompts you Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams To isolate a problem you can specify which input tray to use specify whether to use the duplex path and specify the number of copies to print Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature e Print test page Run the paper path test from the default settings tray 2 no dupl
353. nse whether the cassette tray 3 4 is installed correctly and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassettes Paper size detection switches at the back of the cassettes send this information to the DC controller The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches See Table 5 8 Cassette paper size detection 2 x 500 sheet feeder Figure 5 43 Cassette paper size detection switches 2 x 500 sheet feeder shows how the switches are stacked Table 5 8 Cassette paper size detection 2 x 500 sheet feeder E E EE pe GE EE og mo e Ja k Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded creating an error in paper size detection The paper leading edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet of paper pass it By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge the sensor determines the actual size of the sheet If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination the DC controller determines a mis match The sheet is ejected from the printer and the printer stops SW1 o7 6 SW2 lo 6 SW3 07 Cassette paper size detection switches 2 x 500 sheet feeder 158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Removal and replacement This chapter contains information about the following topics
354. nst the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu Printer error troubleshooting 279 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued eem Acton Message TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE Verify tray switch set to CUSTOM then close tray TRAY XX SIZE lt SIZE Recommend move switch in tray to STANDARD then close tray TRAY XX TYPE SIZE Size detected by tray alternates with TRAY
355. nter driver Select the option to install Printer Status and Alerts For network connections Printer Status and Alerts is installed automatically with the Typical software installation option Use this software to view the embedded Web server information for a particular printer The software also generates messages on the computer that provide the status of the printer and print jobs Depending on how the printer is connected you can receive different messages e Networked printers You can receive regular job status messages that appear every time a print job is sent to the printer or every time the print job finishes printing You can also receive alerts messages These messages appear when you are printing to a particular printer if that printer experiences a problem In some cases the printer can continue to print such as when a tray that is not being used is open or a print cartridge is low In other cases a problem might prevent the printer from printing such as when the media is out or a print cartridge is empty e Directly connected printers You can receive alerts messages that appear when the printer experiences a problem but can continue printing or a problem that prevents it from printing You can also receive messages that indicate that the print cartridge is low You can set alert options for a single printer that supports Printer Status and Alerts or you can set alert options for all printers that support Printer Status and
356. nts on six pages The final page gives instructions about how to use the control panel buttons Printing a menu map 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT MENU MAP Press to select PRINT MENU MAP E Figure 7 5 HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map 360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW menu map common fun wf Eee ee mL c LI ILC wm e oe mm ene SS CC Figure 7 6 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models menu map Information menu Use the Information menu to gain access to and print specific printer information Table 7 40 Information menu mem pmi PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control panel menu map which shows the layout of and current settings for the control panel menu items PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the printer configuration page PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies reports statistics for the total number of pages and jobs processed print cartridge manufacture date serial number page counts and maintenance information SUPPLIES STATUS Shows the supplies status in a searchable list PRINT USAGE Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count PRINT DEMO Prints a dem
357. nvolved in the image transfer process the cartridge motors the ETB motor and belt if the ETB is closed and the connector is seated and the print cartridges if the ETB is closed You can remove or install print cartridges during this test e Belt only This test turns only the ETB motor and belt The ETB must be closed and the connector seated The control panel display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also Rotating the photosensitive drums could damage the belt or photosensitive drums If covers are removed you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order for the test run e Cartridge motors This test rotates only the print cartridge drive motors The control panel display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also The engine rotates the cartridge motor s for only the cartridges that are removed To rotate all motors sequentially remove all of the cartridges to isolate one motor remove only that cartridge If covers are removed you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to perform the test Always start this test with all of the cartridges installed and activate the door switch so that the printer recognizes the configuration Then you can proceed with the test by removin
358. o continue press 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 8X YYYY EIO ERROR 318 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A non volatile storage device is full Pressing amp should clear the message Printing can continue but unexpected behavior might occur X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A non volatile storage device is failing to write Pressing should clear the message Printing can continue but unexpected behavior might occur X Description 0 on board NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A critical hardware error has occurred The EIO accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error 81 EIO ERROR error in slot 1 82 EIO ERROR error in slot 2 Press to continue For 68 0 errors turn the printer off and then on If a 68 0 error persists perform an NVRAM inititialization For 68 1 errors use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive If a 68 1 errors persists reinitialize the hard disk Press CO to continue Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists initialize NVRAM Reinitialize the hard disk Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists reseat the firmware DIMM Reseat the formatter Replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter Calibrate the printer See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Turn the printer off and then on
359. oco tie ettet cut edt etre dei fk 139 Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning 139 Color registration calibration ese mem 140 Image density detection sssssssseseeeemeeene enne 143 Pick up feed system oc e ee tette edit tie ruse ed 145 Pickup feed system o earl eed oed ee piden 147 Cassette paper size detection switches sssssensseneeeesreesrrtrrtnnrrnnnen nsen 148 Overhead transparency detection ssssssssseene enne 149 Small size paper detection sssssssssssssssesseeeneenenenee 150 D plex switch back ccr eene Ae ines eee acl Ure va ded 152 Additional 500 sheet paper feeder snnsnssseneseeseenrttnrennstrretrrrrtnnnnnnnneereent 153 500 sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation 154 2 x 5OO sheet feeder eege oreste iet de tam 155 2 x 500 sheet feeder pickup and feed operation ssssssssusse 157 Cassette paper size detection switches 2 x 500 sheet feeder 158 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison ssesssss 161 Remove the rear cover 165 Remove the top cover 1 of 2 sss 166 Remove the top cover 2 of 2 sss ener 166 Remove the rear top cover 1 of 3 167 Remove the rear top cover 2 of 3 168 Remove the rear top cover 3 of 3 168 Remove the left cover 1 of 2 essent nennen
360. oduct ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 435 Table 8 2 Supplies and accessories Accessories J6057 J6057 61033 HP Jetdirect 620n connectivity card C4103A FIR pod HP Color LaserJet 4600 models only Printer cabinet stand R96 5023 000CN Optional 500 sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 assembly Q36773 67901 4650 Only Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 4 assembly IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable 3 meters approximately 10 feet long with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male c type connector Macintosh DIN 8 printer cable HP LocalTalk cable kit 8121 0539 2 meter USB cable 8121 0549 2 foot USB cable HP Color LaserJet Transparencies letter 50 sheets C2936A HP Color LaserJet Transparencies A4 50 sheets Q6541A HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper letter 200 sheets Q6542A HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper A4 200 sheets Q1298A HP LaserJet Tough paper letter Q1298B HP LaserJet Tough paper A4 HPU1132 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper letter CHP410 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper A4 436 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 2 Supplies and accessories continued HPJ1124 IR HP LaserJet paper letter Memory 36073A 0 00 36073 69001 69001 Printer hard disk C7848A E ae 67901 4600 Only 64 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C7850A C7850 67901 4600 Only 128 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9653A C9653 67901 4600 Only 256 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9712A C9712 67908 4600 Only Firmwar
361. of the paper ssssssssssssrrsnnenssrernrnnrensssssrrrnrrnne 347 Causes for vertical lines ssssssssssssseseee eee eene 348 Causes for white vertical lines essen 348 xi xii Table 7 30 Table 7 31 Table 7 32 Table 7 33 Table 7 34 Table 7 35 Table 7 36 Table 7 37 Table 7 38 Table 7 39 Table 7 40 Table 7 41 Table 7 42 Table 7 43 Table 7 44 Table 7 45 Table 7 46 Table 7 47 Table 7 48 Table 7 49 Table 7 50 Table 7 51 Table 7 52 Table 7 53 Table 7 54 Table 7 55 Table 7 56 Table 7 57 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 Table 8 9 Table 8 10 Table 8 11 Table 8 12 Table 8 13 Table 8 14 Table 8 15 Table 8 16 Table 8 17 Table 8 18 Table 8 19 Table 8 20 Table 8 21 Table 8 22 Table 8 23 Table 8 24 Table 8 25 Table 8 26 Table 8 27 Table 8 28 Causes for horizontal lines ssssssssssseeeenenes 349 Causes for white horizontal lines sssssssssseeeee 349 Causes for a missing color ecciesie nnns 349 Causes for blank spots isnie inea denea aiee i aaa 350 Causes for poor TUSING toe ae alee ene 350 Causes for distortion or blurring eenn ens 351 Causes for smearirng errat terea Setesdalen 351 Causes for Misplaced image ssssssssseeee enne 352 Repetitive defect spacing
362. old the separation pad in place callout 4 Pull the separation pad forward to remove it callout 5 Internal components 181 Note Always replace the separation pad when you replace the multipurpose tray pickup roller Figure 6 24 Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 1 of 2 Figure 6 25 Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 2 of 2 182 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6 26 Note ENWW Solenoids Remove the paper pickup unit See Paper pickup unit To remove the multipurpose tray solenoid remove one screw callout 1 and disconnect the connector callout 2 To remove the cassette solenoid remove one screw callout 3 and disconnect one connector callout 4 Remove the solenoids Color registration detection unit 1 2 Open the top cover and the front cover Remove the ETB To protect the ETB from damage always remove the ETB when removing the color registration detection unit 3 4 5 6 Remove the control panel See Control panel Disconnect one connector callout 1 Remove two screws callout 2 Remove one screw callout 3 This screw is located on the right side of the printer underneath the plate where the screws in callout 2 are located Remove the control panel support assembly callout 4 and then remove the color registration detection unit which is located behind the stay Internal components 183
363. olor misregistration occurs when the individual colors do not print directly on top of one another This adjustment consists of two steps 1 Direct calibration The DC controller uses the color registration detection unit to measure the color registration range directly and calibrate the color registration 2 Indirect calibration The DC controller monitors the rotational speed of each feed roller and controls the speed to prevent color misregistration Figure 5 31 Color registration calibration illustrates this process Formatter PCB DC controller PCB Fuser sleeve Vv L Ee Photosensitive drum Drum motors Rz M1 M2 M3 M4 Pickup motor 18 M5 ETB motor M Fuser motor M8 Drum home position detection sensor Figure 5 31 Color registration calibration Drum phase calibration Pressure roller registration detection unit ETB belt The drum phase calibration aligns all four cartridge motors and their drive gears 140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Image stabilization control This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration of the photosensitive drum toner etc There are three types of image stabilization control These controls operate when necessary e Environmental change control The environment condition sensor HP Color LaserJet
364. one setting 340 HP ImageREt 338 light troubleshooting 344 manual settings 340 matching 338 missing 349 Neutral Grays setting 341 Print in Grayscale 340 RGB setting 341 sample pages printing 361 381 solid troubleshooting 346 sRGB 339 variation troubleshooting 337 color registration detection assembly part numbers 455 color registration detection unit removing 183 color plane registration calibration 140 colored paper 21 commands 356 communications troubleshooting 356 components diagnostics 394 partnumbers 448 configuration page printing 52 373 configuration DC controller 320 configuration formatter 319 configuration formatter and DC controller 319 configurations models 2 Configure device menu 363 connecting network cards 56 parallel cable 54 power cord 47 connectors locating 424 control panel assembly part numbers 449 blank troubleshooting 244 cold reset 403 Configure device menu 363 Diagnostics menu 367 error messages 4600 alphabetical 246 error messages 4600 numerical 282 error messages 4650 alphabetical 262 error messages 4650 numerical 300 error messages types of 245 I O menu 366 Information menu 361 label part numbers 437 506 Index label installing 51 locating 9 10 locking menus 76 menu map printing 360 overlay part numbers 437 overlay installing 50 Paper handling menu 362 Print quality menu 364 Printing menu 363 removing 173 Resets menu 367 Service menu 368 406 System setup men
365. only in one mode or the other Try printing on media from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly If the jam does not occur with this media then the customer s media might be causing the problem If the jam occurs from when the printer is turned on check the paper path for small torn pieces of media Also check for broken sensors or flags and check for loose or defective connections If the media is torn folded or wrinkled typically along the leading edge inspect the paper path for items that could be causing the damage If the user is using non HP supplies try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away If necessary instruct the user about proper media storage correct loading technique and printer operation Make sure the user knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing Paper path checklist Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit the free movement of media through the printer and can block the sensors Use the paper path test in the Diagnostic menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds Check the condition of the pickup ro
366. ons of the printer and paper handling accessories If an assembly or part does not have a reference number in the illustration and is not listed in the parts list it is not a field replaceable unit FRU Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only Repair notices Turn the printer off wait five seconds and then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer Failure to completely disconnect the printer can result in severe injury Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes Never operate the printer with any parts removed The sheet metal parts can have sharp edges Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet metal parts Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD ia ESD The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Watch for the ESD reminder when removing printer parts Protect the PCA parts with protective ESD pouches Always use an ESD protected work station when servicing the printer or paper handling accessories If an ESD work station is not available ground yourself to discharge body static by touching the metal chassis of the printer or accessory Required tools Before servi
367. onstration page PRINT RGB SAMPLES HP Color LaserJet Prints color samples for different RGB values 4650 models The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 361 Table 7 40 Information menu continued mm Joe Prints color samples for different CMYK values The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Prints the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk PRINT PCL FONT LIST Prints the available PCL fonts PRINT PS FONT LIST Prints the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Paper handling menu PRINT CMYK SAMPLES HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Use the Paper handling menu to configure input trays by size and type This menu can also be used to set default media size and type It is important to configure the trays correctly with this menu before you print for the first time Note If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers you might be accustomed to configuring tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode To mimic the settings for first mode configure tray 1 for SIZE ANY and TYPE ANY To mimic the settings for cassette mode set either the size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than ANY Table 7 41 Paper handling menu Wee ue emm TRAY 1 SIZE A list of available sizes appears Use this item to configure the media size for tray 1 Th
368. ooting 313 Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued 57 X A printer fan error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on PRINTER ERROR X Description 57 3 Cartridge fan error F2 To continue i i 1 Reconnect the connector 3 cartridge fan vertical fan F2 J1004 on the DC controller 4 formatter fan horizontal fan PCA F1 Immediately after starting 7 power supply fan F3 HP the print operation Color LaserJet 4650 models measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the cartridge fan turn off then on Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 57 4 Formatter fan error F1 1 Reconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller PCA Immediately after turning the printer on measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the formatter fan Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 314 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued heme o emmm Aten 57 X 57 5 Power supply fan error F3 HP Color LaserJet 4650 continued models 1 Reconnect
369. ooting checklist Environment Is the printer installed on a solid level surface Is the printer to particle matter or dust Is the power supply voltage within 10 volts of the specified power source Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet Is the operating environment within the specified parameters as listed in chapter 1 of this manual Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight Does the customer use only supported media Is the media in good condition contains no curis folds and so forth Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits Troubleshooting process 241 Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist continued Input trays e Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications e Is the media placed in the tray correctly e Are the paper guides aligned with the media e Is the cassette correctly installed in the printer Print cartridges e Is each print cartridge correctly installed ETB and fuser e Arethe ETB and fuser correctly installed e Are the top cover and front cover closed Condensation e Does condensation occur following a temperature change particularly in winter following cold storage If so wipe the affected dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved from a cold to a warm
370. or water e The direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems e Magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field e Areas that experience vibration e Walls or other objects Space around the printer must be sufficient for proper access and ventilation Space requirements The printer must have the following amounts of space above and around it dab E gn LP ZE HP Color LaserJet 4600 4650 model space requirements except for the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer 1 530 mm 20 9 inches 2 1294 mm 50 9 inches 3 804 mm 31 7 inches Identification site requirements and specifications 13 Figure 1 9 HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer space requirements 1 530 mm 20 9 inches 2 1294 mm 50 9 inches 3 1373 mm 54 1 inches Physical specifications HP Color 37 kg 81 6 Ibs Fn K 22 3 inches 18 9 inches 18 0 inches 4650 4650n and 4650dn printers HP Color 654 mm 480 mm 456 mm 44 kg 97 0 Ibs SE 25 7 inches 18 9 inches 18 0 inches 4600hdn and 4650dtn printers HP Color 1035 mm 645 mm 460 mm 66 kg 146 6 Ibs LaserJet 4650hdn printer 40 7 inches 25 4 inches 18 1 inches Electrical specifications tem 110 volt V models 220 volt V models Power requirements HP 100 127 V 10 6 220 240 V 10 6 Color LaserJet 4600 models 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Power requirements HP 100 127 V 10 220 240 V 10 Color Laser
371. ory of operation ENWW Figure 5 7 Note ENWW Heater temperature control The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the current flowing to the induction heating coil The heater temperature control circuit is shown in Figure 5 7 Heater temperature control circuit Fuser sleeve Thermo switch Fuser sleeve unit Thermistor 1 TH Thermistor 2 Relay drive circuit 24V RL201 oo RLI TH2 3 DC controller ere F 1 1008 MOa 1 2 MAINTHI 4 6 SUBTHI 5 gt d 3 3V y Ki 1 li Safety monitor i i circuit i IC1012 Current control Amperage 1 4 PRANGE 7 CPU circuit setting i NES ACLINEI 6 x i i v 1 1 8 Constant 8 TMPCONI 8 current control Alternating ret Iha 4 WDGIK 9 IC1015 couple ASIC i Heater temperature control circuit The two thermistors that are attached to the fuser sleeve TH1 and TH2 detect the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve The main thermistor TH1 controls the fuser temperature and the sub thermistor TH2 detects overheating at the end of the fuser sleeve When the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve increases resistance
372. osition so that the printer will automatically detect the size Load the specified media into the tray Confirm that the guides are in the correct position Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position Printer error troubleshooting 269 Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Cor Acton Message LOAD TRAY xx lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt Recommended move tray switch to standard LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press Loading program XX Do not power off MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To continue press 47 If no paper in tray MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press 270 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job The size specified in the job is a detectable size Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job No other tray is available Programs and fonts can be stored in the printer file system They are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on The XX specifies a sequence number that indicates the program that is being loaded
373. ot dd e e Po UR EL e p eos 26 OZONE PrOGUCUON m 26 Power consumption sssssssssssesssseeeeenenen eene nnne rrere nsns in nnn nent er tes E nnns 26 Paper USE c D EE 26 Plastics cennin EIE 26 HP LaserJet printing supplies srnnrnnnnnrrnnrnnrnnrenrnn nr iiaa iaria 26 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information 27 Klee e Be e 27 Material restrictions icici aeneo tenete rne chen tedsasannbuaaneacedecubaaddaenusaadewsdasadeaamecsnnacesss 27 For more InformoatlOl ent eee e e e e n te a a ta gd dad dc dde nnt ead 27 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement sss nennen 28 Country region laser safety statements nennen 30 Canadian DOC regulations sss eene nennen nennen enne nnns 30 EMlist tem nt KOrea e tee Eee et Ie e ne be date e eene Ux Eg stedtvasead dies 30 VCCI cusurMai e 30 Laser Statement for Finland eene ntes 31 2 Service approach Service approach 34 Parts and Supplies TT 35 Ordering parts supplies and accessories over the Internet ssssissessnsseesseererrnre nennen 35 Ordering directly through the embedded Web server for printers with network COMMECTIONS E 35 Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software HP Color LaserJet 4650 modele OMY EE EE EEE 35 Le le DEN e 36 ENWW iii SUPPUES Kano EIE EES 36 World Wide Web EE 36 HP Service Parts Information 3 tritani tn ata conn nda ead ae ta dada Ld era er
374. oving the fuser 2 Using your fingers or needle nose pliers pinch and release the white plastic clips callout 1 on the damper arm on the left side of the cover It is easier to pinch these clips if you tip the top cover forward slightly 3 Disengage the tab callout 2 and remove the retaining block Push the cover to the left to release the hinge pin on the right side and then pull the cover to the right to release the hinge pin on the left side PELTI LIII Figure 6 3 Remove the top cover 1 of 2 mm Figure 6 4 Remove the top cover 2 of 2 166 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear top cover 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover 2 Remove three screws callout 1 3 Insert a flat blade screwdriver between the rear top and side covers on the the right side of the printer 4 Liftthe screw driver slightly to disengage the tabs callout 2 in Figure 6 6 Remove the rear top cover 2 of 3 on the right side of the printer 5 Repeat steps three and four for the left side tabs callout 2 in Figure 6 7 Remove the rear top cover 3 of 3 of the top rear cover and then remove the rear top cover Ss Figure 6 5 Remove the rear top cover 1 of 3 ENWW Covers and external components 167 Figure 6 6 Remove the rear top cover 2 of 3 EE SES Figure 6 7 Remove the rear top cover 3 of 3 168 Chapter 6 Remo
375. ower up or while media is moving e Whether the media is damaged and if it is where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the sheet stops e Whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray e Whether the jam occurs only when using duplex printing e Whether a particular type of media is jamming or not jamming e Whether any of the supplies are non HP non HP supplies are known to cause jams e Whether the customer is storing the media correctly overloading the trays damaging the edge of the media during loading or using media that has already been fed through the printer 326 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Note ENWW General paper path troubleshooting Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem After you have identified the cause use the tables in this section to find a recommended solution Use the paper path test in the Diagnostics menu to print pages while troubleshooting View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others Try to identify a pattern Use the event log to determine the frequency of a particular jam If a jam occurs repeatedly at approximately the same page count consider it a single jam that the customer tried to clear Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify whether the problem occurs
376. page counts and serial number can be restored to the formatter and DC controller After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash turn the printer power on When the READY message appears on the control panel display you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM Turn the printer power off and replace the DC controller Turn the printer power on When the READY message appears on the control panel display wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM After installing the replacement formatter and DC controller perform a full calibration procedure three times See Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Formatter new or previously installed in another printer The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter so that printer configuration information for example the duplexing option page counts and serial number can be restored to the formatter and DC controller After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash turn the printer power on When the READY message appears on the control panel display you must wait five minutes before using th
377. panel board Engine control system 121 Laser scanner assembly Figure 5 11 122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation The laser scanner system receives a signal from the formatter and forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge The printer has a separate laser scanner unit for each color Each of these has the same structure which is shown in Figure 5 11 Laser scanner system Formatter PCB VDATA VDATA BD NM PDOUT CNTRLO CNTRLI DC controller PCB VDATA VDATA ACC DEC BDI Laser driver PCB BD mirror Photosensitive drum Laser scanner system Scanner motor control Collimator lens Cylindrical lens Sixfaced mirror Scanner driver Scanner motor V Focusing lens l BD PCB y The scanner motor control rotates the scanner motor in order to place the laser beam at the correct position on the photosensitive drum Figure 5 12 Scanner motor control circuit shows the circuit diagram for the scanner motor control ENWW Note Figure 5 12 ENWW If a scanner motor error occurs the print engine stops and an error message appears on the control panel display DC controller PCB E 1C1012 CPU J1009 JAO2AT atico C 1 6 2 2 j Y BD PCB 24VA Scanner moter A J403A 4 K Scanner dr
378. panese languages Note For more information about Windows 3 1x drivers go to www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 Select the right printer driver for your needs Select a printer driver based on the way that you use the printer Certain printer features are available only in the PCL 6 drivers See the printer driver Help for available features e Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of printer features For general office printing the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality e Use the PCL 5c driver available on the Web only if backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers or older printers is necessary e Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript specific programs such as Adobe and Corel for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs or for PS font DIMM support Note The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages Printer driver Help Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using the Help button the F1 button on the computer keyboard or a question mark symbol in the upper right corner of the printer driver depending on the Windows operating system used These Help screens give detailed information about the specific driver Printer driver Help is separate from your program Help ENWW Printer drivers 63 Software for Macintosh computers Note 64 The HP installer provides PostScr
379. paper Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges e To order supplies in the U S go to www hp com go ljsupplies e To order supplies worldwide go to www hp com ghp buyonline html e To order accessories go to www hp com e For additional information about supported media weights and sizes go to www hp com support ljpaperguide The following table contains information about the types of print media that are supported for the various paper handling features Print media 17 Table 1 4 Supported media specifications Supported media Media specifications Capacity Paper HP Color LaserJet A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom 4600 series 60 to 163 g m 16 to 43 Ib HP Color LaserJet 4650 series 60 to 199 Minimum size 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in g m 16 to 53 Ib 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in TransparenciesA4 0 13 mm 5 mil maximum stack height Letter of 10 mm 0 6 in Glossy film A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom 0 13 mm 5 mil Minimum size 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in Maximum size 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Glossy paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom 75 g m to 120 g m 20 Ib to 32 Ib Minimum size 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in Maximum size
380. paper pickup unit directly in front of the right side white roller The flag is recessed above the registration shutter in the paper pickup unit The fuser might be hot wait 10 minutes for it to cool down e B Open the ETB and wait for the fuser to cool down The fuser inlet flag is located at the front center of the fuser Reach the flag from above the black print cartridge e C The fuser delivery flag is located at the upper center of the fuser behind the fuser Caution label It is wrapped in a clear roller e D The output bin full sensor is located on the upper rear edge of the fuser e E Remove tray 2 The tray 1 multipurpose tray paper presence sensor flag is the black lever on the front right of the paper tray cavity e F Remove tray 2 The tray 2 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity e G Remove tray 2 The tray 2 paper size sensor switches are located on the left rear side of the paper tray cavity e H The door switch is located on the right front of the printer frame underneath the right cover Table 7 50 Sensor test letter codes Letter Sensor switch Idle value number doors closed paper in trays 1 and 2 390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 50 Sensor test letter codes continued Sensor switch Idle value number doors closed paper in trays 1 and 2 ee m 8 re fos Manual sensor test special mode test HP Color
381. pen the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES 5 Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES The message PRINTING RGB SAMPLES appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the RGB samples page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the RGB samples page UJ HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer inven RGB samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Tools for troubleshooting 381 Print the CMYK samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 only The CMYK samples page is used for CMYK color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Press MENU to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES 5 Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES The message PRINTING CMYK SAMPLES appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the CMYK samples page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the CMYK samples page invent Figure 7 16 CMYK samples page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Diagnostics LED diagnostics Use the following procedure to help identify the cause of high level printer problems These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer s power on sequence The LED that the procedure refers to is on the formatter
382. photographs properly with this selection you must manage image color in the program or operating system Adjusting color balance This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high quality color output In situations that require critical color control you can manually adjust the density balance of the four toner colors The available range for each color is from 5 to 5 The default value is 0 This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones and affects all print jobs Image formation troubleshooting 341 To adjust color density 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE menu Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE menu Press V to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press to select PRINT QUALITY Press or V to highlight ADJUST COLOR Press to select ADJUST COLOR Press or V to highlight the desired color O 0 GR E MS Press to select the desired color CH Press A or V to highlight the correct density setting Press to select the density setting N Press Y to set the density for the next color ow After setting the density for each color press Pause Resume HP Color LasrJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENW
383. pl cing the fuser T P ide 90 Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models seed 93 Installing memory and font DIMMs HP Color LaserJet 4600 models seesccceneeneeen 93 Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4650 models seed 97 Installing memory and fonts HP Color LaserJet 4650 models eeeneneeeeeeeeneenen 97 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card sssssesee emen 105 79 Cleaning the printer and accessories WARNING CAUTION CAUTION Clean the outside surfaces with a water dampened cloth Observe the warning and caution below Before you begin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area It might be hot To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Component Cleaning Method Outside covers Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth part number 5090 3379 or a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside general With a dry lint free cloth wipe any dust spilled toner and paper particles from the paper path area the registration roller and the print cartridge cavity ETB attaching roller Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dampen the paper with alcohol Paper
384. pose tray ENWW Covers and external components 171 Front cover 1 Remove the multipurpose tray See Multipurpose tray tray 1 2 Unhook the two spring rods callout 1 from the slots callout 2 on both sides of the printer CAUTION Spring tension holds the rods in place Use caution when removing them Tilt the tray up slightly to lessen the spring tension which makes the rods easier to remove 3 Press outward on the tray near the tray hinge pins and remove the cover Figure 6 12 Remove the front cover Reinstallation tip Make sure that the rods are engaged in the slots in the printer frame callout 2 when reinstalling the front cover 172 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Control panel 1 Open the top cover if you have not already removed it 2 Remove three screws callout 1 3 Lift the right side of the control panel disconnect one connector callout 2 unwind the wires from the stay callout 3 and remove the control panel Figure 6 13 Remove the control panel 1 of 3 Figure 6 14 Remove the control panel 2 of 3 ENWW Covers and external components 173 iom n E ii Figure 6 15 Remove the control panel 3 of 3 A D Installing a new overlay HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed Overlays are available for several languag
385. printer performance when you are printing from a network They also provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network This eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a server or a workstation and allows you to place the printer closer to the network users If the printer is configured through an EIO network card configure that card through the printer control panel Configure device menu HP Jetdirect print servers HP Jetdirect print servers network cards can be installed in one of the printer EIO slots These cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location HP Jetdirect print servers also support the simple network management protocol SNMP which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software Installation of these cards and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator Configure the card either through the printer control panel or by using HP Web Jetadmin software See the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information about which external devices or EIO network cards are supported Available enhanced UO interfaces HP Jetdirect print servers network cards provide software solutions for the following interfaces e Novell NetWare e Microsoft Windows and Windows
386. printing directly from a flash memory card If you install a camera type flash memory card a message appears on the control panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card If you choose to reformat the card all data on the card will be lost You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS documents or use many downloaded fonts Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple collated copies at the maximum speed Single inline memory modules SIMMs and dual inline memory modules DIMMs that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer Before ordering additional memory see how much is currently installed by printing a configuration page To order additional memory see chapter 8 Printing a configuration page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 Press MENU to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press to print the configuration page Installing memory and fonts HP Color LaserJet 4650 models You can install more memory for the printer and you can also install a font card so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet Static electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package
387. put output EIO network card the network card is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn 4650n 4650dn 4650dtn and 4650hdn printers Fast InfraRed FIR connection HP Web Jetadmin software Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 compliant HP CLJ 4650 models Auxiliary connector HP CLJ 4650 models USB 1 1 connection Note HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Both USB and parallel connections are supported but cannot be used at the same time ENWW Printer features 7 Table 1 2 Printer features continued fom NNNM Supplies Supplies status page contains information about toner level page count and estimated pages remaining No shake cartridge design The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities by using embedded Web server or the printer Status and Alerts 8 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Printer assemblies Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 ENWW HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Front view HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ce JO Om P ob A Output bin Printer control panel Top cover Front cover includes tray 1 Tray 2 500 sheet standard tray Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder optional On off switch Access to print cartridge transfer unit and fuser Back view HP Color LaserJet 4600 models CO JO om P oh Output bin On off switch Tray 3 500 sheet
388. r ENWW Unpacking the printer 45 Installing the media tray 1 Remove the tray from the printer Push the media lift plate down until it locks Remove the cardboard from the tray CAUTION You must push the media lift plate down until it locks every time you open the tray Jams will result if the media lift plate is not locked in the down position 2 Adjust the rear length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being loaded Slide the width guides to the desired size 3 Load media face up Make sure that the front corners of the media fit under the front corner tabs 46 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Connecting power 1 Plug the ac power cord into the printer and into the power outlet 2 Turnthe printer on ENWW Connecting power 47 Installing the print cartridges 1 Open the top cover Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open If the transfer unit is punctured print quality problems can result 2 Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side 3 Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock Remove and discard the orange shipping lock 48 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 4 Remove t
389. r 2 x 500 sheet feeder A 419 PCA locations vnr tette trie br cte ctr Mec lb he trud ier ons 420 ENWW ENWW Figure 7 45 Figure 7 46 Figure 7 47 Figure 7 48 Figure 7 49 Figure 7 50 Figure 7 51 Figure 7 52 Figure 7 53 Figure 7 54 Figure 7 55 Figure 7 56 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 8 24 PCA 2 x 500 sheet feeder cc cc ccecccseeecccteesidiccteeeestedecenesdegedendecdegapeeseddedbensece 421 Location of DC controller PCA components HP Color LaserJet 4600 121010 gt EE 422 Location of DC controller PCA components HP Color LaserJet 4650 fnodels RE 423 Location of connectors HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 424 Location of connectors 1 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 425 Location of connectors 2 of 2 HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 426 Connectors 500 sheet feeder ceeeceeceneeeeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 426 Connectors 2 x 500 sheet feeder sss 427 General circuit diagram HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 428 General circuit diagram HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 429 General circ
390. r 4 fuser motor rotation error 5 print cartridge motor startup error 6 print cartridge motor rotation error 9 ETB motor startup error A ETB motor rotation error B developing disengaging motor startup error C developing disengaging motor rotation error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow Printer error troubleshooting Turn the printer off and then on This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed ETB motor error 1 Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector J4017 Reconnect the connectors J4022 for the ETB motor J4017 between the ETB and the printer and J4014 on the DC controller PCA Replace the ETB motor Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Fuser motor error 1 Reconnect the connectors J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCA Replace the fuser drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 297 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message 59 X Y continued 62 NO SYSTEM No system was found To continue turn off then on 64 PRINTER ERROR For help press
391. r LaserJet 4650 models The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Smearing This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for smearing Table 7 36 Causes for smearing A poor contact exists in the printer ground and Clean each print cartridge ground contact and cartridge ground contacts the printer ground contact If they are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the cartridge or replace the printer ground contact The fuser inlet guide is dirty or contains debris Clean the fuser inlet guide The cartridge shutters are not opening Make sure the cartridge shutter bar is operating correctly Misplaced image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for misplaced images Image defects 351 CAUTION Note Table 7 37 Causes for misplaced image The media is skewed See Paper is skewed to resolve the skew The oblique rollers are worn this issue applies Replace the oblique rollers to duplex printing only The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models R
392. r LaserJet 4600 models 384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 18 ENWW Formatter LED HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer The printer contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality paper path noise component and timing issues Diagnostics mode Some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode During the special diagnostics mode the printer can perform actions that would normally cause the printer to enter an error state Always follow the control panel directions in the Diagnostic menu to exit the special diagnostics mode correctly and return the printer to a normal state Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode Four diagnostic tests put the engine into a special state e Disable cartridge check e Sensor test e Manual sensor test e Component test While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode the following message should appear READY DIAGNOSTICS MODE TO EXIT PRESS CANCEL JOB KEY HP Color LaserJet 4600 models TO EXIT PRESS STOP KEY HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Diagnostics 385 Note WARNING Figure 7 19 Note When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode these four tests appear in the menu and are available to be run To gain access into oth
393. r contains information about the following topics ltz 240 Troubleshooting Process EE 241 Pre troubleshooting checklist see emen 241 Troubleshooting EE 242 Troubleshooting power on sssssseseee eene eene ennemis 244 Printer error troubleshooting eoe ciet innia REESEN EENS EES 245 Status messages rdiet qd nae O E proc ERR OE Lew died Pages 245 Warming IIIS 245 Error messages E 245 Critical error messages koc re cbe cce ta cte e Dc andes eds a RR P Cue seed ui cia 245 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 246 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 262 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 282 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 300 Replacement parts configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ss 319 Formaiter and DC controller rci dee te dt edet etes 319 Formatter new or previously installed in another printer eeseeeeeeee 319 DC Controller new or previously installed in another printer sssssssse 320 Paper path troubleshooting sssssssssssssssessee eene eren 321 A re 321 Eine E 321 Jam locations by error message
394. r help Follow the instructions on the control panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply Press and Y to step through the instructions Insert the transfer unit or make sure the installed transfer unit is fully seated Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that the ETB connectors 44017 on the ETB and J1014 on the DC controller PCA are good Replace the connectors as necessary Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Printer error troubleshooting 251 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued emm Acton Message MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To continue press If no paper in tray MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To use another tray press NON HP SUPPLY DETECTED NON HP CARTRIDGE IN USE alternates with Ready For menus press 252 Chapter7 Troubleshooting A job requires a specific paper type
395. r is defective Replace the fuser DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Jams in the duplex path The following table describes the causes of and solution for jams in the duplex path Table 7 13 Causes for jams in the duplex path The oblique rollers are worn or damaged Replace the oblique rollers ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 331 Table 7 13 Causes for jams in the duplex path continued The oblique roller drive gears are worn or Replace the ETB unit Calibrate the printer after damaged replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The duplex feed guide is damaged Replace the ETB unit Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Paper transport troubleshooting ENWW If media is feeding incorrectly use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem Multiple pages are fed The following table describes the causes of and solutions for multiple pages feeding Table 7 14 Causes for multiple pages feeding The separation tabs in the cassette are
396. r is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions Verify that the printing environment is within specifications See Environmental specifications 336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Print quality problems that are associated with jams Take the following actions to prevent problems that are associated with printer jams e To avoid problems after a jam make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path e If the printer recently jammed print two to three pages to clean the printer e If the media does not pass through the fuser image defects might appear on subsequent documents Print two to three pages to clean the printer If the problem persists see the next section to print a troubleshooting page Print quality troubleshooting pages Use the built in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press V to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Press to print the pages The printer returns to the Ready state after you print the print quality troubleshooting pages Understanding color variations The printed output might not match the computer screen and the colors printed on successive pages might not match While color variations are inherent in this printing method they can indicate changes in t
397. r will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a file directory page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a font list page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a menu map page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed The printer is generating the registration page The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary Follow the instructions on the printed pages Follow the instructions on the printed pages Printer error troubleshooting Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton Message Printing RGB SAMPLES Printing SUPPLIES STATUS Printing USAGE PAGE Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes Processing Processing copy lt X gt of Y Processing from tray XX RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE To clear press alternates with Read
398. registration detection assembly 54 21 54 22 54 23 or 54 24 error Check the connections Replace the toner level sensing PCA Replace the DC controller Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued Message 54 XX 00 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 54 20 00 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 55 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 55 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on Printing cannot continue The CPR sensor out of range X values 15 yellow 16 magenta 17 cyan 18 black Printing cannot continue The CPR sensor out of range The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection emm Acton 0 For step by step information press Turn the printer off and then on For step by step information press Turn the printer off and then on Press 2 to continue Turn the printer off and then on Reseat or replace the connectors between the DC controller and the formatter Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Replace the formatter Initialize NVRAM See NVRAM initialization Printer error troublesh
399. replace the DC controller PCA the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of these items you must access the Print Quality menu and select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero See Quick Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Access denied An attempt has been made to Contact the printer MENUS LOCKED modify amenu item but the administrator to change settings printer administrator has enabled the control panel security mechanism The message will disappear shortly and the printer will return to the READY or BUSY state BAD OPTIONAL TRAY The 500 sheet input tray is not Verify that the printer is on CONNECTION making a sufficient connection a level surface withthe printer Turn the printer off Reseat the printer on the 500 sheet input tray If the printer is on the optional printer stand make sure that the support straps are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer Turn the printer on after reseating the 500 sheet input tray Calibrating The printer is calibrating Canceling The printer is in the process of No action is necessary can
400. ress REPLACE FUSER KIT The printer is executing a Component test and the Belt only component is selected The printer is executing a Disable cartridge check or Component test and Cartridge Motor component is selected The identified print cartridge has reached its end of life Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced The fuser kit is at its end of life information Press and V to step through the instructions Remove all of the print cartridges Remove one print cartridge Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Replace the fuser to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Printer error troubleshooting 257 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Cor Acton Message REPLACE SUPPLIES For status press REPLACE TRANSFER KIT For help press Resend upgrade Rotating alienation motor To exit press CANCEL JOB Rotating belt drive To exit press CANCEL JOB Rotating color cartridge motor To exit press CANCEL JOB Rotating fuser motor To exit press
401. ridge C9723 67902 Magenta print cartridge Europe C9724A RG5 6484 040CN new Image transfer kit 4600 Only Q3675A RG5 7455 000CN new Image transfer kit 4650 Only C9725A C9660 69016 exchange Image fuser kit 110 volt 4600 RG5 6493 110CN new Only Q3676A RG5 7450 000CN new Image fuser kit 110 volt 4650 Only C9726A C9660 69017 exchange Image fuser kit 220 volt 4600 RG5 6517 110CN new Only Q3677A RG5 7451 000CN new Image fuser kit 220 volt 4650 Only C9660A C9660 69011 exchange Formatter simplex 4600 Only C9660 67911 new Q3999A Q3999 69001 exchange Formatter simplex 4650 Only mi Q3999 67091 new C9661A C9661 69002 exchange Formatter duplex 4600 Only C966 1 67902 new Note The only difference between the print cartridges listed above is that the Europe only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 439 Common fasteners Table 8 3 Common fasteners amer e mme qum Screw machine M3x8 xA9 1276 000CN To hold plastic to with washer metal example the skins Screw self To hold plastic to tapping plastic Screw truss head M3x6 xA9 1275 000CN Sheet metal to sheet metal example formatter pan Retaining Ring e To hold gears type into place 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm M3 M4 p ex 9 beer E 0 14 mm 16 mm 25 mm 440 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 44
402. ridge shutter open close mechanism is The shutters in each print cartridge should open damaged as you close the ETB If a shutter does not open replace that print cartridge Also check for a This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled damaged shutter mechanism in the printer into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt Paper transport troubleshooting 333 Table 7 16 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part two paper path exit The fuser inlet guide is dirty Clean the fuser inlet guide The fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged Clean the pressure roller If the pressure roller is damaged replace the fuser The fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged Clean the fuser sleeve If the fuser sleeve is damaged replace the fuser The fuser delivery roller is dirty Clean the fuser delivery roller Paper is skewed Table 7 17 Causes for skewed paper The paper dust or dirt has accumulated in the Clean the rollers cassette feed roller or registration roller The cassette feed roller and registration roller Replace the paper pickup assembly are worn irregularly The separation tabs in the cassette are Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the damaged tray 2 tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 tray or replace the cassette sheet feeder The registration shutter is defective Make sure that the registration shutter moves smoothly its spring is in place and it is clean If the registration shutter is dama
403. right end of the clip Remove the laser scanner retaining bars 1 Remove the laser scanner cover plate See Remove the laser scanner cover plate 2 Pullthe cables for the four laser scanner connectors free of the printer chassis 3 Onthe left side of the printer remove one screw above the DC controller callout 1 4 Push the top of the sheet metal scanner retaining bar towards the laser scanner units callout 2 204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5 Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer CAUTION The scanner retaining bars are under spring tension Remove them carefully Figure 6 54 Remove the left side laser scanner retaining bar 1 of 2 left side of printer Figure 6 55 Remove the left side laser scanner retaining bar 2 of 2 rear of printer 6 On the top surface of the right side of the printer remove one screw callout 3 7 On the right side of the printer push the top of the sheet metal scanner retaining bar in towards the laser scanners callout 4 ENWW Internal components 205 8 Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer Figure 6 56 Remove the right side laser scanner retaining bar 1 of 2 right side of printer Figure 6 57 Remove the right side laser scanner retaining bar 2 of 2 rear of printer Reinstallation tip Reinstall the laser scanner retaining bars in the same order that you removed them the left side and then the right sid
404. rint the defet gt 14 mm 0 5 inches gt 33 mm 1 3 inches __1 38 mm 1 5 inches 3 39 mm 1 52 inches 63 mm 2 5 inches gt 75 mm 2 9 inches gt 94 mm 3 7 inches gt 107 mm 4 2 inches gt Figure 7 4 Repetitive defects ruler 2 of 2 ENWW Image defects 355 Interface troubleshooting Note CAUTION Communications checks Communication problems are normally the customer s responsibility Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett Packard Company warranty Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems If the printer is not connected to an MS DOS based host proceed to the Table 7 39 Communications check table Table 7 39 Communications check Is your computer configured to the parameters These parameters are required in order to that are described in the configuration communicate with the printer Verify that the instructions configuration of the computer s communications port matches these parameters Note If these parameters are not set correctly an error message might appear on the control panel display EIO troubleshooting If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network verify the operation of the print server Print a configuration page If the Jetdirect card does not appear un
405. rmines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold A job cannot be stored because of a memory disk or configuration problem The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job The printer is coming out of powersave mode Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed To change the media type press C Use and Y to highlight the type and then press 2 to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal set the tray switch to the STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions To change the media size to other sizes leave the tray switch in the CUSTOM position adjust the guides against the media and close the tray Select the paper handling menu from the control panel Configure the size for the tray To change media type press G2 Use and Y to highlight the type and then press M to select a choice Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive into the printer If a disk drive is installed delete any previously stored print jobs Highlight the media with A and Y Press to select a choice Not all messages are described in the tables those messages that are not listed are self explanatory Printer error troubleshooting 261 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Note Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to
406. rnates with For status press The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file System command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed Printing can continue Turn the printer off and then on If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on To enable writing to the flash memory turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the control panel display turn the printer off and then on Press and then press for help Press and Y to step through the instructions The wrong PIN was typed Type the correct PIN After three incorrect PIN entries the printer returns to Ready INCORRECT SUPPLIES For status press INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY xx For help press At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low This message
407. roblems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett Packard Company warranty or service agreements Print cartridges and ETB It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and ETB when servicing internal printer components Place the print cartridges and ETB in a safe place while they are out of the printer To avoid damaging the print cartridges do not expose them to direct bright light Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge Do not place any items on the ETB If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged print quality problems will result Avoid touching the belt surface Skin oils can cause print quality problems For instructions about removing the print cartridges see chapter 4 For instructions about removing the ETB see chapter 4 164 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Covers and external components The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of covers and external components Rear cover 1 Remove two screws callout 1 2 Pull out on the left side of the rear cover and slide it to the left to remove it callout 2 Figure 6 2 Remove the rear cover ENWW Covers and external components 165 Top cover WARNING The fuser might be hot Wait 10 minutes for it to cool down before removing it 1 Lift the top cover and remove the fuser See Replacing the fuser for instructions about rem
408. ronment configuration The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected 120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW PJL overview Printer job language PJL is an integral part of configuration in addition to the standard printer command language PCL With standard cabling PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as the following Two way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection The printer can tell the host about such things as the control panel settings and the control panel settings can be changed from the host Dynamic I O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I O The printer can receive data from more than one I O simultaneously until the I O buffer is full This can occur even when the printer is offline Context sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personality PS or PCL of each job and configure itself to serve that personality Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next For example if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing PML The printer management language PML allows remote configuration and status readback through the I O ports Control panel The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control
409. room If so allow the printer to sit at room temperature for one to two hours Miscellaneous Check for and remove any non HP components print cartridges memory modules and EIO cards from the printer If hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software contact the Customer Care Center see chapter 1 Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting For any print quality issues calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Troubleshooting basics The procedure that follows highlights the general processes that you can use to isolate and solve printer hardware problems quickly Each step depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step 242 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Note ENWW A no answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced section in this chapter and follow the instructions there After completing this additional testing proceed to the next major step in the troubleshooting flowchart 1 Turn the power on Does a readable message appear on the control panel display If yes then go to step 2 If no then check the following items If the printer control panel display is blan
410. roximate replacement intervals for supply items Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate To install or replacement order interval Black K print REPLACE 9 000 pages 2 7 months Installing the print cartridge BLACK cartridges CARTRIDGE For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Cyan C print REPLACE CYAN 8 000 pages 2 7 months Installing the print cartridge CARTRIDGE cartridges For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Magenta M print REPLACE 8 000 pages 2 7 months Installing the print cartridge MAGENTA cartridges CARTRIDGE For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Yellow Y print REPLACE 8 000 pages 2 7 months Installing the print cartridge YELLOW cartridges CARTRIDGE For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Image transfer kit REPLACE 120 000 Dages 40 months Replacing the ETB TRANSFER KIT transfer unit For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 ENWW Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 81 Table 4 1 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items continued Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate To install or replacement order interval Image fuser kit REPLACE 150 000 pages 50 months Replacing the FUSER KIT fuser For part numbers see Supplies and accessories in chapter 8 Approximate life expectancies based on 3 000 pages per month The
411. rtridge then back on memory tag or at least one v ri ru alternates with memory tag is missing Press for more information For help press 10 00 00 black print cartridge 10 00 01 cyan print cartridge 10 00 02 magenta print cartridge 10 00 03 yellow print cartridge Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels 300 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm 0 em 0 Message 10 10 YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR alternates with For help press 10 30 YY alternates with For help press 13 0A JAM IN TOP COVER AREA For help press ENWW The printer cannot read or write to the print cartridge memory tag or the memory tag is missing 10 10 00 black print cartridge 10 010 01 cyan print cartridge 10 10 02 magenta print cartridge 10 10 03 yellow print cartridge A non HP print cartridge is installed 10 30 00 black print cartridge 10 30 01 cyan print cartridge 10 30 02 magenta print cartridge 10 30 03 yellow print cartridge A jam exists in the top cover Turn the printer off and then back on Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot If the error follows the cartridge replace that cartridge Otherwise continue with step 3 Reseat the connectors between the memory PCA J60
412. rvice ID 407 Service menu 368 406 settings drivers 61 locking menus 76 network parameters 71 restoring defaults 367 Settings tab embedded Web server 371 setup See installation sharing Windows 66 site requirements 12 size detection paper 148 158 size detection switch removing 195 skewed pages troubleshooting 334 small size paper detection 150 smearing troubleshooting 351 software downloading 36 drivers supported 62 installing on Macintosh 68 installing on Macintosh networks 67 installing on Windows 65 66 69 installing on Windows networks 66 Macintosh included 64 networks 72 settings 61 utilities 73 solenoids diagnostics 396 locating 416 removing 183 space requirements 12 specifications acoustic 16 electrical 14 environment protection 26 environmental 15 features 5 media 17 site requirements 12 supply storage 16 speed feed control 150 pages per minute 5 SRGB color 339 static eliminator part number 455 static precautions 160 status and alerts software 372 status messages 245 status page printing 361 375 STBY period 108 storing supplies 16 supplies locating 84 ordering 35 434 partnumbers 439 514 Index recycling 26 replacement intervals 81 replacing 85 status page printing 361 375 storing 16 support customer 37 435 swatch book color matching 338 switch boxes 356 switches 411 System setup menu 365 T technical support 37 435 telephone support 37 435 temperature environment sensor
413. ry connection configuration HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 55 Kellen EE 56 Enhanced VO EIO configuration 2 tete eene te cn eae ca 57 Wireless Printing vass 59 ane Tu CEET 61 NEIER CEET 62 ie lte Ee 62 Select the right printer driver for your needs mrarsrvrrnnnvvvvennnrnsrvnnnnnrsrvnnenersrrnnsssssrrnnnens 63 Printer driver Hiel danke eaten Em 63 Software for Macintosh computers ann nnnnnennonnnnnnnn nar nnnnennernernnnnnnnnn 64 dcm ed 64 HP LaserJet UtlityaL Rm 64 Installing the printing system software ssssssessseeenm eme enne d 65 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections 65 Installing Windows printing system software for networks ssssessssrrssessrrssesrrssreernssees 66 To set up Windows sharing to use the printer on a network sssssssssssssss 66 Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks sssssssssssssrisseeerrrsserrrrssres 67 Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections USB HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only sssssssseeeeene eee nenne 68 Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected 69 Network configuration sssssseseeeeneneene nennen nennen enne enne nennen nnne enne 71 Configuring the printer for th
414. s 2 Select this printer and select Properties 3 On the Configure tab click More 4 Inthe Total Memory field type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed 5 Click OK Enabling the language font DIMM HP Color LaserJet 4600 models If you installed a language font DIMM in the printer you must select the Font DIMM option in the printer driver in order for the font DIMM to work correctly To enable fonts from the PCL 5c and PCL 6 printer drivers for Windows follow this procedure 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers Select this printer and select Properties On the Configure tab click More Select the Font DIMM check box In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box click Add to add the font file In the Add Font DIMM dialog box browse to the location of the font file select the font file and then click OK In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box select the installed DIMM 8 Click OK oa bk ON N Printer memory HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 95 Checking DIMM installation HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Verify that the DIMMs are installed correctly and are working 1 Turn the printer on Check that the Ready light is on after the printer has gone through the startup sequence If an error message appears a DIMM might be incorrectly installed 2 Print a configuration page 3 Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare
415. s causes of 329 locating 9 10 media specifications 18 model configurations 2 partnumbers 436 474 PCA removing 225 pickup rollers removing 224 pickup feed operations 144 153 top cover plate removing 222 A accessories partnumbers 436 acoustic specifications 16 ENWW adaptive halftoning 341 alerts e mail 372 AppleTalk networks 59 attaching operations 134 auto continue setting 245 autoconfiguration driver 61 AUTOEXEC BAT file 356 Automatic color settings 340 auxiliary connection 55 auxiliary connector locating 10 B belt test 395 bin delivery unit operations 151 fullsensor removing 219 locating 9 10 blank images troubleshooting 346 blank spots troubleshooting 350 Bluetooth support 60 blurring troubleshooting 350 bypassing calibration 404 C cables connecting 54 cables part numbers 436 calibration 136 404 Canadian DOC regulations 30 cartridge fan removing 220 cartridges diagnostics 388 395 instaling 48 locating 84 operations 126 ordering 35 434 recycling 26 removing during service 164 replacement intervals 81 replacing 85 status page printing 361 375 storing 16 cassette See Tray 2 catridges part numbers 439 circuit diagram 428 cleaning operations 136 Index 505 cleaning the printer 80 clearable warning messages 119 245 CMYK sample page printing 361 382 cold reset 403 color automatic settings 340 balance adjusting 341 dark troubleshooting 345 Edge Control setting 341 Halft
416. s menu to reset the default paper size to A4 LETTER and A4 are the only available values 408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Diagrams Main parts Figure 7 31 Location of main parts Fuser sleeve Pressure roller Transfer charging rollers ETB belt Separation pad Multi purpose tray pickup roller Main thermistor Sub thermistor Thermoswitch Cassette pickup rollers A OO JO Oo E ob e ENWW Diagrams 409 Figure 7 32 Main parts 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Upper cassette pickup assembly 2 Drive assembly 410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Switches Figure 7 33 Location of switches Table 7 54 Switches Cassette paper size detection switch Cassette paper size detection switch Cassette paper size detection switch On off switch SW1001 Test print switch ENWW Diagrams 411 4 AN A DE Li Figure 7 34 Switches 2 x 500 sheet feeder 1 Upper cassette paper size detection switch SW1 2 Lower cassette paper size detection switch SW2 412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Sensors Environment Sensor CLJ 4650 only amp Figure 7 35 Location of sensors Figure 7 36 Sensors on the paper pickup unit sensors are on the back of the PCA 1 Cassette paper sensor PS1 2 Multipurpose tray paper sensor PS2 3 Paper leading edge sensor PS3 4 Overhead transparency sensor PS4 ENWW Diagrams 413 Figure 7 37 Fuser sensors and output bin
417. s13 THU S ensodxa fueuma o isd anos DES LT rms 8 et tg vonoaied i oe Beier young 1000 ones B uonisog ouo unig A IOP os p EE po H H eer l god ES 5 un sesng wises H Je ng Od abeyonr y5iH uondejeg e 18u01 E S ua 2HL sor H n 98d I a os E B worin woes H Josuog uonoeieq or v r a pe ovs Sch Bee l of ser et ae G z uch Or to meer sense WEN BEA GE sor l pee een bh SCH r of ar jen NOS Wun jeuueogjiest RR A an Janaoay n l arte oer wen LZ 7 As i S emsodx Aud o d K Su du mat H L we eneen W vm o ao aveo Den son ten hes E hr uo ER won A CG ui Hr oues obpuve bo our ET kee kene E EH Ze pureo o os euer 3 7 B E risusa omr c Mes EH saw te e JAFN we anita BSH ue won A CG ms Tv E pw zero e s Sen By Br ZSNSNOI ON d D tme A otyr ir eneen W SE rid ogier ONS SCH FY anos map Ast anos H SEN VIVAAH Dem Nos s o mer XXNOM OHL 0LdX33td fy OONIVESH HS OWAH LIVGOON Ej Home aBpuueo w Io wur eco Log S Jun 1uueogjiase1 o rates H DE meer p enes wun Sose Nod S Shy unodd Ee o onm Don kat sey w n ad UE net ra eBpuuen xg o o meer Eve OK ge rer o mer EH Kee TET ONDE Sonved 1osueg uonaeieg uenensBen 10109 i ECH GE i HLENS E Det Kg 89d 13107409 OG De Varer 2 3 zzz 80d lddns jewog JOSn4 3 35 SS 35 z 3 8 8925588 253i 8 z232 12 008888222 00 88 29 9 0 032 45 EIER Peta 282225258 0888883280 2289 2255229922998 93398 B23d5 8829428 E PEES
418. scribes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer which includes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models country region printer version production number of origin model number production code Hewlett Packard 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise Idaho 83704 U S A 50 60 Hz 115V Model No Q3668 DD Serial No JPBB605112 Assembled in U S A printer engine made in Japan Model and serial number label HP Color LaserJet 4600 C9660A HP Color LaserJet 4600n C9692A HP Color LaserJet 4600dn C9661A HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn C9662A HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn C9663A Power and regulatory label The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power rating and regulatory information Identification site requirements and specifications 11 CAUTION Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty for example attempting to change a 110 V printer to a 220 V printer POWER RATING 220 240V Tested To Compty With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE This product conforms with CDRH Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements MANUFACTURED August 97 HEWLETT PACKARD 11311 CHINDEN BLVD BOISE IDAHO 63714 U S A Serial No JPBB123456 Made in Japan KAHENE CO6
419. se home position sensor 10 black drum phase home position sensor 11 Yellow density sensor 12 Magenta density sensor 13 Cyan density sensor 14 Black density sensor 15 Yellow CPR sensor 16 Magenta CPR sensor 17 Cyan CPR sensor 18 Black CPR sensor 19 ETB speed control sensor 20 color plane registration sensor 21 24 toner level sensors Turn the printer off and then on and then check the following items in the order listed 54 1 error Check the fuser See 50 X fuser error 54 3 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 5 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 6 error Check the connections Replace the paper pickup unit 54 7 54 8 54 9 or 54 10 error Check the connections Replace the drum phase sensor for the indicated color 54 11 54 12 54 13 or 54 14 error Check the connections Check the cartridge and replace it if necessary Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 15 54 16 54 17 54 18 Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 19 error Check the ETB connection Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 54 20 error Check the connection Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 21 54 22 54 23 or 54 24 error Check the connections Repl
420. sense whether the cassette tray 2 is installed correctly and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassette Paper size detection switches at the back of the cassette send this information to the DC controller The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches See Table 5 6 Cassette paper size detection Figure 5 35 Cassette paper size detection switches shows how the switches are stacked Table 5 6 Cassette paper size detection pa es qe 7 noe mo e Ja k Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded creating an error in paper size detection The paper leading edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet pass it By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge the sensor can determine the actual size of the sheet If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination the DC controller determines a mismatch The sheet is ejected from the printer and the printer stops SW1 o7 6 SW2 lo 6 SW3 07 Cassette paper size detection switches Overhead transparency detection In order to prevent print quality problems the printer prints more slowly on overhead transparencies OHT than on plain paper A sensor above the paper leading edge sensor detects an OHT and sig
421. ser The thermistor has deteriorated Replace the fuser The DC controller PCA is defective Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Distortion or blurring This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for distortion or blurring 350 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 35 Causes for distortion or blurring The color plane registration is out of specification Calibrate the printer from the Print Quality menu See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The ETB is defective If the ETB belt does not rotate smoothly replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The ETB motor drive gear is worn or damaged Replace the ETB motor The drum motor drive gear is worn or damaged Replace the drum motor for the affected color The color registration detection unit is defective Replace the color registration detection unit The laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the affected color Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Colo
422. ser For help press printer is fully seated Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that fuser connector J4034 is good replace the connector if necessary Replace the fuser assembly Replace the DC controller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 250 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued Message INSTALL SUPPLIES For status press INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT For help press LOAD TRAY xx lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY xx lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press LOAD TRAY xx TYPE SIZE For help press ENWW At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job No other tray is available emm o em Press and then press fo
423. sfer unit maintenance fuser maintenance color page and total page and clearing the event log Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer s internal assemblies and sensors 240 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Troubleshooting process Note ENWW When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation the printer control panel alerts you to the situation This section contains a pre troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems e Use the pre troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following conditions e Are supply items within their rated life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition Pre troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem s Table 7 1 Pre troublesh
424. shows the print cartridge consumption levels At least one color supply item is out and needs to be replaced Printing can continue but only black toner will be used Note The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels Replace the fuser to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press 2 to identify which supplies should be replaced Replace the identified supplies to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press to identify which supplies should be replaced Replace the identified supplies to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server ENWW Table 7 3 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued REPLACE TRANSFER KIT The transfer unit has reached Replace the transfer unit to end of life continue printing For help press Press for detailed information Press A and Y to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded VWeb server Request accepted The print
425. sor test 390 sensors 413 solenoid removing 183 solenoids locating 396 416 switches 411 Tray 3 See 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 4 See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder troubleshooting about 240 blank images 346 blank spots 350 blurring 350 checklist 241 color 337 341 344 345 346 349 communications 356 customer support 37 435 dark print 345 diagnostics 383 dirty pages 347 dots 346 error messages 4600 alphabetical 246 error messages 4600 numerical 282 error messages 4650 alphabetical 262 error messages 4650 numerical 300 error messages types of 245 flowchart 242 fusing 350 ENWW image formation 335 jams 321 light print 344 351 lines 348 media 19 335 multi feeds 333 power on 244 print quality 337 process 241 repetitive defects 352 service approach 34 skewed pages 334 smearing 351 transparencies 336 wrinkled paper 333 U UEL universal exit language 357 UNIX support 59 62 73 unlocking control panel menus 403 unpacking the printer 41 Update Now button driver 61 usage page printing 361 376 USB connection cables partnumbers 436 locating 10 setting up 55 V vacuuming toner 80 voltage regulatory information 11 specifications 14 Ww WAIT period 108 warning messages clearable 119 245 warranty customer support 37 product 28 washing toner off clothing 80 Web Jetadmin 73 Web sites customer support 37 435 drivers downloading 36 media specifications 17 ordering supplies 35 434 recy
426. spots 350 blurring 350 color 337 341 344 345 346 349 dark print 345 defects 343 diagnostic pages 337 dirty pages 347 dots 346 fusing poor 350 light print 344 lines 348 media 335 misplaced images 351 repetitive defects 352 smearing 351 overlay control panel 50 437 P page counts 368 376 403 406 pages per minute 5 PANTONE color matching 338 paper colored 21 default size 408 driver settings 61 glossy 21 heavy 22 media troubleshooting 19 part numbers 436 pickup feed operations 144 preprinted 23 recycled 24 size detection operations 148 158 skewed troubleshooting 334 specifications 17 speed control 150 tough 23 troubleshooting print quality 335 weight equivalence table 24 wrinkled troubleshooting 333 Paper handling menu 362 paper jams See jams paper path jams causes of 330 paper pickup assembly partnumbers 455 469 paper pickup driver unit removing 181 paper pickup rollers removing 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 236 500 sheet paper feeder 224 Tray1 181 Tray 2 180 paper pickup sensor PCA removing 179 paper pickup unit removing 178 paper pickup drive assembly part numbers 459 Index 511 paper size detection switch removing 195 parallel connection cables part numbers 436 DOS commands 356 locating 9 10 operations 119 setting up 54 parameters networks 71 part numbers 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 478 500 sheet paper feeder 474 accessories 436 color registration detection assembly 455 control panel
427. sssssseseneeeeerenen nennen nnns 115 Higli voltage power Supply itecto depu nete dtd pai ee EE ka aeg uu RER 116 Low voltage power supply ssssssssseesseee nennen er nennen enhn nennen nnne nennen 116 Formater Ic 117 We et oder pee ta Manso arce bad ae Ned ten aede o ende eei a e tA REDE ea 118 ums 119 DIMM slots HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer sseeenee 120 PIL OVOIVIGW ME 121 J m aaa M 121 eia me 121 Laser scanner assembly eiie tte vitae he ELA eua Le cv HERR ELE R RR ERE Dd eap E 122 Scanner motor Control 122 ue eut RENE 124 Image formation process cenet aE EA EE A a A Print c rtrldges cionu ter aE AAN A 126 Toner level detection rnrrnnnrnanonnnnnrnnrrnnvnnnontvnnnnannnnnnnrnennnnteonenntnannnnnnnnnnnsennneneentnnernnn 127 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit ss 130 Electrostatic latent image formation block sssssesssssiensseerressrrssetrrrssirnnnsttnnssrennnsssrenns 131 Development Block qo EET 133 Transfer block qr IE 134 FUSING DOCK Aer 135 epe 136 Calibration and cleaning 2 dn Dee eee dekadanse 136 Color plane registration calibration senennnm eme 140 Drum phase calibratio
428. ssure roller unit Duplex switch back 152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 5 39 ENWW The HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn 4600hdn and 4650dtn printer models come standard with an additional 500 sheet paper feeder It is an option for all other models This additional tray tray 3 operates in the same way as tray 2 Figure 5 39 Additional 500 sheet paper feeder shows the paper path with the additional 500 sheet paper feeder installed Additional 500 sheet paper feeder Pickup and feed operations The following is the sequence of operations for the 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 5 40 500 sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation illustrates this sequence 1 The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver 2 The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor M4001 in the paper feeder and the feed roller starts to rotate 3 After the printer enters the Scanner Ready state the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of media The paper feeder pickup solenoid SL4001 turns on The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up media from the paper feeder 4 Separation pads eliminate extra sheets and a single piece of media enters the feed path 500 sheet paper feeder 153 Note Paper size detectio
429. stalling a new control panel label HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 51 Testing the printer operation Print a configuration page to ensure that the printer is working correctly 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to enter the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION Press 9 to select PRINT CONFIGURATION BS A m N 52 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Using PowerSave Note ENWW The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period You can set the length of time before the printer goes into PowerSave mode PowerSave settings vary depending on the model of printer that you have The printer control panel display dims when the printer is in PowerSave mode PowerSave mode does not affect printer warm up time To set PowerSave Time 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press Y to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press V to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUP Press V to highlight POWERSAVE TIME Press to select POWERSAVE TIME Press A or Y to select the appropriate time period 0 N O 0O o bh Press to set the time period Press Pause Resume HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet
430. t was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Dec
431. t 4650 models 262 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 283 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 300 Error messages and associated jam locations sssssssessss 323 Common causes of jaMS nennen enn 325 Causes for Jaris in tray 1 itte cet mardele e node ecd 328 Causes for jams in tray 2 328 Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3 4 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 329 Causes for jams in the paper path ssssssssssssssseeeeee 330 Causes for jams in the top Cover mee 331 Causes for jams in the duplex path ssssssssssssseee 331 Causes for multiple pages feeding see 333 Causes for wrinkled or folded media part one paper path entrance 333 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part two paper path exit 334 Causes for skewed paper 334 Image defects nine Ett REED ttem ave 343 Causes for light images entente teet hene EC tbe be e E e da E bee 344 Causes for light color D e rote eR ARR Eege den 344 Causes for dark Images reet e t esee Ure id iere Pudet bee ESE 345 Causes for dark colors eene 345 Causes for a completely blank image sse 346 Causes for an all black or solid Colored image esee 346 Causes for vertical lines of white dote 346 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper sssssssssssssssessss 347 Causes for dirt on the front
432. t SIZE gt For help press Move tray switch to custom alternates with LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press Move tray switch to standard alternates with LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To use another tray press LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE Move tray switch to custom Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job The size specified in the job requires that the tray switch be in the custom position Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job The size specified in the job is a detectable size Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job The size specified in the job requires that the tray Switch be in the custom position Press for detailed information Press and Y to step through the instructions Load the specified media into the tray Confirm that the guides are in the correct position Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position To use another tray press Load the specified media into the tray Confirm that the guides are in the correct position Verify that the tray switch is in the STANDARD p
433. t print servers configuring 71 connecting 56 EIO slots 57 installing 105 models including 2 operating systems supported 58 part numbers 436 troubleshooting 356 wireless printing 59 K Korean EMI statement 30 L label control panel 51 label control panel 437 labels printing 22 languages control panel 50 languages cotnrol panel 437 languages printer PJL 121 357 supported 5 laser beam exposure operations 132 laser statement for Finland 31 laser scanner assemblies removing 206 cover plate removing 202 operations 122 partnumbers 455 retaining bars removing 204 LaserJet Tough paper 23 LaserJet Utility Macintosh 64 67 LED formatter 383 left cover removing 169 Index 509 letterhead 23 life expectancies supplies 81 light print troubleshooting 344 lines troubleshooting 348 links embedded Web server 372 Linux support 59 62 LocalTalk networks 59 locking control panel menus 76 log event 368 387 low voltage power supply operations 116 part numbers 445 457 PCA locating 420 removing 197 LSTR period 108 M Macintosh drivers supported 62 installing network software 67 installing software 68 networks supported 59 software included 64 Manual color settings 340 manuals 38 438 matching colors 337 338 media colored paper 21 default size 408 driver settings 61 envelopes 22 glossy paper 21 heavy paper 22 labels 22 letterhead 23 part numbers 436 pickup feed operations 144 preprinted forms 23 recy
434. t server network card and automatic 2 sided printing duplexing an additional 500 sheet feeder and 10 MB of SDRAM Callout 2 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer model The HP CLJ 4600hdn printer contains all of the number C9663A features of the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610n print server network card and automatic 2 sided printing duplexing an additional 500 sheet feeder a hard disk and 160 MB of SDRAM Callout 2 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer HP LaserJet 4650 models HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer model number The HP CLJ 4650 printer is the base model Q3668A which includes 128 megabytes MB of dual data rate DDR synchronous dynamic random access memory SDRAM plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 160 MB of memory and a 500 sheet input tray The printer provides three enhanced input output EIO slots wireless connectivity an auxiliary port a universal serial bus USB connection and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 C compliant Callout 1 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer HP Color LaserJet 4650n printer model number The HP CLJ 4650n printer contains all of the Q3669A features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print ser
435. tab contains the following screens e Configure Device Use this screen to configure all printer This screen contains the traditional menus that are found on printers that use a control panel display Information Paper Handling Configure Device and Diagnostics e Alerts For networks only Use this screen to set up e mail alerts for various printer and supplies events e E mail For networks only Use this screen in conjunction with the Alerts screen to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to set e mail alerts e Security Use this screen to set a password that must be typed in order to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Enable and disable certain features of the EWS e Other Links Use this screen to add or customize a link to another Web site The created link appears in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages The following permanent links always appear in the Other Links area HP Instant Support Order Supplies and Product Support e Device Information Use this screen to name the printer and assign an asset number to it Type the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer e Language Use this screen to specify the language in which the embedded Web server information appears Networking tab The network administrator can use this tab allows to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network Th
436. ter driver match the type of media that is loaded in the tray Chapter 1 Product information ENWW CAUTION Note ENWW Transparencies When printing on transparencies use the following guidelines e Handle transparencies by the edges Oils from your fingers that are deposited on the transparency can cause print quality problems e Use only overhead transparencies that are recommended for use in this printer Hewlett Packard Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results e In either the software program or the driver select TRANSPARENCY as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies Transparencies that are not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the printer causing damage to the printer Table 1 5 Printing on transparencies Electrical surface resistivity 2 0 to 15 ohms by 10 ohms per square inch Fusing compatibility Materials must not discolor melt offset or release hazardous emissions when heated to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Caliper thickness 0 12 mm 0 0048 inch to 0 13 mm 0 0052 inch Glossy paper e In either the software program or the driver select GLOSSY HEAVY or HIGH GLOSS HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper e Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the inp
437. the fuser delivery sensor PS12 causing a 13 09 00 error message WARNING The fuser is hot wait 10 minutes for it to cool down ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 323 Note Table 7 6 Error messages and associated jam locations continued 13 0A 00 JAM IN TOP COVER 1 printer A 13 0A 00 jam occurs when AREA the printer is trying to deliver sheets to the output bin for a simplex job or for a duplex turnaround when the paper was late leaving or never left the fuser delivery sensor PS12 The media might have been incorrectly loaded in the paper trays something in the fuser might be obstructing the media or the sensor could be stuck or broken WARNING The fuser is hot wait 10 minutes for it to cool down 13 12 00 JAM IN DUPLEX 1 2 3 printer A 13 12 00 jam occurs when PATH the printer is trying to print a duplex print job after the media has entered the fuser and started back down the paper path but has never arrived at or was late getting to the paper leading edge sensor PS3 The media might have been disturbed by an outside source for example someone might have grabbed the media while it was turning around or something might be in the fuser that is obstructing the media Jam recovery This printer automatically provides jam recovery a feature that you can use to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages Two options are e AUTO The printer will attempt
438. the DC controller which turns the laser on or off based on the signal Figure 5 10 Formatter system shows the formatter system Bk laser scanner External device M laser scanner host computer etc Formatter DC Controller PCB PCB VIDEO signal VIDEO INTERFACE VIDEO signal signal VIDEO signal gt Y laser scanner VIDEO gt C laser scanner Figure 5 10 Formatter system PowerSave This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time Set the time length in the Configure Device menu under System Setup When the printer is in PowerSave mode the control panel backlight is turned off but the printer retains all printer settings downloadable fonts and macros The default setting is POWERSAVE ON with a 30 minute idle time You can turn PowerSave off in the Configure Device menu under Resets The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs e A print job valid data or a PML or PUL command is received at the parallel port FIR port HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ElO card or 1 1 USB connector HP Color LaserJet 4650 models e A control panel button is pressed e The top cover is opened e A paper tray is opened e The engine test button is pressed Note Printer error messages override the PowerSave message The printer enters
439. the MENUS Press V to highlight SERVICE Press to select SERVICE Ow Ro m 368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Press or V until the first digit of the PIN appears Press to save the digit The control panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits have been typed ENWW T Press lt at any time to move to the previous digit Use the Service menu to reset counts clear the event log specify the serial number specify the date the printer was first used and reset the default paper size Table 7 48 Service menu ee ues Jeer CLEAR EVENT LOG Use this item to clear the printer s internal event log TOTAL MONO PAGES Range 0 to 9999999 Total mono pages printed HP Color LaserJet 4650 models TOTAL COLOR PAGES Range 0 to 9999999 Total color pages printed HP Color LaserJet 4650 models REFURBISH PAGE COUNT Range 0 to 9999999 Factory service setting HP Color LaserJet 4650 models TOTAL PAGE COUNT Range 0 to 9999999 Use this item to reset the page count after replacing the E LaserJet 4600 formatter The page count models should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter TRANSFER KIT COUNT Range 0 to 9999999 Use this item to reset the page 120 000 is the maximum ss O WE eee unit if the value is lost This number of pages the transfer it int item automatically resets to unit can print zero when the transfer unit is replaced an
440. tics pages 337 dirty pages 347 dots 346 fusing poor 350 light print 344 lines 348 media 335 misplaced images 351 repetitive defects 352 smearing 351 image stabilization control 141 image transfer kit See transfer kit ETB image formation operations 124 131 ImageREt 338 images printing 22 imaging drum See drum Information menu 361 information pages 373 Information tab embedded Web server 371 initializing hard disk 404 NVRAM 403 input output operations 119 installation connecting power cord 47 connecting to a computer 54 control panel overlay 50 flash memory card 4650 102 HP Jetdirect print servers 105 Macintosh network software 67 Macintosh software 68 media tray 46 memory 4600 93 memory 4650 97 print cartridges 48 site requirements 12 testing the printer 52 unpacking the printer 41 Windows network software 66 Windows software 65 66 69 Instant Support Professional Edition ISPE 37 interface operations 119 internal components diagnostics 394 part numbers 448 ENWW INTR period 108 ISPE Instant Support Professional Edition 37 J jams 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 329 500 sheet paper feeder 329 331 causes of 325 cleaning spilled toner 80 duplex path 331 error messages 322 locations 321 paper path 330 paper path test 388 print quality troubleshooting 337 recovery settings 324 repeated troubleshooting 326 top cover 331 Tray 1 328 Tray 2 328 Japanese VCCI statement 30 Jetadmin HP Web 73 Jetdirec
441. tings that provide the best print quality for each object Object tagging combined with optimized default settings produces great color out of the box In the Windows environment the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents However situations might occur when you want to print a color document in grayscale black and white or want to change one of the printer s color options e Using Windows print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings on the Color tab in the printer driver e Using a Macintosh computer print in grayscale or change the color options by using the Color Matching pop up menu in the Print dialog box Print in Grayscale Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document by using black toner This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements used for each element in a document For more information see your printer driver online Help Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents Use the Manual color adjustment option to adjust th
442. tion 161 Table 6 1 Types of screws continued ee oem um Retaining ring e type To hold a shaft through a slot For example keep a gear on a shaft 162 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Supplies ENWW The customer replaces print cartridges the fuser and the ETB as they are depleted Chapter 4 explains when to replace supplies and provides instructions about replacing them The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer replaceable supplies by keeping a page count Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended If you replace either the fuser or the transfer unit when servicing the printer and these supplies have not yet reached the end of their estimated life you must reset the page count for these supplies through the Configure device menu on the control panel See Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life and Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life for instructions about resetting the transfer unit and fuser counts Table 6 2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 9 000 pages 8 000 pages Supply item Black K print cartridge Cyan C print cartridge Magenta M print cartridge Yellow Y print cartridge Printer message REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE REPLACE CYAN CARTRIDGE REPLACE MAGENTA CARTRIDGE REPLACE YELLOW CARTRIDGE 8 000 pages 8 000 pages Approximat
443. tly from a standalone Apple Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network For specific information about configuring the computer and printer to print through a LocalTalk interface see the printer getting started guide and the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide For LocalTalk configuration the DIN 8 printer cable must be connected to the printer port on the Macintosh computer LocalTalk network configuration To connect the printer to a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network use the HP LocalTalk Cable Kit part number J4135A You will need a kit for each printer and an additional kit for each Macintosh computer on the network UNIX Linux networks Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP Ux or Sun Solaris networks For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks use HP Web Jetadmin To obtain HP software for UNIX Linux networks visit HP Customer Care online at www hp com support net printing For other installation options supported by the HP Jetdirect print server see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide that is included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server Wireless printing Wireless networks offer a safe secure and cost effective alternative to traditional wired network connections IEEE 802 11b standard By using the wireless HP Jetdirect 802 11b external print server HP peripherals can be placed
444. tory page lists the files and directories that are stored in printer memory or on the hard drive not all printer models come with a hard drive 1 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS 2 Press V to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press to select INFORMATION 4 Press V to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY 5 Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY The message PRINTING FILE DIRECTORY appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the file directory page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page 378 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Note Figure 7 12 ENWW The file directory page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same file directory page information as the page shown below Di J File directory page HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown Print the PCL font list page The PCL font list page list the PCL fonts that are available on the printer 1 2 3 4 5 Press HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models to open the MENUS Press V to highlight INFORMATION Press to select INFORMATION Press V to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST The message PRINTING PCL FONT LIST appears on the control panel display until the printer finishes printing the PCL fonts list page The printer returns to the Ready state a
445. tribute HP software in managed corporate printing environments Using HP Driver Preconfiguration information technology IT administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment For more information see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide which is available at www hp com support lj4600 or at www hp com support lj4650 Printer drivers 61 See the printer driver online Help for details about color settings and how they effect printed output Available drivers Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer by using a printer language Check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD ROM for additional software and languages The following printer drivers are included with the printer The most recent drivers are available at www hp com support lj4600 or at www hp com support lj4650 Depending on the configuration of Windows based computers the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers Operating PCL 6 PCL 5c PPD 2 system Windows 98 Me 98 Me Ix Webonly Web only WindowsXP XP Ix wee Web only Server EL only 2003 muc all features are EE from all NEM or operating systems NEM the NEAN Help in your driver for available fe
446. troller PCA Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models Press C2 to continue Turn the printer off and then on ENWW Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued 53 XY ZZ An error occurred in some Press Cancel Job If the printer memory problem persists replace the PRIN TERERROR DIMM card in the slot indicated To continue press X DIMM Type CANCEL JOB 1 RAM Y Device Location 1 DIMM Slot 1 2 DIMM Slot 2 3 DIMM Slot 3 4 DIMM Slot 4 ZZ Error Number 0 unsupported memory 1 unrecognized memory 2 unsupported memory size 3 failed RAM test 4 exceeded maximum RAM size 5 invalid DIMM speed 53 10 05 A DIMM is installed in both the This is an invalid configuration 168 pin DIMM Slot 4 and the DIMMs can not be installed in PRINTER ERROR 100 pin DIMM Slot 5 both of these slots at the same To continue time turn off then on Remove one of the DIMMs or move one of the DIMMs to a different slot ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 293 Table 7 4 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models continued tusen Acton 0 Message 54 X PRINTER ERROR 294 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting X Description 1 Low fuser temperature 3 Dmax density sensor 5 CPR sensor 6 OHT sensor 7 yellow drum phase home position sensor 8 magenta drum phase home position sensor 9 cyan drum pha
447. tter Lwaa 6 5 Bels A 65 dB A Idle Lasep D Bels A 50 dB AT SPL Bystander Position Declared Per ISO 9296 Active 22 ppm letter Lpam 51 dB A Idle Loam 34 dB A Values are subject to change See www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support 14650 for current information PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes Supply storage requirements The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment Use storage requirements to determine the shelf life of stored supplies Table 1 3 Supply storage requirements Storage time Storage condition Temperature Normal maximum of 2 5 years 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Severe maximum of 18 days High 35 to 40 C 95 to 104 F Low 0 to 20 C 32 to 4 F Maximum temperature change 40 to 15 C 104 to 59 F rate within 3 minutes 20 to 25 C 4 to 77 F within 3 minutes Humidity Normal maximum of 2 5 years 35 to 85 RH Severe maximum of 18 days High 85 to 95 RH Low 10 to 35 RH Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg 18 1 to 29 9 inches Hg The average storage time includes use time Use cartridges within 2 5 years of the date code on the cartridge 16 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Print media ENWW The following sections describes print media that can be used in the HP Color LaserJet Series printer Print media specifications For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib photocopy
448. tter to printer memory To continue abort operation This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid operations In some Try printing a job from a cases electrical noise in the different software program cable can corrupt data during If the job prints go back to transmission to the printer the first program and try Other causes include poor printing a different file If quality parallel cables poor the message appears only connections or home grown with a certain software programs On rare occasions program or print job the formatter is at fault which contact the software is usually indicated by a 79 vendor for assistance Service Error Turn the printer off and turn off then on then on If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer Turn the printer off Remove all memory DIMMs or third party DIMMs from the printer Do not remove the firmware DIMM in slot J1 Remove all EIO devices from the printer Turn the printer on If the error no longer exists install each DIMM and EIO device one ata time making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer If th
449. tware programs and print jobs disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer Turn the printer off Remove all memory DIMMs or third party DIMMs from the printer Remove all EIO devices from the printer Turn the printer on If the error no longer exists install each DIMM and EIO device one ata time making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer If the error persists replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer See Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 308 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 5 Numerical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4650 models continued emm Acton 0 Message 50 X FUSER ERROR For help press A fuser error has occurred X Description 1 low fuser temperature o 2 fuser warmup service 3 high fuser temperature 4 faulty fuser 5 inconsistent fuser 6 open fuser Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down Reinstall the fuser and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer Replace the connector if it is damaged Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser If resistance
450. u 365 counts page 368 376 403 406 covers 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder removing 226 cleaning 80 front removing 172 left removing 169 locating 9 10 partnumbers 446 rear top removing 167 rear removing 165 right removing 170 top jams 331 top removing 166 CPU 119 critical error messages 245 customer support 37 435 D dark print troubleshooting 345 DC controller operations 110 PCA assembly part numbers 453 PCA locating 420 PCA part numbers 445 PCA removing 193 shield removing 177 DDR SDRAM 97 Declaration of Conformity 28 default settings restoring 367 delivery unit operations 151 demo page printing 361 378 density operations 141 developing cylinder operations 129 developing disengaging motor assembly removing 192 developing disengaging rod removing 185 development block operations 133 development operations 133 DHALF control 142 diagnostics calibration bypass 404 cartridge check 388 component 394 engine 385 402 ENWW formatter 402 LED 383 menu 367 paper path 388 print quality 337 Print Stop 399 DIMMs enabling 4600 95 104 installing 4600 93 installing 4650 97 operations 119 part numbers 437 445 PCA locating 420 verifying installation 4600 96 dirty pages troubleshooting 347 disengaging drive assembly part numbers 463 disengaging motor assembly removing 192 disengaging rod removing 185 disk features 119 file directory printing 361 378 initialization 404 part numbers 437 DMA
451. ubleshooting 357 QPJL INFO ID This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation The following is the command syntax QPJL INFO ID CR lt LF gt QPJL INFO USTATUS This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status PAGE and TIMED status are not supported The following is the command syntax QPJL INFO USTATUS CR lt LF gt QPJL INFO PAGECOUNT This command returns the number of pages that have been printed by the engine PJL JOB This command informs the printer of the start of a PUL job and synchronizes the job status information The printer counts print jobs including nested jobs incrementing the job counter for the PJL JOB command and decrementing it for PJL EOJ The printer accepts the NAME parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message if the unsolicited job status is enabled The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I O channel that has enabled this function The following is the message format PJL USTATUS JOB lt CR gt lt LF gt START lt CR gt lt LF gt NAME lt job name gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I O channel This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel PJL EOJ This command identifies the end of a print job and is
452. uence of events is as follows 1 Power is turned on 2 The low voltage power supply unit supplies dc power to the DC controller 3 The CPU in the DC controller starts to control printer operations 4 The printer enters the standby period 5 Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter the CPU sends a signal to drive the laser diode the motors and the solenoids ENWW Note Figure 5 3 ENWW See the general circuit diagram for detailed information about the printer circuitry DC controller PCA E 1c1009 IG 1010 M Developing Pick up motor MX ES disengaging motor i IC Casette pick up solenoid Multi purpose tray SL Pick up solenoid Cassette paper sensor Multi purpose tray paper sensor Paper leading edge sensor Ge d NN OHT sensor ee m ml Fuser paper sensor Drum home Fuser delivery sensor position sensors Delivery tray paper full H ETB speed sensor sensar 1 DI Developing disengaging Cassette paper size detection Ee IC1012 j sensor switch CPU 1 Laser Scanner units 1 pe eae aes Color misregistration Lo Fame sad n H 1 Se detection unit H ee Primary exposure unit 5 1 1 i FT F 3 3V AC input Low voltage power supply 5V circuit 24V ae Tee circuit DE i Door open ud dj detection switch Fuser oi E High voltage power
453. uit diagram 500 sheet feeder sss 430 General circuit diagram 2 x 500 sheet feeder AA 431 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer major components 442 Printer PCAS o etre rte e pee I e vo dees a 444 External covers and panels sssssssssssssseeeeeeees 446 Internal components 1 of D 448 Internal components 2 0f 5 cei decre dert dece are 450 Internal components 3 of D 452 Internal components 4 of D 454 Internal components 5 of D 456 Paper pickup drive assembly e ADB Drum drive assembly cei dl Lender aere aan dni 460 Disengaging drive assembly ssssseem emen 462 Fuser drive assembly A 464 Cassette VIY 2 sce uento teet fU seasons dar ER 466 Paper pickup assembly A 4608 ETB assembly iet eite e eite rutete 470 Fuser assembly tool di dde LL cedo e eni ta edd dd dia dod tt re 472 500 sheet paper feeder assembly ccceceeceeeeeencecceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeesnnnnaaeees 474 500 sheet paper feeder internal components ssssssssssssss 476 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder e 478 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 1 of 21 480 2 x 500 sheet feeder internal components 2 of 21 482 2 x 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly susussss 484 2 x 500 sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly sssuessus 486 2 x 500 sheet feeder lower paper
454. ures If you do not have access to a CD ROM drive you can download the printing system software from the Internet at www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 Sample model scripts for UNIX HP UX Sun Solaris and Linux networks are available for download at www hp com support You can download the latest software free of charge at www hp com support lj4600 or www hp com support lj4650 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections Only the HP LaserJet 4650 models supports the USB cable connection described in this section This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP When installing the printing software in a direct connect environment always install the software before connecting the parallel or USB cable If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software installation see Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection However you cannot connect both the parallel and USB cable at the same time Use an IEEE 1284 C cable or a standard 2 meter USB cable Windows NT 4 0 does not support USB cable connections To install the printing system software 1 Close all software programs that are open or running 2 Insert the printer CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If the welcome scree
455. ut tray that is being used e Because this setting affects all print jobs return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed Hewlett Packard Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet High Gloss paper with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results If HP Color LaserJet High Gloss paper is not used with this printer print quality might be compromised Colored paper e Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper e Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer s fusing temperature of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second without deterioration e Donotuse paper that contains a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced e The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors Print media 21 Note Note 22 Printing images To obtain the best print quality when printing images use HP High Gloss Laser Paper Q2419A In either the software program or the driver select GLOSSY HEAVY or HIGH GLOSS HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper e In either the software program or the printer driver select HIGH GLOSS IMAGES HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for g
456. val and replacement ENWW Left cover 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover 2 Open the front cover Remove one screw callout 1 and disengage the locking tabs callout 2 4 Tilt the top of the cover away from the printer and remove it Figure 6 8 Remove the left cover 1 of 2 Figure 6 9 Remove the left cover 2 of 2 ENWW Covers and external components 169 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the left cover be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer chassis Right cover 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear cover See Rear cover e Top cover See Top cover e Rear top cover See Rear top cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Remove one screw callout 1 and disengage the two locking tabs callout 2 4 Tilt the top of the right cover away from the printer and remove it Ke Figure 6 10 Remove the right cover Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the right cover be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer frame 170 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Multipurpose tray tray 1 1 Remove tray 2 from the printer and set it aside 2 Unhook the two link arms callout 1 3 Flex the tray inward near the two link arms and remove the tray Figure 6 11 Remove the multipur
457. veloping cylinder in contact with the drum pushing the toner against the drum surface for development The toner is non magnetic and consists of resins This block consists of two steps e Toner charging e Development Figure 5 23 Development block shows a cross section of a print cartridge and illustrates the development block Toner charging roller Print cartridge AN Developing cylinder Toner stirring blade Jpc bias Toner feed roller DC bias 3 3 Development block Step 4 Toner charging As the toner stirring blade turns inside the cartridge the friction creates a negative potential on the toner A negative voltage is applied to the toner charging roller and creates a uniform negative potential on the toner Step 5 Development The areas on the photosensitive drum that have been exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential are less negatively charged than the toner particles on the developing cylinder As the photosensitive drum rotates the toner adheres to the exposed areas on the photosensitive drum At this point the image is visible on the drum surface Image formation system 133 Figure 5 24 Transfer block The third part of the image formation process is the transfer block in which the toner image is transferred from the photosensitive drum to the paper This block consists of three steps e Attaching e Transfer e Separatio
458. ver cccceeeeeeeeneecaeceeeeeeeeeteeeeceaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeteees 229 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nrrnnnnnnn 230 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly sssssssssssssssseee 231 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder feed Sensor sssssssssrrrissrssresttttrtnnstnrrtrrttrnntnnnnnn nen tn nenen 232 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper sensor 233 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper or lower cassette paper detection switch 234 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA sssssssessensssssrrnrsessrrnrrtnssrrrttnnnnnsntnntnn nennen nnn nnn 235 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers essem 236 7 Troubleshooting MOGUCOM dex 240 Troubleshooting eier 241 Pre troubleshooting checklist ssse eem ene 241 reel e idee EE 242 Troubleshooting power on sssssseeeennee eee nene en nnne nennen 244 Printer error troubleshooting sic erint decet EIE nete de Ree ERE REOR TUR SEENEN KEEN EE 245 ENWW ENWW Statusimessages utide ain aw eerte ates 245 Warning messages EE 245 Erformessages 12e Musee eratac slagere dear edd eid EERS EET 245 Critical error MESSAGES accro ciprian enii i i etd ed tud d e dee EL dd du 245 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color LaserJet 4600 models 246 Alphabetical printer messages HP Color L
459. ver network card Callout 1 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650n printer ENWW Model configurations 3 4 Table 1 1 Model configurations continued HP Color LaserJet 4650dn printer model number Q3670A HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn printer model number Q3671A HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer model number Q3672A Chapter 1 Product information The HP CLJ 4650dn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server network card and automatic 2 sided printing duplexing Callout 1 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650dn printer The HP CLJ 4650dtn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server network card automatic 2 sided printing duplexing an additional 500 sheet feeder This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288 MB of memory Callout 2 in Figure 1 1 HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn printer The HP CLJ 4650hdn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server network card automatic 2 sided printing duplexing a 2 x 500 sheet feeder and a hard drive This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288 MB of memory
460. w HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models Vertical lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for vertical lines Table 7 28 Causes for vertical lines mm Jette The photosensitive drum has grooves around Replace the cartridge that indicates the color of the circumference the vertical lines The fuser sleeve has grooves around the Replace the fuser circumference White vertical lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white vertical lines Table 7 29 Causes for white vertical lines LONE NN The developing cylinder has grooves around the Replace the print cartridge for the color in which circumference the white lines appear The photosensitive drum has grooves around Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the circumference the white lines appear The laser is blocked by a foreign substance Inspect the laser source for the affected color and remove any debris that might be blocking it The mirror in the laser scanner unit is dirty Replace the laser scanner for the color in which the white lines appear Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or Full Calibrate Now HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The fuser sleeve is scarred vertically All colors Replace the fuser are affected 348 Chapter Troubleshooting E
461. wer cassette switch disconnect one connector callout 4 release the switch retaining tabs callout 5 and then remove the lower cassette paper sensor callout 6 Figure 6 92 Remove 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder upper cassette paper detection switch 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover See 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder left cover M Disconnect nine connectors callout 1 and then remove two screws callout 2 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA callout 3 Figure 6 93 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder driver PCA ENWW Optional 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder 235 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers 1 Locate the upper and lower pickup rollers callout 1 2 For the upper pickup rollers Separate the feeder from the printer Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft Repeat this step for the remaining roller 3 For the lower pickup roller Remove the upper cassette from the feeder Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft Repeat this step for the remaining roller Figure 6 94 Remove the 2 x 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Troubleshooting This chapte
462. x Windows NT 4 0 Server and Workstation Windows 2000 Professional Server and Advanced Server and Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 systems To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems visit HP Customer Care Online at www hp com go webjetadmin When installed on a host server any client can open HP Web Jetadmin through a supported Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 and 6 0 or Netscape Navigator 7 0 HP Web Jetadmin has the following features e The task oriented user interface provides configurable views saving network managers significant time e Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function that is viewed or used e Instant e mail notification of hardware failure low supplies and other printer problems can be routed to different people e Remote installation and management is available from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser e Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network without manually entering each printer into a database e The software accommodates simple integration into enterprise management packages e You can quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address color capability and model name e You can easily organize peripherals into logical groups with virtual office maps for easy navigation e You can manage and configure multiple printers at one time
463. y RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press alternates with Ready 274 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting This message appears while the printer RGB samples are generated The printer is generating a supplies status page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating a usage page page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking sheets When paper motion begins this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray A device failure has occurred on the specified drive The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory No action is necessary No action is necessary No action is necessary Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin The message will disappear when the job is finished You can then remove pages from the bin No action is necessary No act
464. y objects such as a hand or paper or by direct sunlight or any bright light shining into either infrared port USB 1 1 connector HP Color LaserJet 4650 models The HP Color LaserJet 4650 models supports a USB 1 1 connector on the back of the printer You must use an A to B type USB cable Flash Optional flash is available in 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storing forms fonts and signatures Hard disk accessory The optional hard disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter The optional ElO based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints mopies and storing forms fonts and signatures CPU The HP LaserJet 4600 models formatter incorporates a 400 MHz RISC processor The HP LaserJet 4650 models formatter incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor Printer memory If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory a clearable warning message will appear on the control panel Engine control system 119 Some printer messages are affected by the auto continue and clearable warning settings from the Configure Device menu under System Setup If Clearable Warning Job is set on the control panel warning messages appear on the control panel display until the end of the job from which they were generated If Clearable Warning On is set warning messages appear on the control panel until HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or MENU HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is pressed If

HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers service manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents